Home

Reference Information User Manual

1. The User Manual is organized in to various parts each discussing a component of the Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing system Audience This Fund Manager User Manual is intended for the Fund Administrator users and system operators in the AMC Organization The Fund Manager User Manual is organized under the following chapter sequence About This Manual Acquaints you with the use structure and audience of Chapter 1 the manual Chapter 2 Overview enables you learn about the Reference Information Reference Information Maintaining System Parameters explains how to Chapter 3 at ae maintain system parameters Reference Information Maintaining Currencies and Capturing Exchange Chapter 4 Rates Explains how you can maintain currencies exchange rate sources pair currencies and also how you can capture prevailing exchange rates Reference Information Importing Bulk Client Information takes you Chapter 5 through the processes involved in configuring the system to process bulk import of business information Reference Information Setting up Loads The process of setting up the Chapter 6 different fees and incentives that would be applied by your AMC is explained Reference Information Maintaining Time Zones The process of captur Chapter 7 ing time zones for different modules is explained t1 ORACLE 1 5 Conventions used in this manual Before you begin usi
2. You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value 6 21 ORACLE 6 5 3 2 Editing Currency Details You can modify the details of a currency that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Exchange Rate Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorization Status field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters of the exchange rate for retrieving the records Click Search button All unauthorized exchange rate records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The Exchange Rate Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Exchange Rate Maintenance Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Exchange Rate Maintenance Summary screen 6 5 3 3 Viewing Exchange Rate Details To view the exchange rate details that you have previously ent
3. 8 1 16 1 Checks Before you set up the details for a trailing fee load or periodic load and apply it to a fund it is desirable to ensure that the following information is already set up in the system e The trailing fee that must be applied must be set up as a periodic load in the Loads Maintenance e The fund that the load must be associated to must be an authorized fund e The different entities which will be the payees or recipients in respect of the trailing fee must be set up in the system 8 28 ORACLE 8 1 16 2 Setting up Trailing Fee 8 1 17 A trailing fee management fee is usually computed as a percentage of the holdings of the investor based on the method of computation specified for the fee The fee can be set up to apply to the holdings of an investor in e Any individual funds e Funds belonging to a load group e Funds part of a product or policy plan portfolio To set up the trailing fee in the Periodic Load Setup screen proceed as follows e To setup the trailing fee for a fund choose the Fund option in the Fund Product section in the top right portion of the screen To set up the trailing fee for a product choose the Product option To set up the fee for a load group select the Group option e To setup the trailing fee for a fund choose the Fund option in the Fund Product section in the top right portion of the screen To set up the trailing fee for a product choose the Product option
4. After you have set up an entity of any type in the system you must have another user authorize the record so that it would be effective in the system Before the entity record is authorized you can edit it as many times as necessary You can also disable an entity before the entity record is authorized After authorization you can only make changes to the entity details through an amendment The Single Entity Maintenance Summary screen can be used for the following operations on entities e Retrieval for viewing e Editing unauthorized records e Disabling unauthorized entities e Authorizing entities e Amending authorized entities Invoke the Single Entity Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSENTMN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Single Entity Maintenance Summary Authorized Open Entity ID H Entity Name Entity Type Advanced Search Reset Records per page 15 v Authorized Entity ID Entity Name Entity Type a8 ORACLE 3 21 1 1 Retrieving Entity in Summary Screen You can retrieve a previously entered entity as follows Invoke the Entity Maintenance Summary screen and specify the following The status of the entity in the Authorization Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the entities are retrieved The status of the entity in the Record Status field If you
5. Campaign Code Campaign Start Date Campaign End Date Advanced Search fer Records per page 15 v 101 Authorized Open Campaign Code Campaign Start Date Campaign End Date 8 5 2 1 Retrieving Viewing Campaign Details You can retrieve view the campaign details as follows e Invoke the Campaign Summary screen from the Browser e Specify any or all of the following details in the screen The status of the transaction in the Authorized field If you choose the blank space then both the authorized and the unauthorized status records will be retrieved for the specified criteria The status of the records in the Open field If you choose the blank space then all the records are retrieved The campaign code in the Campaign Code field If you choose the blank space then all the records are retrieved The start date of the campaign in the Campaign Start Date field If you choose the blank space then all the records are retrieved The end date of the campaign in the Campaign End Date field If you choose the blank space then all the records are retrieved e Click Search button to view the records All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to view in the list of displayed records The Campaign Maintenance screen is displayed in the view mode 8 5 2
6. FCIS Entity Payment Maintenance Detail screen by typing UTDENTPY in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details Entity Payment Details New 75 Enter Query Entity Payment Details Entity Type Entity ID Payment Options Next Payment Date Payment Frequency Payment Frequency Description Last Processed Date Min Amount Reference Currency Reference Currency Description Min Payment Amount in Ref Description Entity Name Last Payment No GST Applicable Yes v GST Rate Include Trailer Fee No Hold Back Payment No Payment Currency Payment Currency Description Ccy Mode of Payment Mode of Payment Description Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in Entity Payment Maintenance Screen Entity Payment Details Section Entity Type AlphaNumeric Mandatory Select the type of entity for which the payment details are being defined Entity ID AlphaNumeric Mandatory Specify the ID fo the entity for whom you are defining the payment details Entity Name Display Only Based on your selection for Entity ID the system displays the corresponding Entity Name oe ORACLE 3 6 1 2 Description Display Only The system displays description of the speci
7. If agent is domiciled in UK then irrespective of the hierarchy they may follow RDR rules e Case 2 If agent is not domiciled in UK then irrespective of the domicile of other entities in Hierarchy they may not follow RDR rules Post RDR the system will compute trail commission based on transaction category for the transactions such as Legacy Direct Business and Execution Only Business done through a UK domiciled advisor For Advised Business done via a UK domiciled advisor the system will not compute trail commission You can maintain different rates of trail commission for the different transaction categories You can also set up configuration such that all trailer commission on legacy business get paid to the unitholder Post RDR the AMC can maintain the same management fee for transactions done through a UK domiciled Advisor and give rebate to investor The management fee periodic load with From entity as AMC and To Entity as Unit Holder to be given based on appropriate mapping In case of a Product periodic load if at Unitholder level and if Trailer commission preference at UH level is reinvestment then the system will generate transaction into CMA fund for the UH on trailer commission payment date If CMA fund is not maintained then the system will generate reinvestment transaction into the preferred fund f preferred fund is not maintained then the system will generate reinvestment transaction
8. Monday Tuesday Yes es X Number EIN Global Intermediary Identification Number GIIN Wednesday Thursday Friday Customer Interface Key Customer FLEXCUBEIS No Installation Module Agent Desc Effective Date for Capital Gains ti Account Name Coresp adaress MMMM At Lano Detalis CPF Account Types Def Broker Details Additonal info Default Yes v Direct Debit Yes v Branch Account Operation Type IBAN Reference2 Beneficiary BIC Code Beneficiary Code Beneficiary IBAN Intermediary BIC Code Intermediary Code Intermediary IBAN DateTime DateTime Mod No Open Authorized 60 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory ax Certncate Expiry Vate Saturday Online Interface Signed Of Finware Posting Swift Format Bank Charged Further Credit Name Further Credit Acct No Beneficiary Add1 Beneficiary Add2 Beneficiary Add3 Intermediary Add1 Intermediary Add2 Intermediary Add3 Specify the name in which the entity holds the specified bank account Account Currency NT103 Beneficaity Alphanumeric Mandatory From the list select the currency that the specified bank account uses You can maintain any number of accounts in each currency however you must designate one default bank account for each currency ou ORACLE Bank Alphanumeric Mandatory From the list select the name of the
9. Process Date The status of process After you have specified the required details click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view in the list of displayed records The Target Based Fee screen is displayed Select Unlock operation from the Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save your changes The Target Based Fee screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Target Based Fee Summary screen 8 3 0 3 Deleting Target Based Fee Details You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered Invoke the Target Based Fee Summary screen and specify the following The authorization status of the exchange rate record in the Authorization Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the exchange rate records in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The AMC code The fund ID The load ID The broker ID Process Date The status of process After you have specified the required details click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double
10. Input by DateTime Mod No You must maintain the following default information for fund rules imports Client Defaults e Fund country e Fund base currency e Fund type e Fund family e AMC ID e Minimum holding period Shares Characteristics e Certificate Option e Account statement frequency General Operating Rules e Pricing option Pre Post Priced e Price declare frequency e Ageing policy e NAV lot aM ORACLE 5 9 1 6 e Number of decimals for NAV e Rounding of NAV e Minimum holding period violation check Transaction Processing Rules e Transaction start and end periods e Transaction start and end dates e Transaction start and end times e Transaction cut off time e Transaction frequency e Minimum and maximum transaction amount limits e Minimum and maximum transaction units limits e Step units for amount and units transaction values e Rounding precision and rounding options for unit price e Backdating applicability and limit e Lag days for price allocation and confirmation e Rounding options for units e Applicability of check credit card and transfer on par with cash Income Distribution Rules e Default distribution mode e Applicability of look ahead processing e EPU Lot Fund Entity Mapping e Entity mapping for the fund Fund Level Holiday Defaults e Holiday rule Fund accounts e Fund bank accounts e IBAN Backdating rules for fund agency branches e Backdating period for eac
11. Parameter Maintenance Param Code Maintainable Yes Param Description Parameters 1of1 m Param Value Param Language Param Text Sort Order A All maintained codes are displayed in the grid portion of the screen as a list The following information is displayed for each parameter e The code and description for each parameter in the Parameter Code and Parameter Description fields e The maximum applicable length of any specification or valid value for the parameter in any maintenance screen or operation in the system This is displayed in the Maximum Length field e Whether the valid value list maintained for the parameter code is editable as designated by the implementers in the Editable field If the list is not editable then you cannot add any valid acceptable values to the list in this screen e A list of valid values defined by the implementers as acceptable specifications for the parameter code To view a list of these click the Valid Values button 4 3 2 System Params Value Maintenance Screen When you click the Valid Values button for a selected parameter code in the System Parameter Setup Detail screen the System Params Value Maintenance screen is opened ea ORACLE If the parameter value list is not editable then an error message Values cannot be maintained is displayed and when you click Ok button in the message window the System Params Value Maintenance screen
12. Specify the upper units boundary for the slab Any number of units lower than this value is reckoned as part of the slab Specifying the To Units is optional If not specified the system defaults the same based on the system High Units Value maintained in the Defaults Maintenance From Period Numeric Mandatory only for period based loads For period based loads that is the slab mode you selected for the load in the main Load Definition screen is either Period Period and Amount or Period and Units specify the beginning of the period in which the slab is applicable Any period higher than this is reckoned as part of the slab If you have designated the lower boundary as inclusive the load by checking the Consider as Lower Boundary check box in the main Load Definition screen then any period that is equal to this specified here is also reckoned as part of the slab The period you specify here will be interpreted by the basis you have specified in the Period Basis field in the main Load Definition screen For instance if you enter a value 1 then it will be deemed as 1 day of the period basis is Days 1 month if the period basis is Months and 1 year if the period basis is Years To Period Numeric Optional For period based loads i e the slab mode you selected for the load in the main Load Definition screen is either Period Period and Amount or Period and Units specify the end of the period in which th
13. The criteria could be based on the parameters given Choose one from the list box and select an Operator like gt lt and enter the value you want to assign The system will validate the specified criteria and the load will be applied only on successful validation of the same Load Details Section After you have set up the basic parameters for a load in the main Load Definition screen you must set up the details of any applicable slabs and any criteria for the load before you actually save the load into the system database To do so scroll down to the Load Details section at the lowest portion of the Load Maintenance screen Here you can specify the following information for each slab that you want to define for the load For loads with the Slab Mode Date Date and Amount or Date and Units e Specify the lower and upper date boundaries for each slab in the From Date and To Date fields e Specify the lower and upper amount or units boundaries for each slab in the From Amount and To Amount fields or the From Units and To Units fields as applicable e Specify the applicable return value for each slab in the Return Value field e Specify the floor and ceiling values if any e Save your specifications For loads with the Slab Mode Period Period and Amount or Period and Units e Specify the lower and upper period boundaries for each slab in the From Period and To Period fields e
14. a Be ORACLE corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details FCIS WithholdingTax Setup Detail New 53 Enter Query Entity Type Unit Holder Entity Category Category Name Effective Date Tax ID Tax Component Name Investor Status Dividend Component ID Investor Status Name Component Description Round Off Truncate Round Off Truncate Rule Tax Computation Currency Tax Payment Currency Tax Computation Currency Tax Payment Currency Name Name Fund Base Currency Fund ID ISIN Code Country Code Product ID Currency Code Tax Details 1of1 Slab Sequence No Income From Income To TaxPercent No of Decimals For Tax Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized You can use this screen to enter the Withholding Tax component slab details that are applicable e Fora particular investor category e Fora broker category e Fora particular country and currency e Fora specific fund and fund base currency e Fora specific product e For investors of local residence as well as foreign investors e For earnings from cash dividends involving capital gains e For income earnings from cash dividends You can either to choose to set up tax slabs at the fund level or at the product level Product level WHT applies to all funds available in that
15. e Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Holiday Maintenance screen displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes an entity details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the transaction during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the holiday record 3 23 1 6 Amending Holiday Records After a holiday record is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to an entity after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation e Invoke the Holiday Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser one ORACLE 3 23 1 7 3 23 1 8 3 24 e Select the status of the record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of entities that are authorized e Specify any or all of the parameters of the holiday in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to amend The Holiday Maintenance screen is displayed in Amendment mode e Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the entity e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing Amended Holiday Records An amended holiday
16. e Payout in Next Commission If you select this option the trailer commission payment would be processed according to the rules maintained in the Entity Commission Payment Setup as well as the payment frequency and payment details maintained in the Entity Payment Details The settlement can be triggered using the EFT function or through check printing based on the payment mode e Report Trailing Commission The commission payment data can be viewed as a report e Adjust UH Balances If you select this option the Unit Holder balance gets adjusted accordingly and there will not be a broker commission payout adjustment transaction Note If you select the option Adjust UH Balance it is mandatory that you select the option Unit Holder against the field To Entity Type or From Entity Type Sra ORACLE e Adjust and Pay Broker Appropriate broker commission will be done prior to netting if applicable and adjustment transaction generation The commission payout will be according to the Income Distribution Setup for the broker Note If you select the option Adjust and Pay Broker it is mandatory that you select the option Broker against the field To Entity Type Action Name Alphanumeric Optional Specify description for the event at which you need to apply and compute the field Intermediary Alphanumeric Optional In this field you can indicate whether the periodic fee payment
17. Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the base currency of the entity from the drop down list This is the currency in which the entity normally transacts Authorized Signatory 70 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Optional Enter the name of the Authorized Signatory at the office of the AMC Bank Agent Code 3 characters maximum Numeric Mandatory An Agent Code is a unique Identification for an Agent in the system Using the Agent code for reference can retrieve any detail with regard to an Agent Select the Agent for whom you want to set the branch from the list provided An Agency Branch can be set up only after the Agent has been set up The list will be populated with valid Agent codes existing in the system Bank Agent Name Display Only The system displays the name of the specified Bank or Agent name here If you are maintaining Bank Branch as agent then the system displays Bank name If you are maintaining Agency Branch as agent then the system displays Agent name MICR Code Optional Specify MICR code of the specified Bank here This code is applicable for both Bank and Bank Branch entity Tax ID Alphanumeric Optional Specify the tax identification Employer ID Number Alphanumeric Optional Specify the employer ID number Tax Certificate Effective Date Date Format Specify the date from which the tax certificate is effective Tax Certificate Expiry Date Date Format Specify the expiry date of the tax certificate
18. For UH deal import you must maintain e Scheme Cross Reference Number Fields in Bulk Clients Defaults Screen Only those fields in the header portion of the screen are discussed here For the other fields depending upon the upload type you must refer the user manual files for the corresponding maintenance in the system Bulk Account Client Code 9 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the bulk client for whom the bulk default information is being set up Once you select the Bulk Client Code the name of the Bulk Client is displayed alongside AMC 6 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the ID of the AMC or distributor for which this Bulk Client AMC Distributor combination defaults maintenance record is being setup in this screen Disable Bulk A C Default Setup 1 Character Maximum Boolean Mandatory You can use this option to disable the setup that you are defining in this record if its use is not imperative If you disable the default setup for the Bulk Client AMC Distributor by checking this box any of the imports for this Bulk Client AMC Distributor combination will not be carried out oa ORACLE 5 9 4 Bulk Clients Defaults Summary Screen After you have set up all the default specifications for a bulk client you must have another user authorize the defaults so that they would be effective in the system database Before the default specifications are authorized you can ed
19. Further Credit Acct No Reference2 At the time of transaction input the routing details specified here are picked up for the combination of fund transaction type and transaction currency Bank Charged Optional Indicate whether the bank charges must be levied upon the beneficiary the remitter or must be shared between the two Beneficiary Details Beneficiary Specify the beneficiary name 3 34 ORACLE 3 5 2 Beneficiary Add 1 Specify the beneficiary address There are three lines available for the same Beneficiary BIC Code Specify the BIC code of the beneficiary Beneficiary Acct No Specify the account number of the beneficiary Beneficiary Code Specify the code of the beneficiary Beneficiary Info Enter more information about the beneficiary Intermediary Details Intermediary Specify the intermediary detail Intermediary Add 1 Specify the intermediary address There are three lines available for the same Intermediary BIC Code Specify the BIC code of the Intermediary Intermediary Acct No Specify the account number of the Intermediary Intermediary Code Specify the code of the Intermediary Intermediary Info Enter more information about the Intermediary Save all the details to proceed or click cancel button to cancel the operation Operations on Income Distribution Setup Records After you set up the IDS options for an entity in the Income Distribution Setup screen y
20. IHPP Inflation Hedged Pension Plan Abbreviation Acronym Meaning IPO Initial Public Offering LEP Life and Endowment Products LOI Letter of Intent NAV Net Asset Value REG The Registrar component of the system ROA Rights of Accumulation ROI Return on Investment SI Standing Instructions SMS Security Management System URL Uniform Resource Locator VAT Value Added Tax WAUC Weighted Average Unit Cost 1 8 Getting Help Online help is available for all tasks You can get help for any function by clicking the help icon provided or by pressing F1 ra ORACLE 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 Overview Introduction Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing T FCIS is flexible comprehensive automation software for mutual fund investor services It provides both online and offline automation for a network for the purpose of distributing open ended as well as close ended funds With FC IS you can set up highly parameterized funds create and service investor accounts organize the declaration and disbursement of dividends and automate your bookkeeping Changing your Password To change the Password after logging into the system click on the change password button which is on the Toolbar at the top of the screen The Change Password screen will be displayed You must key in your new desired password in the New Password field and confirm the same by re keying it in the C
21. e Authorizing switch period definitions e Amending switch period definitions 219 ORACLE Invoke the Exchange List Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSASSSD in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Exchange List Maintenance Summary Authorized From Share Class ID LH Advanced Search Reset Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open From Share Class ID To Share Class ID Period 3 25 4 1 Retrieving Exchange List in Summary Screen You can retrieve a previously entered entity in the Summary screen as follows e Invoke the Exchange List Maintenance Summary screen and specify the following The status of the exchange list in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the record in the Record Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved From Share Class ID e After you have specified the required details click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen You can also retrieve an individual record from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner e Press F7 e Input any parameter in the screen e Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selec
22. e Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records e Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the currency cutoff record that you wish to authorize The Currency Cutoff Detail screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes a currency cutoff record details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the record during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the currency cutoff time Amending Currency Cutoff Times After a currency cutoff record is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to a currency cutoff time after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation 1 Invoke the Currency Cutoff Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the currency cutoff record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of associations that are authorized 3 Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records 4 Click Search button All the records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the currency cutoff record that you want to amend The Currency
23. 9 6 Append ses secs sade aaan si vei cendecncccsaaesctnsinasarssanvevedsuwcacucsausdnsstuneavearesaneseceat 10 1 LOM Introduction wisi a aie ee ee Scar eas od E REA 10 1 10 2 Minimizing Main Screens yri AEA AE ARRESE 10 1 10 3 Keyboard Compatibility cece aeaa iei Ea A aaa 10 2 10 3 1 Landing Page Keyboard Compatibility 00 ccccccssceccssssseeeeeentieeeeeeenaaes 10 2 10 3 2 Navigating through Side Bar cccecssseecesee cere ceenteeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaaes 10 2 10 3 3 Navigating through Toolbar cccccceseceeeesnteeeeeeenneeeeteeenaeeeeeeeneeeeeesenaes 10 3 10 4 Custom Window Keyboard Compatibility 0 cece eeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenteeeeeeeaaes 10 4 10 4 1 Detail Screen Navigation 0 0 eeeeeetecetennt eee ceente eee teenaaeeeeceeeaeeeeeeenaeeteeesenaes 10 4 10 4 2 Summary Screen Navigation cccccececcceseeeeeteenteeeeceenaeeeeeseniaeeeeeseaaaes 10 6 Function ID Glossary cescccsccdcecszasewscsetececs cate ceevet cectatesacesdessasacstacunacecscuet 11 1 1 About this Manual Introduction Welcome to Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing a comprehensive mutual funds automation software This Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing User Manual helps you use the system to achieve optimum automation of all your mutual fund investor servicing processes It contains guidelines for specific tasks descriptions of various features and processes in the system and general information Related Documents
24. Authorized X Open X Effective Date e Interest Rate a Transaction Currency B a j Reset Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Effective Date Interest Rate Transaction Currency LatestRule 3 34 1 1 Retrieving Entity in Summary Screen You can retrieve a previously entered entity in the Summary screen as follows e Invoke the Entity Maintenance Summary screen and specify the following The status of the entity in the Authorization Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the entities are retrieved The status of the entity in the Record Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the entities are retrieved Interest Rate Transaction Currency Effective Date e After you have specified the required details click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve the individual interest rate details from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value Example You can search the record for Transaction Currency Interest by using the combination of and alp
25. FATCA Maintenance Summary screen The status of the record in the Authorization Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records that involve the specified FATCA Maintenance are retrieved The status of the record in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records that involve the specified FATCA Maintenance are retrieved a ORACLE Action Click Search button to view the records All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value 7 5 2 Deleting FATCA Document Maintenance Details You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered Invoke the FATCA Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the details and click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to delete The FATCA Document Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database 7 5 3 Modifying FATCA Document Maintenance Details
26. Fee Load Description Amount Or Percentage Amount lative o Cumulative loads ig Consider as Lower No PriceBasisLoad No Boundary ROA Threshhold For Initial Amount Basis Select One Fee Slab Mode UH Deal Maintainable No Mode Date Period basis Days Load Calculation Method Slab Basis Tables Referred Agent Investor Fund Agency Branch Investor Txn Broker Account Officer IFA UH Additional Info Investor Transaction Rule Payment Mode Transaction Details Fund Criteria Derived Load Details 1of1 E Slab Sequence No From Date To Date FromAmount ToAmount FromUnits To Units From Period m ai m b In this screen you create a load as follows e Specify the basic parameters on the basis of which the load will be applied and computed in the main Load Maintenance Detail screen These include the following mandatory information S ORACLE 8 1 4 8 1 4 1 e A unique identifier for the load in the Load ID field e Descriptive or narrative text qualifying the load in the Description field e Whether the load is fee or an incentive in the Load Type field The system deems the load as a fee or an incentive based on the fund load mapping for a fund e Whether the return value of the load is arrived at based on an amount or a percentage in the Amount or Percentage field e Whether the load being defined is a price basis load in the Price Basis Load field e The applicable slab type for the load
27. If you choose the Blank Space option then all the entities are retrieved Whether Auto Invest Applicable Auto Invest lag Reminder Lag After you have specified the required details click Search All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen You can also retrieve the individual interest rate details from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Indicate whether auto invest applicable Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list 3 32 2 2 Editing KYC Ref Type Restrictions You can modify the details of an interest rate that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows 1 2 Invoke the KYC Ref Type Restriction Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorization Status field You can only modify records of entities that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters of KYC Ref Type Restriction parameters in the corresponding fields on the screen to retrieve the entity that is to be modified Click Search All unauthorized entities with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion o
28. Refer to the section Arriving at the Load Return Value and Load Amounts in the chapter The Allocation Process in Volume IV of Fund Manager User Manual for details Derived Loads A load can be defined not only on the basis of the parameters but also deriving from or dependant on another load Such loads are termed as derived loads In a typical AMC scenario for example the charges that are collected from an investor could constitute the parent load and the particulars that are dependent on the initial collected charges could be the derived loads These could comprise broker charges VAT component and so on In the Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing system you can define loads based on other loads This means that you can map any load that you set up to a parent load A tree structure with multiple levels is therefore possible for loads The lowest level loads are called Parent Loads and all other loads will be defined as loads that are dependent on these loads The loads that are dependent are called derived loads Derived loads could also be defined to effect fee and commission sharing between a Distributor and the other intermediaries in the hierarchy for a transaction Setting up Derived Loads Derived Load Set Up screen After you have created a load in the Load Definition screen you can create a derived load that is dependent on the main load To do so click Derived button The Derived Loa
29. Restrict Cross Branching No x within Agent Nationality Desc Country Of Birth Desc Country Desc Country Of Incorporation Desc US Indicia Available FATCA Status FATCA Classification Description Employer ID Number EIN FATCA Sponsor Type Sponsoring Entity Type Sponsoring Entity Id Dwednesday Othursday Griday Customer Interface Key Customer FLEXCUBE IS No Installation Module AgentDesc i Effective Date for Capital E Gains Mod No DateTime Open Authorized Fields in Single Entity Maintenance Screen Entity Type Alphanumeric Mandatory Tax Category Tax Circle Tax ID Tax Certificate Effective Date Tax Certificate Expiry Date Saturday Online interface Nof Signed Off No Finware Posting ISA Reference No Min ISA Transfer IN Specify the type of entity being set up This could be any of the following e Agency Branch e Agent e AMC e Bank e Bank Branch e Bulk Client e Registrar e Trustee e Check Vendor e Underwriter e Custodian e Clearing Agent e Account and Valuation Agent e Independent Financial Advisors IFA e Participating Employer e Paying Agent 3 7 ORACLE e Cash Management Account e Fund Manager Entity Type Description Display Only The system displays description for the specified entity type here based on the details maintained in the system Entity ID 12 characters maximum Alphan
30. Specify the issue date of the received document Expiry Date Date Format Optional Specify the expiry date of the received document Copy Received Alphanumeric Mandatory Check this box to indicate that the copy is received Original Received Alphanumeric Mandatory Check this box to indicate that the original is received Received Date Date Format Optional Specify the document received date Document Reference Number Alphanumeric Optional Specify the document tracking reference number Remarks Alphanumeric Optional Specify remarks if any Chasing Date Date Format Optional Specify the document chasing date Document Upload Click this button to upload or view the documents i ORACLE 7 6 1 FATCA Status FATCA Compliant Display The system displays whether you are FATCA compliant Remarks Alphanumeric Optional Specify remarks if any Linked Entity Details Click on Linked Entity to maintain linked entity details Linked Entity Linked Entity Type Entity Name Joint Holder One gt JOINT 1 You can maintain the following here Auth Status Alphanumeric Optional Specify the Authorization status Linked Entity Type Alphanumeric Optional Select the linked entity type from the adjoining option list Entity ID Optional Specify the entity identification Entity Name Alphanumeric Optional Specify the entity name US Indicia Available No ORACLE 7 7 US Indicia Availab
31. Tax Circle Alphanumeric Optional Select the tax circle country from the adjoining option list FATCA Classification Display The system displays the FATCA classification type 39 ORACLE FATCA Status Display The system displays the FATCA Status based on the FATCA maintenance US Indicia Available Display The system defaults US Indicia Available as Yes or No depending on the following e The nationality is US e The country of birth is US e The country of domicile is US e The country of incorporation is US e The country of correspondence or alternate address is US e The country code of the telephone number is 01 e The country code of the bank branch address is US FATCA Sponsor Type Optional Select the FATCA sponsor type from the adjoining drop down list The values are e Sponsoring Entity e Sponsored Entity If you select Sponsoring Entity you need to specify the sponsoring entity type and sponsoring entity ID If you select Sponsored Entity you need not to specify the sponsoring entity type and sponsoring entity ID Sponsoring Entity Type Numeric 8 Characters Mandatory Specify the sponsoring entity type You can also select the valid entity type from the adjoining option list Sponsoring Entity ID Alphanumeric 8 Characters Optional Specify the sponsoring entity for the FATCA entity type You can also select the valid entity ID from the adjoining option list GIIN Issue Date Date Format Optiona
32. To delete a record that you have previously entered e Invoke the High Water Mark Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion e Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Query All records with the specified fields are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to delete in the list of displayed records The High Water Mark Detail screen is displayed e Select Delete Operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is physically deleted from the system database 3 36 3 4 Authorizing a High Water Mark record An unauthorized High Water Mark record must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a record e Invoke the High Water Mark Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the unauthorized option e Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Query All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you wish to authorize The High Water Mark Detail screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from the Action List When a checker authorizes a record details of
33. To set up the fee for a load group select the Group option e Select the ID of the fund product or group for which you are setting up the trailing fee in the Fund Product Group ID field Any loads that have already been mapped to the selected fund product or group are displayed with the details in the grid portion in the middle of the screen e Specify the dates that form the period in respect of which the computation of the load must be arrived at in the Rule Effective Date From and To fields e For funds specify the load details in the Load and Load Details sections in the lowest part of the screen and save the record e For products specify the load details in the Load and Load Details sections Also specify the underlying funds or groups for which the load must be applied and then save the record Fields in Periodic Load Maintenance Screen 8 1 17 1 Periodic Load Section Fund Product Group Mandatory You can use this field to indicate whether the periodic fee is being set up to be applicable for a fund a product or a group ISIN Code Specify the ISIN Code for the periodic fee Fund ID Product ID Group ID Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the fund product or group that the trailing fee must be associated with from the drop down list When you have selected the fund product or group all periodic loads that are already associated to the selected fund product or group are displayed in the grid portion of
34. Transaction Fee Commission Trailer Fee Commission or Admin Tax e The AMC for which you are defining the sharing setup If the same setup is applicable for all AMCs you can select the ALL option e The Fund of the AMC for which you are defining the sharing setup If the same setup is applicable for all funds of the AMC you can select the ALL option e The type of entity for which the trailer commission sharing is applicable Parent Entity Type and To Entity Type This could be the Distributor Agent Branch Account Officer or IFA e You must also indicate the ID of the specific entity of the selected type for which the trailer commission sharing is applicable Parent Entity ID and To Entity ID If the same setup is applicable for all underlying entities of the selected type you can select the ALL option e The To Entity type could be selected as either Agent or Agency Branch from the drop down list and you should choose the respective IDs in To Entity ID field B80 ORACLE 8 5 8 5 1 e The method according to which the commission would be shared between the entities either as a fixed percentage or based on fund performance e If you select the fixed percentage option you can specify the percentage of commission that is to be shared between the selected entities Note You will not be able to specify the commission percentage if Admin Tax Sharing is opted as the type of commission to be shared
35. You can also maintain different AMC s as entities e The different values for static system parameters such as countries identification corporation and occupation types account types investor categories fee categories and so on e Currency information such as the different currencies exchange rate sources and pair currencies On a daily basis you can also capture the prevalent exchange rates e Tax processing information that would be applicable to investor categories country tax laws cash dividends brokers and funds floated by the AMC e The different fees incentives or loads that would apply to transactions of investors in the funds of the AMC This includes fees such as contingent deferred sales charge CDSC trailing commissions and ongoing management fees e The holiday calendar for the AMC and the holiday calendar for the fund if required This chapter deals with setting up the following reference information e Fund Types e Entities e Withholding Tax e Modes of Payment e Holidays e Static maintenance for switch transactions e Indexation values for capital gains tax s ORACLE 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 Setting up Fund Types Before any fund may be set up in the system the types of funds that can be maintained must be set up in the Fund Type Maintenance Detail screen You can invoke the Fund Type Maintenance Detail screen by typing UTDFNTYP in the field at the top right corner of the
36. cccccccccceetnteeetetnneeeeeeene 3 7 Maintaining Income Distribution Setup IDS Options s 3 24 3 5 1 Fields in Income Distribution Setup SCIeen 2 cccccceceeeceeeeteeneeneenee 3 26 3 5 2 Operations on Income Distribution Setup RecordS ccccceeeeetee 3 35 Setting up Payment Details for Entities 00 0 ecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaaes 3 39 3 6 1 Fields in Entity Payment Maintenance Screen uu eccccenteeeeeteeneetees 3 39 3 6 2 FCIS Entity Payment Maintenance Summary SCreen cccceeeeee 3 41 Setting uprAGents denser eenteet e ithe lee eal a ea 3 44 Setting up Agency Branches ccceceeceeceeeeeceeeeteeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseeaeeeeeeenaeeeeenenaaes 3 45 Setting UP AMG cs ieeteseriencaduacavadedh ache oadeatiuleatasguadaepstedaauieastagatiievn kraana naini 3 45 Setting Up DISMIDULORS nra iaaa E seat a aiaa 3 46 Maintaining Bank Details ankerren a E E 3 46 Maintaining Bank Branch Entity eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerreseeerrrssirrrsssttrnrssttnnnsssttnnsssent 3 46 Setting Up Registrars wi cin a i aie lava i N a 3 46 setting up Trustees araire A a a ara A elated 3 47 Setting up Check Vendor aaa TR T NA 3 47 Soning UP UNGENE S a E EN AAE EEEN 3 47 Setting up CUStOGIANS e a E T SN 3 48 Setting up Accounting and Valuation Agents 0 cc ccceeeeneeeeeeeennteeeeeeenteeeeeeeaaes 3 48 Setting up Participating EMployerS ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeseeenaaes 3 48 Set
37. details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Edit operation from the Action list and modify the details After modifying the details click Save to save the modifications 7 7 4 Authorizing FATCA Maintenance Details You can authorize records in the system To authorize a record that you have previously entered Invoke the Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Specify any or all of the details and click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to authorize The Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select authorize operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the authorization and the record is authorized 71s ORACLE 8 1 8 1 1 8 Setting up Loads Loads When an investor transacts in an AMC the AMC may charge the investor a certain fee for any or all of the transactions requested On the other hand the AMC may give the investor an incentive for reasons of continued loyalty or for initial investment These fees or incentives are identified as loads A load invo
38. displays all the valid authorized values maintained in the system You can select ALL option if you want to select the entire valid broker maintained in the system Broker Name The description of the selected broker is displayed Process Date Specify the processing date The target based brokerage is processed on this date If the date maintained here is a system holiday then the system will process the brokerage only on the next working day Reference Number On saving the transaction a unique reference number is generated Processed The system displays Yes value if the transaction is processed on the processed date During EOD batch all the unprocessed transactions with processing date less than or equal to application date will be considered for processing Based on the load setup all the transactions with transaction date within the date range specified in the load will be considered Transaction amount in fund base currency will be the basis amount for fee computation In case of unit based transaction units applied and latest available NAV will be used to derive the basis amount If latest NAV is not available then the system will use the par value Transaction with in complete exchange rate details will not be considered for processing The computed brokerage will be stored in the system Target Based Fee Summary Screen After setting up a target based brokerage another user must authorize it so that it wo
39. e If you select the Performance Based option you can also indicate the specific trailer fee load in respect of which the sharing is to take place the commission currency the processing frequency for the sharing and the next processing date for the commission sharing The calculation method could either be Daily or Average Balance Based on the AMC Distributor agreement the commission share of the Branches and IFAs could be processed at the AMC For this the commission sharing set up is to be maintained at fund level At the AMC installation the set up applies only to AMC funds at the Distributor the set up applies to other funds too Maintaining Campaign On certain instances based on some criteria an AMC may offer certain discount to the investors on a fund or group of funds or for all funds Encouraging business by offering certain discounts to the investor is called Campaign It is similar to the incentive fee concept You can maintain the campaign details in the Campaign Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDCMPMN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click the adjoining arrow The screen is displayed below Campaign Maintenance New Enter Query Campaign Code Campaign Description Campaign Start Date Campaign End Date EEE 24 Mapping Campaign Criteria Fund Mapping 1of1 Fund ID Fund Name Input by DateTime Aut
40. from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value For example you can search the record for Indexations ID by using the combination of and numeric value as follows Search by 7 The system will fetch all the records whose Indexation ID ends by numeric value 7 For example 27 Search by 17 The system will fetch all the records whose Share Class ID contains the numeric value 17 For example 17 3 26 2 2 Editing Indexation You can modify the indexation parameters that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Indexation Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify the parameters based on which you want to search Click Search button All unauthorized indexations with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The Indexation Maintenance screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Indexation Maintenance screen is closed and the changes made a
41. fund price or transaction load override oe ORACLE 5 9 1 5 Redemption Payouts to Unit Holder Bank Accounts Only Optional Check this box to indicate that by default it must be designated that for all unit holder accounts imported redemption payouts are to be made to the unit holder bank account only Default Information for Fund Rules Imports You can invoke the FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Fund Rule Detail screen by typing UTDBLKFR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Fund Rule Detail i New 3 Enter Query EGBA uns Account Details Fund Agency Back Dating Transaction Processing Rules Fund Agent Mapping Bulk Clients Bulk Account Client Code Bulk Client Name Distributor ID Distributor Client Defaults Fund Base Currency Fund Type Fund Country Minimum Holding Period Fund Family AMC Distributor Id Shares Characteristics Defaults Scrip Based Select One Account statement frequency General Operating Rules Defaults Post Priced No NAV Lot Price Declare Frequency No of Decimals for NAV Ageing Policy Select One Roundin of NAV Round Off Minimum Holding Period No Violation Incoming Distribution Rules Defaults Default Distribution Mode Select One Look Ahead Processing No EPU Lot Fund Level Holiday Defaults Holiday Rule Select One Default Holiday Maintenance
42. in the Slab Mode section e The basis upon which the period is reckoned in the Period Basis field e The method of calculation to be used for the load in the Load Calculation Method field e Whether a deal can be maintained for a unit holder based on the load in the UH Deal Maintainable field e Whether the load is a cumulative load in the Cumulative Loads field e Whether the lower boundary of a slab is inclusive for the slab in the Consider as Lower Boundary field e Click OK to save your changes e Specify the details of slabs for the load and their boundaries in the Load Details section in the lowest portion of the screen Setting up slab details for a load is mandatory When you have set up the slabs you need to save the changes e If you are not setting up a criteria based load basis load or derived load you can save the load in the main Load Definition screen at this stage e If you are setting up a criteria based load basis load or derived load click the appropriate button as follows e If the load is a basis load click the Basis link The Basis Definition screen is opened and you can set up the load e If the load is a derived load click the Derived link The Derived Load screen is opened and you can set up the derived load in this screen e If the load is based on criteria then click the Criteria link The Query Builder is opened and you can set up the criteria for the load In each of the screens you mu
43. only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified fields are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view in the list of displayed records The Time Zone Maintenance Detail screen is displayed in View mode 9 1 6 Deleting Time Zone Maintenance You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered Invoke the Time Zone Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified fields are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to delete in the list of displayed records The Time Zone Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete Operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is physically deleted from the system database a4 ORACLE 9 1 7 9 1 10 Authorizing Time Zone Maintenance An unauthorized Time Zone Maintenance must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a record e Invoke the Time Zone Summary screen from the Browser e Select
44. reproduce translate broadcast modify license transmit distribute exhibit perform publish or display any part in any form or by any means Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of this software unless required by law for interoperability is prohibited The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error free If you find any errors please report them to us in writing This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content products and services from third parties Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content products and services Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss costs or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content products or services
45. the screen Product Description Display only The system displays description for the specified product based on the details maintained for at Product Fund Maintenance level Saa ORACLE 8 1 17 2 Group Description Display only The system displays description for the specified group based on the details maintained for at Payment Group Maintenance level Fund Name Display only The system displays description for the specified fund based on the details maintained for at Fund Maintenance level Rule Effective From and To Dates Date Mandatory By specifying the two dates indicate the period in respect of which the trailing fee computation must be arrived at Load Section Load ID Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the load that represents the trailing fee management fee that is to be associated and processed for the fund product or group from the drop down list Load Description Display Only The system displays description for the specified load based on the details maintained at Load Maintenance level Management Fee Load ID AlphaNumeric Optional Management fee loads are always set up at a fund group level and are applied based on the Assets Under Management AUM in respect of all the funds in the fund group Management fee loads are set up with the Average Daily Balance computation method with Accrual Frequency as Daily and can only be set when the periodic load setup is at a gr
46. 2 Editing Campaign Details You can modify the details that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows e Invoke the Campaign Summary screen from the Browser e Specify any or all of the following details in the screen The status of the transaction in the Authorized field If you choose the blank space then both the authorized and the unauthorized status records will be retrieved for the specified criteria BBS ORACLE The status of the records in the Open field If you choose the blank space then all the records are retrieved The campaign code in the Campaign Code field If you choose the blank space then all the records are retrieved The start date of the campaign in the Campaign Start Date field If you choose the blank space then all the records are retrieved The end date of the campaign in the Campaign End Date field If you choose the blank space then all the records are retrieved Click Search button to view the records All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify in the list of displayed records The Campaign Maintenance screen is displayed Select Unlock operation from the Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save t
47. 6 2 2 Making Changes to Currency Profiles 0 cccccccccesteeeceeenteeeeeeeeneeteeeeeaaes 6 4 6 3 Associating Country with its CUrrency 0 0 eee eeeenneeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeaaaeeeeeeenaaeeeeneeaaas 6 7 G 3 1 CRO CKS E E Seesad ed te E seca AAE pia nceat els aes S 6 8 6 3 2 Fields in Country Currency Maintenance SCIree n cccccecscctsieeeeeeneee 6 8 6 3 3 Country Currency Summary SCIEN ccccecc tite e et tttte eect tenets eeetnaeeeeenee 6 8 6 4 Maintaining Exchange Rate Sources 00 eceeecceeenneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaaes 6 12 6 41 CHECKS bie ee A 6 12 6 4 2 Fields in Source Currency Pair Maintenance SCreen cc cccceeeeeeee 6 13 Gi43 CHOCKS she te TAE A PTA da mee seat E Raed aaa NS eee 6 13 6 4 4 Making Changes to Sources or Currency Pairs for Source scceeeeees 6 14 6 4 5 Copying Attributes of Source Currency Pairs csccccecettnteee eet etnneeeeeteeee 6 17 6 5 Capturing Exchange Rat Scnesicniassdeairiiirii iina ei e 6 18 Gib21 CROCK EE E EEEE E E E A EEEN 6 18 6 5 2 Fields in the Exchange Rate Maintenance Screen 6 18 6 5 3 Making Changes to Exchange Rates 0 ccccccccccteteeeeetetnteeeeeeetneeeeentee 6 20 6 6 Maintaining Currency Cutoff TiMe eeeeeeeeeeeeeseerrrssserrssserirrssrtinrsssttrrrssrrrnnne 6 23 6 6 1 Fields in Currency Cutoff SCr N 0 ccecceccccseeeeeeeetnneeeeeeetnneeeeeeetnaeeeeeneas 6 24 6 6 2 Currency Cutoff Summary SCOON cece te tteee
48. 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 Capturing Exchange Rates Exchange rates must be captured manually in the system To enter exchange rates use the Exchange Rate Maintenance Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDEXCR M in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the exchange rate details You can enter exchange rates for each currency pair that is maintained for an exchange rate source maintained in the system Exchange rates can be entered as many times during the course of a working business day and are effective as and when they are entered No authorization is necessary You can enter a buy rate and sell rate for each currency pair that is maintained for a source Exchange Rate Maintenance Detail New 7 Enter Query Exchange Rate Maintenance FX Deal Date Source ID FX Value Date Source Name Reference Currency Pair Currency Buy Rate Mode of Quotation Sell Rate Units of Quotation Exchange Rate for Repot No Currency Name Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Checks Before you capture an exchange rate for a currency pair in a source it is desirable to ensure that the following information is already setup in the system e The different exchange rate sources must be set up in the system in the Sourc
49. Admin Tax AMC Rule Effective Date Fund ID ISIN Code Admin Tax Value To Entity Type Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in Admin Tax Maintenance Screen AMC Mandatory Specify the AMC from which the Admin tax would be distributed You can make your choice by using the option list Rule Effective Date DD MM YYYY Date Mandatory Specify the date on which the admin tax needs to be captured Note The effective date can be lesser than or equal to the system date FundiD 6 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the ID of the fund to which the admin tax needs to be distributed ISIN Code 12 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the ISIN Code of the fund to which the admin tax needs to be distributed Admin Tax Value Mandatory Specify the admin tax value to be distributed here 8 ORACLE Note The amount specified here should be greater than zero To Entity Type Mandatory Specify the entity to which the admin tax needs to be distributed You can make your choice by using the drop down list ay ORACLE 9 1 9 1 1 9 Maintaining Time Zones Time Zone Maintenance Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing FCIS enables you to capture time zones for a particular module This feature is particularly applicable if you are using Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing for your Financial Services across the globe The T
50. Agents Independent Financial Advisors IFA Participating Employer Account Officers Paying Agent Cash Management Account ISA Individual Savings Account Manager Note AMCs can only be maintained at Distributor installations At an AMC installation the pro file of the logged in AMC can be viewed in the Single Entity screen but a new profile can not be created You can invoke the Single Entity Maintenance Detail screen by typing UTDENTMN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button oe ORACLE The Single Entity Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details of the entity Single Entity Maintenance Detail jeneral Intormation Entity 1D Entity Type H Entity Category Entity Category Type Nationality Country of Birth Country Of Domicile Basic Information Base Currency Currency Name Bank Agent Code Bank Agent Name Authorized Signatory MICR Code Global Intermediary Identification Number GIIN GIIN Issue Date GIIN Expiry Date GIIN Verified Flag No sunday Donday Qtuesday section ____ Cross Branching Allowed Yesi Module Agent Type Nature ofBusiness Input by Authorized by 3 4 1 DateTime Enttyame ____ Entity Type Description Investor Category name
51. Auto Replication Preference Maintenance screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save your changes The Auto Replication Preference Maintenance screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Auto Replication Preference Summary screen 3 28 2 3 Viewing Auto Replication Record To view a record that you have previously entered you must retrieve the same in the Auto Replication Preference Summary screen as follows Invoke the Summary Screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorized field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view in the list of displayed records The Auto Replication Preference screen is displayed in View mode 3 28 2 4 Deleting Auto Replication Preference You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered Invoke the Auto Replication Preference Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for de
52. Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorized field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Query All records with the specified fields are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view in the list of displayed records The Element Maintenance screen is displayed in View mode 3 37 3 2 Modifying an Element Maintenance record You can modify the details of an Element Maintenance record that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Element Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the unauthorized option Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields to retrieve the record that is to be modified Click Query All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify in the list of displayed records The Element Maintenance Detail screen is displa
53. Bulk Clients Defaults Standing Instruction Detail New 3 Enter Query Bulk Clients Details Bulk Client Code AMC Distributor Id Bulk Client Name Distributor Client Defaults Generate Authorized SI No Other Details Scheme Cross Reference Check Duplicates Number Fund Scheme Cross Reference Number Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized For standing instructions imports you must maintain e Whether authorized standing instruction records are to be generated in the system e Scheme Cross Reference Number e Fund Scheme Cross Reference Number e Whether checking for duplicates must be done ote ORACLE 5 9 1 10 Default Information for Transactions Imports You can invoke the FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Transaction screen by typing UTDBLTXN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Transaction Detail New 453 Enter Query Bulk Clients Details Bulk Client Code AMC Distributor Id Bulk Client Name Distributor Client Defaults Generate Authorized No System Generated Reference No Transactions Number Redemption Bank No Other Details Scheme Cross Reference Default Date Format Number Check Duplicates No Fund Scheme Cross Reference Number Communication Mode Translation Required Sub Payment Mode Amendment Allowed LOI Tran
54. Code Payment Group Description Entity Information SAMADES Bank Details 1of1 m Bank Branch JA Account Type Account Type Description a Account Number Input by Authorized by Mod No DateTime DateTime Open Authorized You can maintain the following in this screen Bank Mandatory Specify the name of the bank for receiving the payment You can also select the bank from the option list provided The list consists of all the valid bank names maintained in the system Branch Mandatory Specify the branch of the bank You can also select the branch name from the option list provided The list consists of all the valid bank branches maintained in the system Account Type Mandatory Specify the type of account You can also select the account type from the option list provided The list consists of all the valid and authorized account types maintained in the system Account Type Description Display Account description is displayed based on the account type selected 8 24 ORACLE Account Number Mandatory Specify the account for receiving the payment IBAN 36 Characters Only Alphanumeric Optional Specify the IBAN of the account holder Account Name Mandatory Specify the name of the account holder Account Currency Mandatory Specify the account currency You can also select the currency from the option list provided The list consists of all the
55. Customer No gt Corresp Address Bank Details At Lano Details AASSM Det Broker Details Additional info Account Type Details 1of1 Account Type Description Tax Category Tax Circle Tax ID Tax Certificate Effective Date Tax Certificate Expiry Date Online Interface Signed Off Finware Posting Saturday Input by Authorized by DateTime DateTime Mod No Open Authorized You can specify the following information on CPF account types Account Type Description Enter the CPF account type description 3 4 1 5 Specifying Defaulting Broker Details Click Def Broker Details tab to enter the defaulting broker details Transaction Type Alphanumeric Optional Indicate the type of transaction for which you are specifying the broker details defaulting preferences You can specify the defaulting preferences for IPO Subscription Subscription Redemption Switch Transfer and Reinvestment type of transaction Broker Defaulting Mechanism Alphanumeric Optional Specify the defaulting preferences for broker details for the AMC The following options are available in the list e No Defaulting Broker details will not be defaulted to DIRECT 3 22 ORACLE e Last Transaction Broker If the user does not have any transaction in that fund then system looks for the immediate last transaction based on the authorized time stored with the system Ifthe user
56. Date Post RDR the holdings in a fund due to Share Class Conversion Fund Merger Fund Split Dividend Reinvestment Reverse split will be classified as Legacy Direct Business Advised Business or Execution Only Business based on the category of original holdings If a regular savings plan is in force at the RDR date the system will continue the front end commission to be paid on each subsequent contribution In addition the system will tag the units shares allocated to the transaction as legacy direct If for a existing or a new SI post RDR Date the SI is amended for escalation then the systme will display the following warning message SI is being escalated for UK domiciled broker transaction Do you wish to continue If the transaction category is amended the system will reflect the new category from next SI generation onwards For Non UK domiciled advisor all transactions including Switch Sl escalations in SI will continue to be marked as Legacy Direct Business irrespective of the trade date SI registered Date Processing RDR Parameters The system will charge front end fees post RDR based on the transaction category The system will charge front end fees for transactions classified as Legacy Direct Business and Execution Only Business done through a UK domiciled advisor For agent hierarchy you need to map appropriate transaction category depending on the business needs e Case
57. Details tab to maintain the alternate language details Single Entity Maintenance Detail New amp Enter Query Base Currency Currency Name Bank Agent Code BankAgent Name Authorized Signatory US Indicia Available FATCA Status FATCA Classification Description Employee Identification Tax Category Tax Circle Tax ID Tax Certificate Effective Date MICR Code Number EIN Tax Certificate Expiry Date Global Intermediary Identification Number GIIN Cl Wednesday C Saturday Thursday Tuesday Friday Others Section Customer Interface Key Customer Online Interface No Cross Branching Allowed Yes FLEXCUBE IS No Signed Off No Module AgentType Installation Finware Posting Nature of Business Module Agent Desc p me Effective Date for Capital Switching Logic UnitHolder Generation a Logic Comresp Address Bank Details MMMM CPF Account Types Def Broker Details Additonal Info Entity Name Contact Person Corresp Addr Address Line 1 Address Line 2 City State Alt Addr Address Line 1 Address Line 2 City State Input by DateTime Mod No Authorized by Open DateTime Authorized You can maintain the following information in an alternate language provided you have captured the information in the default language Entity Name Alphanumeric Optional Specify the name of the entity being set up in the system Contact Person Alphanumeric Op
58. KYC details The following screen is invoked KYC Maintenance Detail New 43 Enter Query Country Type FATF X Entity ID Investor Category Entity Name Category Description KYC Requirement List 1of1 _ Document Type Requirement Additional Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized The ID of the entity assigned to the agent and its corresponding description are shown when you invoke the screen Fields in KYC Maintenance Screen KYC Options Section You need to set up the following parameters Country Type Alphanumeric Mandatory In FC IS countries are categorized into two types FATF Financial Action Task Force and Non FATF FATF is an inter governmental body for developing and promoting policies to combat money laundering 3 108 ORACLE 3 31 1 2 3 31 2 Select FATF if you wish to maintain list of required KYC documents for investor account residing in a FATF country Else select Non FATF Investor Category Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the category of investor for whom the list of required KYC documents is to be set up from the drop down list Entity ID Display Only The system defaults the Entity ID linked to the selected country type Entity Name Display Only The system defaults the corresponding name of the defaulted entity here KYC Requirement List Section Document Type Alphanumeri
59. Key Customer Online Interface No Cross Branching Allowed Yes FLEXCUBE IS No Signed Of No Module Agent Type Installation Finware Posting Nature of Business v Module Agent Desc mi Effective Date for Capital Gains Switching Logic Unit Holder Generation Logic PERE 22nk Details At Lang Details CPF Account Types Def Broker Details Additional Info Contact Information of Input by DateTime Mod No Authorized by Open DateTime Authorized i ORACLE 5 8 1 5 8 1 1 Fields Specific to Bulk Clients in Single Entity Maintenance Screen Only those fields specific to bulk clients are detailed here Refer the chapter Maintaining Reference Information of FC IS system for a discussion of the other fields common to all entity type Other Information Section Customer Interface Key Alphanumeric Optional This facility is to be used if customer information from an installation of Oracle FLEXCUBE Corporate FCC is to be imported into the FC IS system using the bulk interface facility for the creation of unit holder accounts The customer interface key determines the level at which unit holder account creation must take place in the FC IS system for a given Customer Information File CIF in Oracle FLEXCUBE Corporate either at CIF level or at a customer account level Accordingly you can indicate either of the following two options e Foreach CIF a corresponding unit holder may be c
60. Label Description Custom Values Setup Add Info Data Type Custom Values Param Code When you open the screen choose the language for which you want to define the additional information heads in the Language field All previously defined heads for the selected language are displayed in the grid portion of the screen in the Label Details section as a list The following information is displayed for each information head e The code and description for each label in the Label Code and Label Description fields e Whether the valid value list maintained for the information head is restricted as designated by the implementers in the Restriction field e A list of valid values defined by the implementers as acceptable specifications for the information head To view a list of these click the Valid Values button Adding New Information Head To add a new information head click the Add link in the Additional Information Maintenance screen A new row is inserted at the bottom of the list For each information head you add in this manner you must specify the following information as mandatory e A unique identifier for the value in the Label Code field e The descriptive text for the label representing the information head in the Label Description field e Indicate whether the information head is a restricted one by choosing the appropriate option in the Restriction field Once you have chosen to restrict an informati
61. List Maintenance Summary SCION eect eee tttteeeeeees 3 76 Setting up Indexation Values eee ceeeeee eee eeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaas 3 79 3 26 1 Fields in Indexation Maintenance SCreen ccccccccccceseeeeteeeneeeeeseneneetees 3 80 3 26 2 Indexation Summary Seret s ssrserireeneii eesi EE N TEN 3 80 3 26 3 Appling INCOXAatION siieu teetee eee eteneeeeeetesaaeeeeteceeeeeeeseeeaaeteetensaanees 3 83 Maintaining Collection Centers and Payout Accounts c cette 3 84 3 27 1 Fields in AGY Bank A C Mapping Details Screen 1 cccccccceeteetteees 3 86 3 27 2 AGY Bank A C Mapping Summary Details Screen ccccceeseeteeeeeees 3 88 Replicating Changes Made esiiireien canari eare i aE AE RREA ERRE 3 92 3 28 1 Fields in Auto Replication Preference Maintenance 1 cccccccceeeeeeee 3 92 3 28 2 Operations on Auto Replication Template 2 ccssssercecceeeeeeteeteeneees 3 93 3 29 Maintaining Preferences for Country cceeeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaas 3 97 329 T CEO T a A a a a a el deeded eed deed 3 97 3 29 2 Fields in Country Preference Maintenance SCree n cccccceeeeees 3 97 3 30 Multiple Languages Maintenance ececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetieeeeeeetaeeeeeetiaeeeeenee 3 101 3 31 KYC AML Maintenance iranian aiei aaeei eee eaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeneaas 3 103 3 31 1 Fields in KYC Maintenance SCree n ceccecccccccsseeeeeeensteeeeeeentie
62. Load Override screen by typing UTDBLTLO in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Transaction Load Override Detail New 53 Enter Query Bulk Clients Details Bulk Client Code AMC Distributor Id Bulk Client Name Distributor Client Defaults Generate Authorized Load Override Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized oe ORACLE 5 9 1 12 Default Information for Unit Holder Accounts Imports You can invoke the FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Unit Holder screen by typing UTDBLKUH in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Unit Holder Detail New amp Enter Query HERB Acoitional info other Details Bulk Clients Bulk Client Name Bulk Account Client Code Distributor Distributor ID Client Defaults Marital Status Title Redemption Mode of Payment Default to Introducer Broker No Resident Status Sex Select One Account Type System Generated Reference Yes Number Investor Type Occupation Account Operation Type Account Statement Frequency Country Corporation Identification Type Introducer Broker Language Account Statement Currency Unit Holder Base Currency Category Corporate Nationality Input by DateTime Authorized by D
63. Manager component Refer the chapters on Setting up Funds and Authorization respectively in this user manual for more information on the Fund Load Setup screen and the authorization of a fund Note After you create a load in the Load Maintenance screen you can edit the details as many times as possible as long as the load is not authorized During editing you can define any new derived loads or basis loads or edit any previously created loads d ORACLE After a load is authorized you can edit the details provided the load is not already mapped to a fund or a load group through the Fund Load Setup or Group Load Mapping screens If you do edit an authorized load under these constraints your changes will be saved as unauthorized changes These must be subsequently authorized to be reflected in the database After a load is authorized and then subsequently mapped to a fund or a load group you cannot edit any of the load details 8 1 3 Creating Load Load Maintenance Screen To create a load in the system use the Load Maintenance Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDLOADWM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the load details Load Maintenance Detail D New 5 Enter Query Basic Information Load ID Load Type
64. ORACLE Load Period Slab iris Units Value Inclusive L4M 4 001 0 1000 4 No months 002 1000 2000 3 No L1Y 1 year 001 0 1000 3 No 002 1000 2000 2 No Let us suppose that a certain unit holder has entered into transactions with the AMC in the following manner Transaction Reference Transaction Transaction Transaction Number Type Amount Date T1 Subscription 1000 3 1 2001 T2 Subscription 2000 3 4 2001 T3 Redemption 3000 3 7 2001 For the redemption transaction on 3 7 2001 the load based on period is explained below The load for this transaction is based on the period that has elapsed between the original subscription transaction and the redemption transaction through which the units resulting from the original transaction are redeemed Load applied based on the subscription transaction T1 The number of days between the transaction T1 and T3 Difference in days between 3 7 2001 and 3 1 2001 180 days This period falls in the slab for load L1Y above and the load applied will be 3 of the transaction amount Load 3 100 3000 90 Here again if the aging policy is FIFO only 1000 units would be aged and the load would be 3 100 1000 30 Load applied based on the subscription transaction T2 The number of days between the transaction T2 and T3 Difference in days between 3 7 2001 and 3 4 2001 90 days This period falls in the sl
65. Refer the section Setting up jobs for interface related tasks in this chapter to understand how to set up the jobs in the Job Maintenance screen e Through the Authorize Job screen in the Authorization menu category of the Fund Manager component authorize the jobs you have created e The system uses the Scheduler Services to actually automatically perform both the import operations and the export of rejected records based on the authorized jobs that you have maintained Setting up Jobs for Interface related Tasks Setting up a job for the import of unit holder information To set up a job for the import of new unit holder accounts and information change accounts e Access the Job Maintenance screen in the Maintenance menu category of the Fund Manager component e Inthe Task ID field select the UHIMPORT task ID e Inthe Frequency Basis field select the Time based option e Check the Enabled check box so that the job is enabled a ORACLE In the Schedule section select the Recurring option In the Recurring section specify the frequency at which the import of unit holder information from the bulk client is required to be executed by the job In the Occurs section specify whether the import is to be executed on a daily weekly or monthly basis If daily then specify the number of days apart that the import must be executed in the Daily section In the Duration section specify the start and end dates that will signify
66. Rule ID Numeric Mandatory Specify a unique code to identify the performance fee calculation rule Rule Description Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify a suitable description for the rule Formula No Numeric Mandatory Specify the line number associated with the rule Condition Alphanumeric Optional Click Condition Builder to specify the condition to be associated with the rule The condition specified in the Condition Builder screen is displayed here Element ID Alphanumeric Mandatory The result obtained from the Expression Builder screen is displayed here Expression Alphanumeric Mandatory Click Expression Builder to specify the expression to be used to derive the performance fee The condition specified in the Expression Builder screen is displayed here Rounding Basis Optional Select the basis for rounding from the options provided in the drop down list The following options are provided e Currency rounding option as defined at FBC e Unit based unit based rounding defined at the given fund level e User defined Round up Round Down Round Truncate with number of decimals e None do not apply any rounding rule Rounding Option Optional Select the rounding options from the drop down list The following options are provided e Round e Rounding Up e Rounding Down e Truncate No of Decimals Numeric Optional Specify the number of decimals to be applied during rounding alao ORACL
67. Since this event is the trigger for all remaining bulk import processes all subsequently scheduled imports and processing will terminate Errors occurring during import of bulk information or processing of the bulk interfaces could be due to e The import information failing to meet system or business validations e The import or hand off file not being in the prescribed format e Abnormal termination of an interface process The errors are logged into the interface error log tables The interface log will display the success or failure of the interface process and the detail log displays the details of the errors When the export of rejected records are triggered by the raising of the FAILEDRECS events the reporting of logged errors are also triggered The details of the errors can be obtained in an Excel worksheet for printing op ORACLE 5 8 When a bulk interface process is terminated abnormally for reasons other than errors relating to imported data the system maintains the status of the terminated processes as In process or Running The End of Day process checks for the completion of these processes and they can be cleared manually Bulk Account Clients Maintenance You can enter the record of a client for whom the bulk import facility would be used into the system by creating it as an entity You can set up a bulk client in the Single Entity Maintenance Detail screen You can invoke this scree
68. US State Non US State Address ZIP Code City Transfer Details Alc No Branch Select Bank Account Alc Ccy Bank Name Alc Holder Name Alc Type IBAN Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized In this screen you set up the IDS pattern by e Specifying the type of entity for which the IDS options are being maintained e Indicating the entity for which the option is being set up by specifying the entity ID e Specifying the fund for which the option is applicable in the Fund ID field You can also specify the ISIN Code for the fund The option you will set up will be applied only for dividend earnings on the fund you select here If you wish to set up income distribution options to be applicable for all funds you can do so by setting the Rule Applicable for All Funds option this option is available for all entity types except brokers and unit holders veo ORACLE 3 5 1 3 5 1 1 e Specifying the mode of distribution in the Distribution Mode field For brokers distribution by payment or reinvestment or both can be set For all other entities only distribution by payment can be set e For brokers specifying the percentages that represent the portions of dividend earnings to be paid and reinvested as desired by the broker in the Payment Percentage and Reinvestment Percentage fields e For brokers specifying the payment details for the paid portion in the Payment Details section and the
69. Use this option to access the Entity Additional Information Mapping screen where you can map any additional information heads to be applicable for the maintenance of entities such as unit holders and brokers e Addl Info Maint Use this option to access the Additional Information Maintenance screen where you can define any additional information heads e Fee Category Setup Use this option to access the Fee Category Codes Maintenance screen where you can view any specific defined fee category and sub category that is applicable to different investor types You can also add new fee sub categories e Data Maintenance Use this option to access the FCIS Data Mapping Codes Maintenance screen where you can define data mapping between an external system and FCIS 4 ORACLE 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 1 1 4 2 1 2 Maintaining System Default Information To set up system default information use the Defaults Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDDEFMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Defaults Maintenance iS Enter Query Company Details Company Short Name Company Name Distributor Defaults Distributor ID Registrar ID Country Nationality Minor age Bank Check Validity Period Low Date High Date High Amount High Units Round Off Amount Vat Percent Amend Period Default Level High Counter Check
70. You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option 3 Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen eas ORACLE 3 40 1 4 3 40 1 5 3 40 1 6 4 Click Search All records with the specified fields are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you want to view in the list of displayed records The Policy Guaranteed Fund Detail screen is displayed in View mode Deleting a Policy Guaranteed Fund Record You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered 1 Invoke the Policy Guaranteed Fund Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion 3 Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen 4 Click Search All records with the specified fields are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you want to delete in the list of displayed records The Policy Guaranteed Fund Detail screen is displayed 6 Select Delete Operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is physically deleted from the system database Authorizing a Policy Guaranteed Fund Record An unauthorized Policy Guaranteed Fund record must be auth
71. You can modify only unauthorized records in the system To modify a record that you have previously entered Invoke the FATCA Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for modification Specify any or all of the details and click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The FATCA Document Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Edit operation from the Action list and modify the details After modifying the details click Save to save the modifications 7 5 4 Authorizing FATCA Document Maintenance Details You can authorize records in the system To authorize a record that you have previously entered Invoke the FATCA Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Specify any or all of the details and click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to authorize The FATCA Document Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select authorize operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the authorization and the record is authorized i ORACLE 7 6 Maintaining Entity FATCA Classification You
72. adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details The following screen is invoked KYC Ref Type Restrictions Detail New 5 Enter Query KYC Ref Type Restriction for Redemption Auto Invest Applicable Yes Auto Invest Lag Reminder Lag Ref Type Details 1of1 Ref Type Reference Type Description Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized You can use this screen to e Enter new KYC ref type restrictions e Edit existing KYC ref type restrictions e View existing KYC ref type restrictions e Delete existing KYC ref type restrictions e Authorize KYC ref type restrictions e Amend authorized KYC ref type restrictions Fields in KYC Ref Type Restrictions Auto Invest Applicable Optional Check this box to indicate auto investment feature is applicable e108 ORACLE 3 32 2 Auto Invest Lag Conditional Numeric Positive If auto investment feature is applicable then you need to specify the payment lag in days if any to be applicable for redemption payouts Reminder Lag Conditional Numeric Positive Specify the reminder lag in days after which reminders must be generated for the redemption payout The reminder lag must be less than the auto invest lag period specified in the previous field Ref Type Details Section Ref Types Select the code of the re
73. as to enable payment to be made in the desired currency By default when you set up a withholding tax record for a fund investor category and country combination the computation currency is deemed to be the currency of the country and the payment currency is deemed to be the fund base currency 3 22 4 Withholding Tax Setup Summary Screen After you have set up the WHT details you must have another user authorize them so that they would be effective in the system Before the WHT details are authorized you can edit them as many times as necessary You can also delete a WHT record before it is authorized After authorization you can only make changes to WHT details through an amendment The With Holding Tax Find screen can be used for the following operations on WHT details e Retrieval for viewing e Editing unauthorized details e Disabling unauthorized details if necessary This is possible during editing or amendment e Authorizing details e Amending authorized details Invoke the FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Summary screen by typing UTSWHTAX in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button FCIS WithholdingTax Setup Summary Authorized Open Country Code H Entity Category Entity Type Investor Status Effective Date E3 Fund ID Tax ID H Dividend Component ID Product ID Advanced Search Records per page 15 v LE Authorized Open C
74. attributes of an existing preference you can copy the attributes of an existing preference to a new preference To copy the attributes e Retrieve the record whose attributes the new preference should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter a0 ORACLE 3 29 3 29 1 3 29 2 e Click on Copy from the Action list e Indicate the Template ID for the auto replication preference Setup You can however change the details of the new setup if required Maintaining Preferences for Country Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing provides the facility to associate certain attributes for countries maintained in the system You can define the reputation risk of a country the EUSD option associated with it and assign alpha codes in the Country Preference Maintenance screen You can invoke the Country Preference Maintenance Detail screen by typing UTDCOMPF in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button The following screen is invoked Country Preference Maintenance Detail New 73 Enter Query Country Code CRRT Risk Level EUSD Options i Alpha Country Code Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Checks Before you associate any attribute with a country it is desirable to ensure that the follow
75. authorize a source currency pair e Invoke the Source Currency Pair Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the source currency pair records that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list e Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records e Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the source currency pair association that you wish to authorize The Source Currency Pair Maintenance screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes a source currency pair association details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the association during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the association Amending Source Currency Pair Associations After a source currency pair association is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to an association after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation e Invoke the Source Currency Pair Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the source currency pair record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only ame
76. been authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Currency Cutoff Summary screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the currency cutoff records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorization Status field You can only modify the currency cutoff that is unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records Click Search button All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The Currency Cutoff Detail screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Currency Cutoff Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Currency Cutoff Summary screen 6 6 4 3 Viewing Currency Cutoff Times To view the currency cutoff times that you have previously entered Invoke the Currency Cutoff Summary Screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the records that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records Click Sea
77. can modify the details of a Time Zone Maintenance that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Time Zone Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the unauthorized option Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields to retrieve the record that is to be modified Click Search button All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify in the list of displayed records The Time Zone Detail screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from the Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save your changes The Time Zone Maintenance Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Time Zone Summary screen 9 1 5 Viewing Time Zone Maintenance To view a record that you have previously input you must retrieve the same in the Time Zone Summary screen as follows Invoke the Time Zone Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized
78. cannot be altered If the mode is indirect then the default value may be altered Currency Name Display Only The system displays currency name here Exchange Rate for Report Checkbox Optional You can indicate whether multiple exchange rates for a date in the past are allowed The system will use only those exchange rates where this option is not checked for calculation purposes in various batch processes of FCIS Making Changes to Exchange Rates After you have entered an exchange rate you must have another user authorize it so that it would be effective in the system An unauthorized exchange rate will not be picked up for processing in the system Editing is possible only on the latest exchange rate entered Deletion of an exchange rate that has not been used in the system is possible After authorization you can only make changes to any of the details through an amendment except in the following circumstances The most recent exchange rate or the latest rate that has been entered and authorized can be amended but if this rate has already been used in processing then amendment is not possible The Exchange Rate Maintenance Summary screen can be used for the following operations on currencies e Retrieval for viewing e Editing unauthorized exchange rates e Deleting unauthorized exchange rates e Authorizing exchange rates 6 20 ORACLE You can invoke the Exchange Rate Maintenance Summary screen b
79. checker authorizes a record details of validation if any that were overridden by the maker of the record during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the record Maintaining Policy Restrictions for Guaranteed Funds You can maintain a list of policies that you wish to either include or exclude for GF Correction run You can do this by enabling disabling to exclude the policies in the GF Policy Restrict Mapping screen d ORACLE You can invoke this screen by typing UTDGFPLR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button GF Policy Restrict Mapping New 753 Enter Query Policy Number Disabled No Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized You can specify the following details in this screen Policy Number Mandatory Specify the policy for which you wish to indicate the correction run preferences You can also select the policy number from the option list provided Disabled Optional Select the option to indicate whether you wish to enable or disable correction run for the policy number specified You can indicate your preferences for both Simulation run and Final run For any GF Correction run the system considers only those policies which have this option enabled In this screen you can perform the following operations e Create a new record e Au
80. choose the Blank Space option then all the entities are retrieved The Entity ID Entity Type Entity Name Click Search button after you have specified the required details all entities with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve the individual entity detail from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value For example you can search the record for Entity ID by using the combination of and alphanumeric value as follows Search by D System will fetch all the records whose Entity ID starts from Alphabet D For example Direct Search by 7 System will fetch all the records whose entity ID Type ends by numeric value 7 For example AGENT7 Search by 17 System will fetch all the records whose Entity ID contains the numeric value 17 For example AGEN17 3 21 1 2 Editing Entity You can modify the details of an entity that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Single Entity Summary screen from the Browser Select the status
81. click the record that you want to view in the list of displayed records The Target Based Fee screen is displayed in the view mode Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database Be ORACLE 8 3 0 4 Authorizing Target Based Fee Details Apart from the maker someone else must authorize an unauthorized broker deal in the system for it to be processed To authorize a record Invoke the Target Based Fee Summary screen from the Browser The status of the transaction in the Authorized field Choose the Unauthorized status Click Search button to view the records All the records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Select the Authorization operation from the Action list to authorize the selected record 8 3 0 5 Amending Target Based Fee Details After a target based brokerage is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to a record after authorization Invoke the Target Based Fee Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the transaction that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend only authorized records Click Search button to view the records All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower
82. could have different holiday calendars Further for funds floated by a single AMC across different locations the holiday calendar for specific funds could be different from the AMC holiday calendar You may therefore need to designate holiday calendars separately for the following entities e System e AMC e Fund e Currencies In the system you designate holidays for any of the above in the Holiday Maintenance screen You must first designate the System Calendar before you designate the other calendars The system calendar once designated is taken to be the default AMC and fund calendar You can make appropriate changes if necessary for each aop ORACLE Invoke the Holiday Maintenance Detail screen by typing UTDHOLID in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Holiday Maintenance Detail X New 9 Enter Query Calendar Type Entity ID Disolav Calendar Ls u u EEE M January February March April MAY June input by DateTime Mod No Authorized by Open DateTime Authorized You can use this screen to e View the system holiday calendar for the year e Designate the system holiday calendar for future years e Designate a holiday calendar for either an AMC or a fund or a currency or for all for the year e Add to the holiday list in the AMC fund and or currency calendar e Make a previously designated holiday a wo
83. deletion has already been associated with a country in the Country Currency Maintenance The Currency Maintenance Summary screen can be used for the following operations on currencies Retrieval for viewing Editing unauthorized currencies Deleting unauthorized currencies Authorizing currencies Amending authorized currencies if amendment is possible oa ORACLE You can invoke the Currency Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSCURMA in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Currency Maintenance Summary Authorized Currency Code a Advanced Search Reset Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Currency Code Currency Name Number Of Decimals Amount Format Round Off Truncate 6 2 2 1 Retrieving Currency Record To retrieve a previously entered currency record e Invoke the Currency Maintenance Summary screen and specify the following The authorization status of the currency record in the Authorization Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the currency records in the Record Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The Currency Code e After you have specified the required details click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the l
84. details maintained at Single Entity Maintenance level Details Section In this section you can indicate the fund the income earnings from which will be distributed according to the IDS options you are creating for the selected entity You can also indicate the manner in which the income must be distributed For all entity types other than brokers and unit holders you can define IDS options to be applicable for all funds Specific IDS options for individual funds can still be defined for the entity even if IDS options have been defined to be applicable for all funds and these specific options will supersede the option defined for all funds Rule Applicable for All Funds Optional You can use this field to indicate that the IDS options being defined are applicable for income earned by the entity from all funds If this option is chosen e This cannot be changed through either the edit or amend operations e The ALL option is displayed in the Fund ID and ISIN Code fields and cannot be changed e The specific IDS options can still be separately defined for individual funds which would mean that the selected entity might have IDS options defined for all funds as well as specifically for individual funds In such a case the specific IDS setup for an individual fund if any would take precedence over the IDS options defined for all funds Note This option is available for all entity types except unit holders and bro
85. displayed in amendment mode Select Unlock operation from the Action List to amend the record e Amend the necessary information and click on Save to save the changes Authorizing Amended Time Zone Maintenance An amended Time Zone Maintenance must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The authorization of amended records can be done only from Fund Manager Module and Agency Branch module The subsequent process of authorization is the same as that for normal transactions Copying Attributes If you want to create a new Time Zone Maintenance with the same attributes of an existing maintenance you can copy the attributes of an existing Time Zone Maintenance to a new one To copy the attributes e Retrieve the record whose attributes the new Time Zone Maintenance should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy 29 ORACLE 9 1 11 9 2 e Indicate the ID for the new Time Zone Maintenance You can however change the details of the new maintenance Database and Web Server Time The Agency Branch is the entity for which a Time Zone is associated The Agency Branch module time is used instead of the Database server time as the transaction save and authorization time The Agency Branch time is arrived by the time zone set for it with respect to the module from which the tr
86. e Date e Period e Amount e Units e Date and Amount e Date and Units e Period and Amount e Period and Units ele ORACLE 8 1 9 A load may also be applied based on any other parameter that can be defined as a basis Such a definition is called a basis definition and the load defined on such a basis is called a basis load The following example will make this clear Basis definitions are usually defined based on a number of holdings units or a period of time in days Setting up Basis Definitions In Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing you can create a basis definition for any load through the Basis Definition screen after you have created a load in the Load Definition screen To do so click Basis button The Basis Load screen is opened and you can set up the basis load in this screen Load Maintenance Detail Basic Information Basis Criteria Units Amount Or Percentage Amount v Load ID Take Current Transaction Load Type into Account Load Description Tables Referred Ageing Unit Holder Additional Info LOI Unit Holder Fund Units Group Benifits Unit Holder Fund Amount Fund price Header Investor Criteria You cannot build a basis definition more than once on the same load You can build a basis definition using either the units or period as a basis parameter Itis not possible to build a basis definition using amount as a basis parameter in this screen B
87. eee e ee tnteneeetettaeeeeentae 2 16 2 4 5 Unit Holder Account Servicing Operations cccccceeeeeeeteeeeetetnneeeeeeeae 2 16 2 4 6 Transactions Operations 2 ccccccecccccccceceeeeeetecenenneeaeceeeeseeseeseteeesensisaseees 2 16 2 4 7 Security ANA CONON 20 cece cece ce ensneee ee eennneeeeeesnaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeenaaeeeeeseaaes 2 19 2 4 8 Conventions to be followed in Screens woe ccceeet tte etetnteeeetetnaeeeeenetee 2 20 24 9 Bolfore YOULOQIN eee o aerei nh asetvuiabs EAA AEN 2 20 2 4 10 Logging in to Agency Branch sseeeeesssesiennnernnnnseernnnneerrnsenernnnneennnne 2 20 2 4 11 Agency Branch Men ccccccccecccceesteeeeeeeenneeeeeeeenaeeeeseseaaeeeseesaeeteenenaas 2 21 Maintaining Reference Information eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 3 1 Sel Mi oduch iaaa T A E a eet ee aT 3 1 3 2 Setting up Reference Information eessssisesesrssesesrrnessrnnessssnaneeetennesstnnneeennenneennen 3 1 Bart SEn U EANG TYDE Saan irea T E EA G 3 2 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 23 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 27 3 28 3 3 1 Fields in Fund Type Maintenance SCIree n 22 cccccccccceeceeeeeteeteeneenssanees 3 2 3 3 2 Fund Type Maintenance Summary SCION ceceeecccettteeeceenttteeeeeennaes 3 2 Somo UP ENUtESsrceccesad lesen atoncects E E EE E ARRE 3 6 3 4 1 Fields in Single Entity Maintenance Screen
88. eee ttne cette etneeeeeetaneeeeentae 6 25 GE CHECKS eaer E E N E li otee shi A chaled 6 25 6 6 4 Making Changes to Currency Cutoff Time eossssseeesiseeeeienneeeennneenennee 6 25 6 6 5 Copying Attributes Of Cutoff Time ccccecceeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeneeeeeeesaeeeeeeeenaes 6 28 Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act FATCA ccccceeeeeesseeeeeees 7 1 GML WtrOGUCHOM 35 Sch Gate tepid cate agipe TA tee atten a 7 1 7 2 FATCA Classification ProCeSs cccccceeccncceeeeetneeee eee einieee E EE ii 7 1 3 lt Systeni Parameters cise he A ae ee ea 7 2 7 4 Maintaining FATCA Document 1 0 0 cc cccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeenaees 7 3 7 5 Viewing FATCA Document Maintenance cceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeaaeeeeeeeaaeees 7 5 7 5 1 Viewing FATCA Document Maintenance Details c cccccceeeeecttnteteeeees 7 5 7 5 2 Deleting FATCA Document Maintenance Details cc cceeeeteteeeeeees 7 6 7 5 3 Modifying FATCA Document Maintenance Details 0 c cessseeeeneeeeees 7 6 7 5 4 Authorizing FATCA Document Maintenance Detallls 0 cccccceeeeeees 7 6 7 6 Maintaining Entity FATCA Classification 0 ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeesennaeeeeeeenaaeees 7 7 7 6 1 Linked Entity Details israr eiras agarana ianiai iii a EAE aE EE ERE 7 10 7 7 Viewing Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance ccccceeeeeseeeeeeeentteeeeeeenaaes 7 11 7 7 1 Viewing Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance D
89. exchange rate record whose attributes the new exchange rate should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy in the Actions list e Indicate the new Source ID You can however change the details if required Maintaining Currency Cutoff Time FCIS enables you to capture cutoff time for each currency that is maintained in the system Transaction instructions received post cutoff time of the currency involved in the transaction then the transaction will be processed on the next working day To enter cutoff time for currencies use the Currency Cutoff Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDCURCT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button bres ORACLE 6 6 1 Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to maintain the currency cutoff time Currency Cut Off Details New 3 Enter Query Currency Cut Off Details Currency Code Cut Off Time HH24 Ml Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in Currency Cutoff Screen Currency 3 Character Maximum AlphaNumeric Mandatory Enter the currency code for which you wish to maintain the cut off time Cut Off Time HH24 MI Mandatory Enter the cutoff time for
90. first time When you are in Edit mode this is a Display Only field e ORACLE 4 3 Agent Numeric Mandatory Enter the code of the default Agent for the system Branch Numeric Mandatory Enter the code of the default Agency Branch for the system When you are in Edit mode the Agent and Branch fields are Display Only fields Component 20 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter the default Component of the system for the installation Maintaining System Parameters At the time of installation of Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing the implementers set up codes for parameters that will be used in any maintenance operation in the system involving both static tables and processing They also set up a list of values that would be considered valid for each parameter code In any drop down list in a maintenance screen where the parameter code is used the valid values list will appear The implementers set up these codes and values based on the requirements at each installation Through the System Parameter maintenance static information such as the following master lists can be maintained e Bank account types e Countries e Corporation types e Identification types e Occupation types e Dividend component types e Investor category types e Investment Component types You as a user will be able to add to a list of valid values for a parameter code if so designated by the implementers at the time of installati
91. follows Invoke the KYC Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the unauthorized option Specify any or all of the search parameters in the corresponding fields to retrieve the record that is to be modified Click Search button All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The KYC Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save your changes The KYC Maintenance Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the KYC Maintenance Summary screen 3 31 2 3 Viewing KYC Details To view the KYC details that you have previously entered Invoke the KYC Maintenance Summary Screen from the Browser Select the status of the KYC records that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorized field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the search parameters of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in th
92. for all funds available in the policy for which trailer fee has been computed 4 24 ORACLE The transaction category for this transaction will be legacy execution depending on the advisor is UK domiciled or non UK domiciled In case of reinvestment of trailer commissions the transaction category will be updated as follows e Post RDR date if default broker at UH level is UK domiciled and advise mode at UH level is Advised then the transaction category will be Advised Business else it will be Execution Business e Pre RDR Date if default broker at UH level is UK domiciled then the Transaction category will be Legacy Direct business e If default broker is non UK domiciled the generated transaction will have the transaction category as Legacy Direct business The AMC can also decide to lower the management fee to be charged when the advisor is domiciled in UK The new lower management fee with appropriate category for Advisor domiciled in UK will be mapped aE ORACLE 4 10 3 Front end Fees and Trail Commission Payments 4 10 3 1 For legacy business Front end fee Case 1 Load From Entity To Entity L1 Unit Holder AMC L2 AMC Broker Agent L3 Broker Agent Unit Holder Case 2 Load From Entity To Entity L1 Unit Holder Broker L2 Broker AMC Trailer Fee Case 1 Load From Entity To Entity T1 AMC Broker Agent Case
93. given group Id You can also select the rule Id from the option list provided Sag ORACLE 3 39 1 1 Disallowed Transactions Section 3 39 2 In this section you can indicate if you wish to disallow any transaction based on the transaction type and reference type For e g If you map Rule ID 001 to the event Inflow and choose to disallow this rule for transaction type 02 subscription transaction and if the reference type is RE Reinvestment then during processing the system will not apply this rule for reinvestment transactions generated as a result of dividend processing Disallowed transaction type is applicable for all the rules maintained for the group Transaction Type Optional Specify the transaction type for which you wish to disallow the transaction or select the transaction type from the option list provided Reference Type Optional Specify the transaction reference type for which you wish to disallow the transaction or select the reference type from the option list provided Operations on Group Rule Mapping You can perform the following operations of a group rule mapping record e New an unauthorized record will be created If you have rights for auto Authorization the record will be authorized e Modify an unauthorized record can be modified by the maker edit rights required e Delete an unauthorized record can be deleted by the maker You can not delete the unauthorize
94. has not done any transaction system will default the default intermediary of the unit holder While defaulting if one of the Brokers is disabled system will default from the unit holder If the broker is disabled at the unit holder level as well then system will default to DIRECT e Split Percentage This is applicable only Reinvestment type of transactions System tracks the holdings per broker During re investment generation system will use these brokers as the reinvestment transaction s intermediaries with the appropriate ratio e While defaulting if one of the Brokers is disabled system will default from the unit holder If the broker is disabled at the unit holder level as well then system will default to DIRECT e Default Broker Broker maintained at the unit holder will be defaulted If the broker is disabled at the unit holder level as well then system will default to DIRECT Note You can view the Defaulting of Broker Details Section provided the client country param eter TXNBROKERS is set to True for the installation in your bank Saa ORACLE 3 4 1 6 Viewing Additional Information Details Single Entity Maintenance Detail New E Enter Query Basic Information Base Currency US Indicia Available Tax Category Currency Name FATCA Status Tax Circle BanWAgent Code FATCA Classification Tax ID Bank Agent Name Description Tax Certificate Effective Authorized Signatory Employee Identificat
95. have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorization Status field You can only modify records of entities that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen to retrieve the withholding tax setup record that is to be modified Click Search button All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Maintenance screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The FCIS Withholding Tax Maintenance screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the FCIS Withholding Tax Summary screen 288 ORACLE 3 22 4 3 Viewing Withholding Tax Setup Record To view a withholding tax setup record that you have previously entered e Invoke the FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Summary Screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also vie
96. imports or the Fund ID for fund information related imports When the transaction import file upload is performed for the Bulk Client AMC combination the Unit Holder ID field value should contain the Scheme Cross Reference Number value Note The system will not validate for uniqueness if the same field is populated with duplicate values through the Unit Holder Additional Information Maintenance screen It is assumed that such cross reference numbers are populated only through import file uploads Scheme Cross Reference Numbers for Transactions and Unit Holder Related Imports Scheme Cross Reference Number from additional information The specification made in the scheme cross reference number field will pertain to any one of the fields mentioned below and should be properly specified in the relevant field position in the import file given for unit holder new accounts For example if the Scheme Cross Reference Number has been specified as the third additional information set this information should correspond to being the Additionallnformation3 field in the import file e Additionallnformation1 e Additionallnformation2 e Additionallnformation3 e Additionallnformation4 e Additionallnformation5 e Additionallnformation6 e Additionallnformation7 e Additionallnformation8 e Additionallnformation9 e Additionallnformation10 ol ORACLE 5 9 1 2 5 9 1 3 5 9 1 4 All the above fields are additional information that
97. in days between 3 7 2001 and 3 1 2001 180 days This period falls in the period slab for load L1Y above and the number of units falls in the units slab 001 for L1Y The return value for the load applied will be 75 currency units Load applied based on the subscription transaction T2 The number of days between the transaction T2 and T3 Difference in days between 3 7 2001 and 3 4 2001 90 days This period falls in the period slab for load L4M above and the number of units falls in the units slab 002 for L1Y The return value for the load applied will be 100 currency units Therefore the total load amount applied for the redemption transaction T3 is 75 100 175 currency units Note Both the loads applied as shown in the example above are based on periods and amounts and also on the original subscription transaction s that have generated the units being re deemed in a subsequent redemption transaction These loads have no other basis than these two factors Consequently they are known as aging loads Date and Units The fee charged could also be operable within a date range and a units range Period and Units A load can also be applied based on a certain number of days months or years that the unit holder remains in the fund For instance From To Return Lower Boundary Load Period slab Units Units Value Inclusive L45 45 days 001 0 1000 5 No 002 1000 2000 4 No es
98. in the list of displayed records The Campaign Maintenance screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database Note The maker of the record can only delete the unauthorized record Be ORACLE 8 5 2 4 8 5 2 5 8 6 Authorizing Campaign Details Apart from the maker someone else must authorize an unauthorized broker deal in the system for it to be processed To authorize a record e Invoke the Campaign Summary screen from the Browser e The status of the transaction in the Authorized field Choose the Unauthorized status e Click Search button to view the records All the records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Select the Authorization operation from the Action list to authorize the selected record Amending Campaign Details After a campaign is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to a record after authorization e Invoke the Campaign Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the transaction that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend only authorized records e Click Search button to view the records All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in
99. is displayed in Amendment mode e Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the fund type e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing Amended Fund Types An amended fund type must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is subsequently the same as that for normal transactions Copying Attributes If you want to create a Fund Type having the same attributes of an existing Fund Type you can copy the attributes of an existing fund type to a new fund type To copy the attributes e Retrieve the fund type whose attributes the new fund type should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy in the Actions list e Indicate the ID for the new Fund Type You can however change the details of the Fund Type if required 39 ORACLE 3 4 Setting up Entities Each business entity that the AMC interacts with in the course of managing investment can be profiled in the FC IS system with a unique profile You can use the Single Entity Maintenance screen to set up the following entities in the system Agency Branches Agents AMC Banks Bank Branches Bulk Clients Registrars Trustees Check Vendors Underwriters Custodians Clearing Agents Account and Valuation
100. is required either CIF level or Identification Type level Depending upon your choice CIF relevant fields or Identification Type fields are available for selection for automatic replication Note If you select auto replication code as BROKERINFOCHANGE and applicable for option as B Broker and click on Populate button the system displays the list of all available fields for creating a template Field Name and Field Description Select the fields in the Unit Holder New Account maintenance changes to which are to be replicated to all accounts under a CIF You can choose either CIF relevant fields or fields pertaining to Identification Type depending on the level at which the automatic replication is required which you have selected in the Applicable For field The list of fields for which the automatic replication feature is available is pre configured for your installation Operations on Auto Replication Template You can perform the following operations on a template for automatic replication e Edit the fields defined for the template before authorization e Delete the template before authorization e View the template e Have another user authorize the template e Amend the template after authorization Note During edit or amend operations the template ID cannot be changed Only the fields tagged to the template are allowed to be changed oe ORACLE To perform any of these operations use the Aut
101. is to be made to the intermediary of the transaction that resulted in the periodic fee or to the default intermediary specified for the unit holder involved in the transaction that resulted in the periodic fee If you are setting up periodic load for Agent Agency Branch Account officer or IFA the Intermediary should be set to either Hierarchy or Transaction If the Intermediary is set to Hierarchy the commission will be processed to the Default entities maintained at SLA If the Intermediary is set to Transaction the commission will be processed to the entities maintained at the Transaction level In case of CIF Merger Hierarchy merger Trailer commission will be processed to the respective entities till the merger and from the date of merger the same is processed to the new entities Intermediary Details Alphanumeric Optional Specify description of the intermediary to which you need to pay the periodic fee Last Processed Date Display only This indicates the date when the last payment was made First Load to be Computed Select the first load to be computed from AUM Following are the options available in the drop down list e Trailer Commission e Management Fee By default First Load to be Computed is Trailer Fee Netted AUM for Second Load Select if second load has to be computed on netted AUM Following are the options available in the drop down list e Yes e No Pe ORACLE 8 1 17 3
102. key LOV navigation involves navigating through the list of values available Tab Key e To navigate through reduction fields e To move focus to the cross button in the window title bar Shift Tab Key e To move focus to the first element of the header of result block Esc e To close the LOV window Arrow Keys e To navigate between the elements of the result block 10 8 ORACLE 10 4 1 5 10 4 1 6 10 4 2 Shortcut Keys To avoid focusing on navigation buttons the following shortcut keys are available e First page Home e Previous page Page Up e Next Page Page Down e Last Page End Calendar Navigation You can open Calendar window by pressing F4 key Calendar navigation involves navigating through the years months and days Tab Key e To move focus to the exit button in the window title bar Shift Tab Key e To move focus to the first navigation button Esc e To close the calendar window Arrow Keys e To navigate between the dates Shortcut Keys To avoid focusing on navigation buttons the following shortcut keys are available e Previous Year Home e Previous Month Page Up e Next Month Page Down e Next Year End Editor Navigation You can open Editor window by pressing F4 key Tab Key e To navigate between the text area and buttons Esc e To close the editor window Note Press Enter if the editor window is only a display field
103. loads To configure the system to process a load you must e Initiate the load in the system with all its parameters in the Load Maintenance Detail screen You can access this screen from the Maintenance menu category of the Fund Manager component At this time you must also create any derived loads or basis loads as applicable for the load e Have another user authorize this load in the Load Maintenance Find Summary screen This screen may be accessed from the Maintenance menu category of the Fund Manager component When a load is authorized all the derived and basis loads if any that you have created for the load are also authorized simultaneously e At this point you can edit any details for the load including details of any derived or basis loads that you have created for the load e Map this load to be applied on transactions in the desired funds in the Fund Load Setup screen You can access this screen through the Fund Demographics screen from the Fund Rules Detail option in the Maintenance menu category of the Fund Manager component e You can also map the load to be applicable for a group of funds defined as a load group You can do this through the Group Load Mapping screen accessing it through the Maintenance menu category of the Fund Manager component e Authorize the fund with all its fund rules in the Fund Rule Find Summary screen You can access this screen from the Maintenance menu category of the Fund
104. oaeiai 7 12 UTDEXCRM a 6 18 UTSFNTYP uous 3 3 UTDFATDT ou cece 7 3 UTS PROPER wcsisacasiiaense 3 116 UTDFATMT caiucsicncsctwacaleace 7 7 UTSGFPLR rnini 3 143 UTDFEECA ou eceeceeeeeee 4 16 UTSHOLID sctrctnceiatiansteias 3 66 UTDFNTYP ou eee 3 2 UTSHRGMP sxccsmsnccstacms 3 140 UTDFERQPR o 3 114 UTSHWM ues 3 128 UTDGFPLR o 3 142 UTSINDEX occ 3 81 UTDHDRUL oiii 3 134 UTSINRMN acintast sutvinenads 3 120 UTDHOLID 0 0 eeeee eee 3 61 UTSKYOMT etscciiitt ctcoseinas 3 104 UTDHRGMP a 3 138 UTSKYCRE osiin 3 109 UTDHWM uw cece eee 3 127 UTSLOADM so ccbainesiedennixainiins 8 19 UTDINDEX u eee eee 3 80 UTS MPA YS sitscaiintadsintnacades 3 71 UTDINRMN cece 3 119 WTS PERM ticiastinidutrionasaate 8 38 Di ORACLE UTSRATES eee 3 124 UTSSORCE ee 6 15 UTSSWPRY eee 3 73 UTSTGBFE ee 8 47 UTSWHTAX noenee 3 57 UTSTIMEZ oriin 9 2 ie ORACLE Reference Information User Guide September 2014 Oracle Financial Services Software Limited Oracle Park Off Western Express Highway Goregaon East Mumbai Maharashtra 400 063 India Worldwide Inquiries Phone 91 22 6718 3000 Fax 91 22 6718 3001 www oracle com financialservices Copyright 2007 2014 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners U S GOVERNMENT END USERS Oracle programs including any
105. of a source currency pair that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Source Currency Pair Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the source currency pair records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorization Status field You can only modify records of the source currency pairs that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records Click Search button All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The Source Currency Pair Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Source Currency Pair Maintenance Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Source Currency Pair Maintenance Summary screen 6 4 4 3 Viewing Source Currency Pair Details To view the source currency pair details that you have previously entered Invoke the Source Currency Pair Summary Screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the records that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also
106. of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Query All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Element Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from the Action List When a checker authorizes a record details of validation if any that were overridden by the maker of the record during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the record Maintaining Rules for Performance Fee Calculation You can maintain the formulas and expressions used to set up the rule for performance fee calculation in Rule Maintenance screen The derived and non derived data elements are used to create expressions and formula while setting up the rules You can invoke Rule Maintenance screen by typing UTDHDRUL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button De curtitess New 453 Enter Query Rule Maintenance Rule ID Description Rule Details 1of1 Formula No Condition Element ID Expression Condition Builder Expressioi Candition Fmilder Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized oer ORACLE 3 38 1 Fields in Rule Maintenance Screen
107. of the screen e Double click the entity that you want to view The Single Entity Maintenance screen is displayed in view mode 3 21 1 4 Deleting Entity You can delete only unauthorized entities in the system To delete an entity e Invoke the Single Entity Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the entity that you want to retrieve for deletion e Specify any or all of the details of the entity in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All entities with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the entity that you want to delete The Single Entity Maintenance Detail screen is displayed e Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database 3 21 1 5 Authorizing Entities An unauthorized entity must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize an entity e Invoke the Single Entity Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the entity that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list e Specify any or all of the details of the entity in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All entities with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the sc
108. operating system integrated software any programs installed on the hardware and or documentation delivered to U S Government end users are commercial computer software pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency specific supplemental regulations As such use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation of the programs including any operating system integrated software any programs installed on the hardware and or documentation shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs No other rights are granted to the U S Government This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications including applications that may create a risk of personal injury If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate failsafe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure its safe use Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law you may not use copy
109. operation from Action list To make changes to an exchange list after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation e Invoke the Exchange List Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of entities that are authorized e Specify Share Class ID optional in the corresponding field on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to amend The Exchange List Summary screen is displayed in Amendment mode e Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the list e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing Amended Exchange Lists An amended exchange list must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is subsequently the same as that for normal transactions Copying Attributes If you want to create an exchange list having the same attributes of an existing setup you can copy the attributes of an existing setup to a new setup To copy the attributes e Retrieve the exchange list whose attributes the new entity should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sectio
110. operation from the Action list to open the record Bae ORACLE 8 4 Sharing of Entity Commission Trailer commission on holdings in a fund is typically paid by the fund to the master distributor agent and the sharing of trailer commission between the master distributor and other transaction intermediaries is processed based on the hierarchy level holdings The rules according to which trailer commissions could be shared can be set up in the Entity Commission Sharing Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDENTCO in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Entity Commission Sharing Detail New 4 Enter Query Entity Details Description Type Of Commission AMC Name AMC ID Parent Entity Type Parent Entity Description Parent Entity ID Parent Entity Name To Entity Type To Entity Description To Entity ID To Entity Name Fund ID Fund Name Fund ISIN Group ID Group Description Commission Sharing Description Methods Commission Percentage Performance Parameters Description Load ID Description Commission Currency Description Processing Frequency Description Calculation Method Next Processing Date Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized In this screen the sharing of commission could be set up by providing the following details e The type of commission being shared
111. option under the Entity menu in the Browser To set up an underwriter select the Underwriter option from the drop down list in the Entity Type field in the Common Information section and then proceed to enter the details for the underwriter You must specify all information such as the common information basic information and contact details for all underwriters that you set up Note You must associate an underwriter that you create a record for to the fund for which in vestors avail the check writing facility You can indicate the association in the Fund Entity screen You can also associate an underwriter with the trailing fee load due to the under writer in the Periodic Load Maintenance screen ot ORACLE 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 20 Setting up Custodians You can also maintain records for custodians as entities in the system For custodians you can maintain basic details such as contact information signatories and base currency You can set up a custodian in the Single Entity Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by clicking the Detail option under the Entity menu in the Browser To set up a custodian select the Custodian option in the Entity Type field and then proceed to enter the details for the vendor You must specify all information such as the common information basic information and contact details for all custodians that you set up Setting up Accounting and Valuation Agents You can en
112. or payout account Limit Amount Numeric Mandatory Specify the value of the limit placed on payouts to the payout account If the value of the payment exceeds this value a demand draft payment must be made For payments below this value check payments may be made Default Account Optional You can use this field to indicate whether the specified account is deemed to be the default collection or payout account for the selected module transaction type payment mode and fund combination Select this box to indicate that it is the default account or leave it unselected to indicate that it is one of the other accounts IBAN 36 Characters Only Alphanumeric Optional Specify the IBAN International Bank Account Number of the account holder Correspondent Bank Details Section Bank Code 9 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the code of the bank that is being designated as a correspondent bank for the collection center or a payout bank The correspondent collection account or the payout account must reside in this bank Branch Code 9 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the code of the branch of the bank that is being designated as a correspondent bank for collection center or a payout bank The correspondent collection account or the payout account must reside in this branch of the selected bank ont ORACLE 3 27 2 Account Type Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the type of the correspon
113. pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Policy Guaranteed Fund Detail screen is displayed in amendment mode Select Unlock operation from the Action List to amend the record sigi ORACLE 6 Amend the necessary information and click on Save to save the changes 3 40 1 7 Authorizing an Amended Policy Guaranteed Fund Record An amended Policy Guaranteed Fund record must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The authorization of amended records can be done only from Fund Manager Module and Agency Branch module The subsequent process of authorization is the same as that for normal transactions 3 40 1 8 Copying the Attributes If you want to create a new Policy Guaranteed Fund record with the same attributes of an existing one you can copy the attributes of an existing Policy Guaranteed Fund record to a new one To copy the attributes 1 Retrieve the record whose attributes the new Policy Guaranteed Fund should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation explained in the previous sections of this chapter 2 Click on Copy 3 Indicate the ID for the new Policy Guaranteed Fund You can however change the details of the new maintenance oe ORACLE 4 1 4 Maintaining System Parameters Introduction In Oracle FLEXCUBE Invest
114. perform any operation on a source and currency pair e Invoke the Source Currency Pair Maintenance Summary screen and specify the following The authorization status of the source currency pair record in the Authorization Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the source currency pair records in the Record Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved Source ID Source Name Source Reference Currency Quotation Units for Reference e Click Search button after you have specified the required details All the records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve an individual source currency pair from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value Example BS ORACLE You can search the record for Source ID by using the combination of and alphanumeric value that is Search by R The system will fetch all the records whose Source ID starts from Alphabet R For example Reuters 6 4 4 2 Editing Source Currency Pair Details You can modify the details
115. prices can be used for ascertaining the value of investment in the fund e Amount Limits for IRA Transactions identifying the limits for investment into funds that are part of the portfolio of a retirement product e Sl Specific Information maintaining rules for standing instruction generation for a fund e Fund Delivery Instruction e Fund Investment Account associating the fund investment account types allowed with a fund e KYC Maintenance maintaining the list of KYC documents specific to the fund e Additional Information maintaining additional information under the information heads specific to an AMC If you do not maintain fund rules for a fund you cannot process investment into the fund in the system Associating entities with funds You can associate entities such as agents with a fund that you maintain Such agents would be allowed to market the fund If check writing facilities are allowed for a fund you can also associate the check vendors that would print the checks for the fund Groups of funds with common load characteristics You can maintain groups of funds for which common loads are applicable on transactions The group of funds or load group facility is especially useful for loads that are applicable in the case of privileges of the investor such as rights of accumulation ROA or a letter of intent LOI Investment Products You can also maintain processing guidelines for investment products that
116. product portfolio You can also give each set of slabs a separate tax component ID You can define slabs for different income ranges and give each of the slabs a sequence number You cannot however set up duplicate tax slab sequences for the same investor category Fag ORACLE 3 22 1 3 22 2 Checks Before you set up the Withholding Tax details for an investor category for a country it is desirable to ensure that the following information is already set up in the system e The countries have been maintained in the Country Maintenance and the currencies have been set up in the Currency Maintenance e The countries have been associated with currencies in the Country Currency Maintenance e The different investor and broker categories have been maintained in the System Parameters Fields in FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Screen Entity Type Alphanumeric Mandatory Indicate whether the WHT slabs are being maintained to be applicable to an Unit Holder or a broker Entity Category Alphanumeric Specify a valid category of the unit holder you need to assign to specified entity type The adjoining option list displays all valid entity categories maintained You can select the appropriate one If the Entity Type is Unitholder then maintain Entity Category as UH If the Entity Type is Broker then maintain the Entity Category as Broker Category Name Display only The syst
117. record must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is subsequently the same as that for normal transactions Copying Attributes If you want to create a holiday record having the same attributes of an existing holiday record you can copy the attributes of an existing holiday record to a new record To copy the attributes e Retrieve the holiday record whose attributes the new record should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy in the Actions list e Indicate the new parameters for the new holiday record You can however change the details of the holiday if required Mode of Payment You can use this screen to set up the clearing options for the various modes of payments that are valid in the system For each mode of payment you can e Enter the clearing options e Edit the existing unauthorized clearing options e Authorize the clearing periods e View existing clearing options for any of the Modes of Payment e Amend the authorized clearing periods During amendment or editing it is possible to alter the Clearing Period and set the Auto Clear Option During installation the modes of payment and the default clearing periods for each mode are entered into the system automatically Subsequently if you need to view or make
118. records in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The AMC code The fund ID The load ID The broker ID Process Date The status of process e After you have specified the required details click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve a target based fee detail from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input reference number Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Close and Reopen operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value pat ORACLE 8 3 0 2 Editing Target Based Fee Details You can modify the details that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Target Based Fee Summary screen and specify the following The authorization status of the exchange rate record in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the exchange rate records in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The AMC code The fund ID The load ID The broker ID
119. retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the entity that you wish to authorize The Frequency Preferences Maintenance screen displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes an entity details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the transaction during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the record 3 33 2 6 Amending Frequency Preferences After a frequency preference is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to an entity after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation Invoke the Frequency Preference Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of entities that are authorized Specify any or all of the search parameters in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the entity that
120. screen should display the set values as e 1 22 e 2 28 Where as for weekly frequency by days the values should be displayed individually for a set which would be Mon Thu Fri and thus this check box would be unchecked Frequency Details Section Set ID Specify the unique ID for this set depending on the frequency specified Note If Set ID is already mapped to the SI you cannot delete the same during amendment This will be checked by looking at the funds that are mapped to the Freq ID for which SI has been setup for a particular Set ID List Of Dates Days Specify the dates or days based on the Set Type Note If the client country parameter is set to SIRULEATFREQ for your bank please refer to Annex_A doc for further details Frequency Preferences Summary Screen The Frequency Preferences Summary screen can be used to view the details regarding setup of dates days that can be used for mapping in Fund rules and Standing Instructions SiS ORACLE You can invoke this screen by typing UTSFRQPR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Preferences Frequency Summary Authorized Open Frequency ID ai Set Type Frequency Advanced Search Reset Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Frequency ID Description Set Type Display individual set values Frequency 3 33 2 1 Retrieving Frequen
121. that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters of the currency for retrieving the records 4 Click Search All unauthorized currencies with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the currency that you want to modify The Country Preference Maintenance Detail screen is displayed 6 Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information ane ORACLE 7 Click Save to save the changes The Country Preference Maintenance screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Country Preference Maintenance Summary screen 3 29 2 4 Viewing Country Preference Details To view the currency details that you have previously entered 1 Invoke the Country Preference Maintenance Summary Screen from the Browser 2 Select the authorization status of the currency records that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorized field You can also view all currencies that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the search parameters 4 Click Search All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you want to view The Country Preference Maintenance screen Detail is displayed
122. the Authorized field You can only modify records of holidays that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the parameters of the holiday in the corresponding fields on the screen to retrieve the record that is to be modified Click Search button All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The Holiday Maintenance screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Holiday Maintenance screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Holiday Summary screen POr ORACLE 3 23 1 3 Viewing Holiday Maintenance Record To view a holiday record that you have previously entered e Invoke the Holiday Maintenance Summary Screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all entities that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option e Specify any or all of the parameters of the holiday in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you
123. the Ensuring Security chapter in this User Manual for a detailed discussion of the Security Management System of Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing Typically the business user roles associated with the Agency Branch component of the system are the following Fund Administrator The Fund Administrator is responsible for maintenance of reference information and the fund related information Supervisor The Supervisor is responsible for any authorization activities carried out in Fund Manager Operator The Operator is responsible for carrying out the End of Day activities a0 ORACLE 2 3 7 2 3 8 Reports The Fund Manager component allows you to view and print various kinds of reports either on a daily basis or at periodic intervals E g If you want to print the transfer transactions that have taken place you can print the Transfer Summary Report which shows all the Transfer transactions received for a given date on which units have been allotted The reports that are available for generation preview and print include e Performance Across All Funds Amount e Performance Across All Funds Units e Unit Holder Register e Transaction Load Listings e Check Printing e Payment Summary e Letter Of Intents e Login Tracking Report e Unit Holder Transaction e Unit Holder Transaction Fee e Rejected Transactions Report e Maturity Date Report e Account Transfer Payments e Exchange Rate Override Report e Bulk Account
124. the From Share Class Type field e Setup a list of share classes to which switching must be allowed from the switch from the share class that you selected e Save your changes by clicking the Save button 3 25 2 Switch Privilege List Setup Summary Screen After you have set up a restrictive list of switching between share classes for switch transactions you must have another user authorize it so that it becomes effective in the system Before the restrictive list is authorized you can edit it as many times as necessary You can also delete it before it is authorized After authorization you can only change the switch period through an amendment The Switch Privilege Setup Summary screen can be used for the following operations on restrictive privilege lists e Retrieval for viewing e Editing an unauthorized restrictive privilege list e Deleting unauthorized restrictive privilege list e Authorizing switch restrictive privilege list e Amending switch restrictive privilege list aia ORACLE Invoke the Switch Privilege Setup Summary screen by typing UTSSWPRV in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Switch Privilege Setup Summary a Authorized X Open X From Share Class ID a3 Reset Records per page 15 v 11 Authorized Open From Share Class ID To Share Class ID m 3 25 2 1 Retrieving Switch Privilege Setup Li
125. the US Dollar 2 ORACLE Currency Lower Alphabetic Mandatory Express the currency specified above in its lower denomination for example Cents if the higher currency is USD Currency Separator 15 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric You can maintain the separator details for the currencies The Currency Higher must be specified because it is mandatory but if the number of decimals has been specified as zero the Currency Lower and the Currency Separator details need not be specified Round Off Truncate Alphanumeric Mandatory Indicate whether the currency format is to be rounded off or truncated Amount Format Boolean Mandatory Select the format in which amounts in this currency must appear either Millions or Crores Currency Type Boolean Mandatory Select the type of currency that is being maintained in this record This could be any of the following 3 types e Out Currency Select this option to maintain a currency that will be not subsumed into the Euro Currency and will always have an exchange rate against the Euro Therefore no validity periods or fixed conversion rates will need to be captured for this currency and none of the restrictions that apply to In currencies will be applicable Once a currency is designated as an Out Currency it can later be designated as an In Currency on editing its record profile in this screen e In Currency Select this option to maintain a currency that will be subsumed by the Euro Cu
126. the chosen currency Cutoff time should be within 00 00 to 23 59 Click Ok button to store the record in the database While saving system checks for any duplicate records If the record is being modified by any other user at the time of saving then system throws up an error oat ORACLE 6 6 2 6 6 3 6 6 4 6 6 4 1 Currency Cutoff Summary Screen You can invoke the Currency Cutoff Summary screen by typing UTSCURCT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Currency Cut Off Details Authorized Currency Code Advanced Search Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Cut Off Time HH24 Ml Currency Code Checks Before you associate a country with its currency it is desirable to ensure that the currencies must be set up in the system in the Currency Maintenance Making Changes to Currency Cutoff Time After you have set up the cutoff time for a currency you must have another user authorize it so that it would be effective in the system Cutoff time for an unauthorized record will not be used in the system The Currency Cutoff Time Summary screen can be used for the following operations on Currency Cutoff Time e Retrieval for viewing e Editing unauthorized records e Deleting unauthorized records e Authorizing cutoff time for a currency e Amending authorized records Retrieving Currency Cut
127. the income must be made The details of the account you select are displayed in the bank account details fields You must select a bank account for which the currency is a valid fund bank account currency so that the income payment transfer can be affected Note For commission payments for entities other than brokers the account you specify here is used as the default settlement account If IDS options have not been set for an entity and this account is not specified settlement of commission payment is made to the entity s default bank account specified in the Entity Maintenance Bank Name Numeric Mandatory for Third Party transfer payment Select the name of the bank in which the transfer account is present from the drop down list Branch 20 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory for Third Party transfer payment Specify the branch name of the bank in which the transfer account is present A C Type 1 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory for Third Party transfer payment Select the account type Fixed Savings or Current of the transfer account AIC No 16 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory for Third Party transfer payment Specify the number of the transfer account AIC Ccy Alphanumeric Mandatory for Third Party transfer payment Specify the currency of the transfer account The currency specified here must be a valid fund bank account currency oa ORACLE A C Holder Name Alphanumeric Man
128. the period during which the import is required to be executed If the import is to run without an end date then check the No End Date check box In the Time tab specify the start and end times for the first and last occurrence of the execution on the day of occurrence and the frequency of occurrence between If it is to be executed only once during the day of occurrence specify the time of occurrence in the Occurs Once At field Save the job The Job ID is displayed by the system Note Whenever this job is executed the system creates an event for the execution and inserts it into the event log Now the system is ready to perform the other imports using this one as a trigger for the execution of all the other import as well Setting up a job for the import of all information other than unit holder information To set up a job for the import of new or amended transactions income distribution setups and standing instructions for unit holders load overrides for transactions and fund prices for transactions proceed in the manner described below Access the Job Maintenance screen in the Maintenance menu category of the Fund Manager component In the Task ID field select the TXNIMPORT task ID In the Frequency Basis field select the Event based option Check the Enabled check box so that the job is enabled In the Schedule section select the Recurring option If the unit holder import job is scheduled as a recurring job then t
129. the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Frequency Preference Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the frequency ID record that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records of entities that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters in the corresponding fields on the screen to retrieve the entity that is to be modified Click Search button All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the entity that you want to modify The Frequency Preferences Maintenance screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Frequency Preferences Maintenance screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Frequency Preferences Summary screen 3 33 2 3 Viewing Frequency Preference Record To view a frequency preference record that you have previously entered Invoke the Frequency Preference Summary Screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorized field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Au
130. the user You can enter up to three contact numbers Maintaining Dividend Component Details Earnings from a dividend can be classified as permissible or non permissible As per Shariah laws non permissible income cannot be reinvested into the fund You can maintain dividend component details in the Dividend Components Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDDVCOM in the field at the top right corner of the oe ORACLE 4 9 1 4 10 Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details Dividend Components Detail New 5 Enter Query Dividend Components Component ID Component Description Parent Component ID NPI Applicable No Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in Dividend Components Screen Component ID 2 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter a unique identifier for the dividend component that is to be classified as Non permissible income Component Description Enter a description of the component NPI Applicable Check this option to indicate that income from this component is non permissible Parent Component ID Mandatory if the component is NPI Applicable If the component has been classified as NPI Applicable then specify the parent dividend component The parent component specified here will be used for r
131. valid and authorized currencies maintained in the system Default Mandatory Select Yes option to set this bank account as the default account to receive the payments You shall set at least one account as default for each of the currency Direct Debit Allowed Optional Select Yes option to debit the account directly Click the Bank Details button in the Payment Group Maintenance screen to maintain the additional bank details The screen is displayed below Bank Details Swift Format MT103 Bank Charged Beneficiary Beneficiary Beneficiary BIC Code Beneficiary Add1 Beneficiary Acct No Beneficiary Add2 Beneficiary Code Beneficiary Add3 Beneficiary Info Beneficiary IBAN Intermediary Intermediary BIC Code Intermediary Add1 Intermediary Acct No Intermediary Add2 Intermediary Code Intermediary Add3 Intermediary Info Intermediary IBAN Further Credit Name Further Credit Acct No Reference1 Reference2 In this screen you can maintain the following details SWIFT Format Optional Select the SWIFT format from the drop down list for receiving the payments The drop down list consists of the following SWIFT message formats oee ORACLE e MT103 e MT202 Bank Charged Optional Select the bank to be charged Select any of the following options e Beneficiary e Remitter e Share Beneficiary Optional Specify the beneficiary of the payment group Beneficiary BIC Code Optional Specify th
132. validation if any that were overridden by the maker of the record during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the record 3 36 3 5 Amending High Water Mark record After a High Water Mark record is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from the Action List You will not be allowed to amend the record if fund price is maintained for the day later than or equal to HWM effective date e To make changes to a record after authorization e Invoke the High Water Mark Summary screen from the Browser ad ORACLE 3 37 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization You can only amend authorized records Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Query All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you wish to authorize The High Water Mark screen is displayed in amendment mode Select Unlock operation from the Action List to amend the record Amend the necessary information and click on Save to save the changes Maintaining Data Elements Data elements are maintained to calculate the performance fee associated with hedge funds Data elements can be of either of the following two types Non Derived or factory shipped e g HWM SUB_PRICE Subscription price
133. want to view The Holiday Maintenance screen is opened in view mode 3 23 1 4 Deleting Holiday Maintenance Record You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete an holiday record e Invoke the Holiday Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion e Specify any or all of the parameters of the holiday in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to delete The Holiday Maintenance Detail screen is displayed e Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database 3 23 1 5 Authorizing Holidays An unauthorized holiday must be authorized in the system for it to be come into effect To authorize a holiday e Invoke the Holiday Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the holiday record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list e Specify any or all of the parameters of the holiday in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen
134. wish to authorize The Indexation Maintenance screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes an entity details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the transaction during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the indexation Amending Indexations After an indexation is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to an indexation after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation e Invoke the Indexation Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of entities that are authorized e Specify the date parameters based on which the system should retrieve the records e Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to amend The Indexation Summary screen is displayed in Amendment mode e Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the list e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing Amended Exchange Lists An amended exchange list must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is subsequent
135. you want to amend The Single Entity Maintenance screen is displayed in Amendment mode Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the entity Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes 3 33 2 7 Authorizing Amended Frequency Preferences An amended frequency preference must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is subsequently the same as that for normal transactions 3 33 2 8 Copying Attributes If you want to create a frequency preference having the same attributes of an existing preference you can copy the attributes of an existing preference to a new preference To copy the attributes Retrieve the record whose attributes the new frequency preference should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter Click on Copy in the Actions list Indicate the Frequency ID for the new preference You can however change the details if required eg ORACLE 3 34 3 34 1 Maintaining Interest Rate Details The interest rate that is to be used for interest calculation is maintained using the Interest Rate Maintenance screen In order to arrive at the rate of interest you have to maintain the effective date transaction currency details and Interest Rate of the transaction You can invoke the FCIS Inte
136. 0 3 1 10 3 2 33235M01 DISTAGY FMGKERDIST Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing v 12 0 ENG 04 23 2014 Windows Internet Explorer Lo ue Home Interactions Tasks Preferences Change Module Options Window Help Sign Off UTDLODM gt Menu amp Amount Block Amount UnBlock BPEL Workflow Bank Reconciliation Batch CIF Address CIF UH Mapping Cheque Book Request Cheque Printing Clear User Profile Customer Maintenance Delegate Distributor SI Entity Notepad First Verification GF Policy Restrict Mapping Interfaces Investment Simulator Investor fund Balance LEP Maintenance LEP Online Load Maintenance gt Detail Payment Clearing amp Plan Maintenance Queries amp RTA Transfers Reports Sign Verification Special View Standing Instruction Succession Price System Parameters Transaction Txn Broker Amendment UH IDS Setup amp UH IRRF Preference UH LO UH NPI Preference UH Non Tax Limits UH Portfolio Re Adjustment UH Status Change UnitHolder Balances Unitholder amp Unitholder Deal Upload Operations Keyboard Compatibility Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing is compatible with keyboard You can comfortably navigate using arrow keys and tab keys You can use the appropriate keyboard shortcuts to navigate through the following sections e Landing Page Side Bar Menu Toolbar e Custom Windows D
137. 2 Load From Entity To Entity T1 AMC Broker Agent T2 Broker Agent Unitholder Case 3 Load From Entity To Entity T1 AMC Unit Holder Case 4 Load From Entity To Entity T1 AMC Broker Agent T2 AMC Unit Holder Case 5 Load From Entity To Entity T1 Unit Holder Broker Agent In cases where To Entity is Unitholder investor may receive trailer commission in the form of Cash or reinvestment into same fund This is only applicable when from Entity is M 4 20 ORACLE 4 10 3 2 For Execution business Front end fee Case 1 Load From Entity To Entity L1 Unit Holder AMC L2 AMC Broker Agent Case 2 Load From Entity To Entity L1 Unit Holder Broker L2 Broker AMC Trailer Fee Case 1 Load From Entity To Entity T1 AMC Broker Agent Case 2 Load From Entity To Entity T1 AMC Broker Agent T2 Broker Agent Unit Holder Case 3 Load From Entity To Entity T1 AMC Unit Holder Case 4 Load From Entity To Entity T1 AMC Broker Agent T2 AMC Unit Holder Case 5 Load From Entity To Entity T1 Unit Holder Broker Agent In this case Unitholder can mention his preferred fund and fee can be paid by redeeming units from this fund 4 27 ORACLE 4 10 3 3 For Advisor Business Front end fee Case 1 Load From Entity To Entity L1
138. 7 The system will fetch all the records whose Share Class ID contains the numeric value 17 For example 17 3 25 2 2 Editing Switch Privilege Setup List You can modify the switch privilege setup that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Switch Privilege Setup List Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorization Status field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify the From Share Class ID optional in the corresponding field Click Search button All unauthorized switch privilege setup lists with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The Switch Privilege Setup Maintenance screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Switch Privilege Setup Maintenance screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Switch Privilege Setup Summary screen 3 25 2 3 Viewing Switch Privilege Setup List To view a switch privilege list that you have previously entered Invoke the Switch Privilege Setup List Summary Screen from the Browser Select the
139. All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view The FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Maintenance Detail is displayed in view mode 5 9 4 4 Deleting Bulk Client Details You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a bulk client record Invoke the Bulk Clients Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the bulk client records that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the search parameters Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the bulk client record that you want to delete The FCIS Bulk Client Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database 5 9 4 5 Authorizing Bulk Client Details Records 5 9 4 6 An unauthorized bulk client record must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a bulk client record Invoke the Bulk Clients Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the Bulk Clients Maintenance record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters of the Bulk Clients M
140. Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button The Fund Type Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the Fund Type Fund Type Maintenance Detail New 73 Enter Query Fund Type Description Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in Fund Type Maintenance Screen Fund Type 4 Character Maximum Numeric Mandatory Specify an identification for the fund type that you wish to set up Description Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter a brief description for the fund type Fund Type Maintenance Summary Screen You can use the Fund Type Maintenance Summary screen to e Edit an existing fund type e View existing fund types e Delete an existing fund type e Authorize a fund type e Amend an authorized fund type oe ORACLE You can invoke the Fund Type Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSFNTYP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Fund Type Maintenance Summary Records per page 15 v Authorized Fund Type a Advanced Search a Authorized Fund Type Description 3 3 2 1 Retrieving Fund Type in Summary Screen You can retrieve a previously entered fund type in the Summary screen as follows Invoke the Fund Type Summary screen and specify the following The statu
141. Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes an association details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the association during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the association Amending Country Currency Associations After a country currency association is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to an association after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation Invoke the Country Currency Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the association record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of associations that are authorized Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records Click Search button All the records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the association that you want to amend The Country Currency Maintenance screen is displayed in Amendment mode Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the association Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes oN ORACLE 6 3 3 7 Authorizing Amended Currency Details An amended country currency association must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system
142. Book Request Detail New 453 Enter Query Bulk Clients Details Bulk Client Code AMC Distributor Id Bulk Client Name Distributor Client Defaults Cheque Book Request Mandatory Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized 5 9 1 15 Default Information for Policy Transactions You can invoke the FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Policy Transaction screen by typing UTDBLKPT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button e FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Policy Transaction Detail New 53 Enter Query Bulk Clients Details Bulk Client Code Distributor ID Bulk Client Name Distributor Client Defaults Generate Authorized System Generated Reference Transactions Number Other Details Scheme Cross Reference Transaction Intermediary SelectOne v Number Fund Scheme Cross Reference Number Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized For policy transactions import you must maintain e Whether authorized transaction records are to be generated in the system a8 ORACLE e Whether a system generated reference number is indicated e Scheme Cross Reference Number e Fund Scheme Cross Reference Number e Whether the broker associated in policy creation or the default broker details of the unit holder are to be defaulted if intermediary details are not provided 5 9 2 Default Information for
143. Broker You can invoke the FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Broker screen by typing UTDBLCBD in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Broker Detail New 7 Enter Query Bulk Clients Details Bulk Account Client Code Distributor AMC ID Bulk Client Name Distributor Client Defaults Broker Base Currency Broker Type VAT Registered No Use Broker Type Payment Commission Percentage Dates Commission Payment Broker Category SelectOne Frequency Additional Information Details i 1of1 Other Information Field Field Value Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized For Broker import you must maintain e Broker Base Currency e Commission Payment Frequency e Commission Percentage met ORACLE 5 9 3 5 9 3 1 Default Information for UH Deal Upload You can invoke the FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults UH Deal Upload screen by typing UTDBLUHD in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button amp FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults UH Deal Upload Detail i New 7 Enter Query Bulk Clients Details Bulk Client Code AMC Distributor Id Bulk Client Name Distributor Client Defaults Apply At CIF Level No Scheme Cross Reference Number Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized
144. Campaign Maintenance SCreen icccccccsccecseetteeeeeeenteeteeeeeaas 8 51 8 5 2 Campaign Summary SCIOCN c ccc tet cette eect tennessee tnaeeeeeetaeeeeentnae 8 55 8 6 Admin Tax Maintenance senere raae aea a A a REAREA EAA 8 57 Maintaining Time Zones ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeceeneeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 1 9 1 Time Zone Maintenant cereiisosniriere inen a iiaa e A A 9 1 9 1 1 Fields in Time Zone Maintenance SCree n ccccccceccecsenteeeeeeeentteeeeeeeaas 9 1 9 1 2 Time Zone Maintenance Summary Screen seeeisseeeiseseeeennneeeeennreeeenne 9 2 9 1 3 Retrieving Record in Time Zone Summary Screen 0 2 tect ett eee eeeeteee 9 3 9 1 4 Editing Time Zone Maintenance ccccecccecc ents e cece ete eeceeeeee te aeeteenees 9 4 9 1 5 Viewing Time Zone Maintenance oo ee ceccee cette eee tnteeee eee tnneeeeeetnaeeeeenees 9 4 9 1 6 Deleting Time Zone Maintenance cect eee eee eenteeeeeeetnteeeeeeetnneeeeetees 9 4 9 1 7 Authorizing Time Zone Maintenance 0 cccceceeet tte eeeeeentieeeteeeneeeeeeeenaes 9 5 9 1 8 Amending Time Zone MaintOnance cccccccccceeeeceeenteeeeetetnteeeeettnaeeeeenen 9 5 9 1 9 Authorizing Amended Time Zone Maintenance ccccceeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeee 9 5 9 71 10 Copying AMOU OS reri adidas epae gerade eee 9 5 9 1 11 Database and Web Server Time o ececccccccccccccsteteeeeeeeenteeeeeeetnneeeeeeetneeeeeeeas 9 6 9 2 Maintaining Default Time Zones and Scheduler Changes s
145. Client Related Reports e Fund Bank Account Transfer Report Refer the Reports chapter in Reports User Manual for a full discussion of these reports End of Day Processes The Fund Manager is responsible for running the End of Day EOD activities of the Fund Manager component of the system The Fund Administrator user typically performs EOD activities The Fund Manager is also responsible for those branches that have not completed the activities for the day The EOD activities include e Allocation of transactions of any transaction type e EOD Maintenance e Execute Pre EOD e Execute EOD e Execute BOD e Branch Sign on Sign off e EOD Log Report e Sending Receiving Messages You can also execute and process any authorized interface that has been defined with an external system through the Online Execution of Interfaces option For a full discussion of the End of Day Operations Module refer the End of Day Activities chapter in this User Manual a1 ORACLE 2 3 9 2 3 10 2 3 11 2 3 12 Other Functions Defaults Maintenance In Fund Manager the implementers maintain the system default information that will be used in processing that is specific to your installation You can make changes to this information subsequently if necessary through the Defaults Maintenance function in Fund Manager Query Builder Fund Manager provides a query facility that allows you to extract business information from the system dat
146. Corporate FATCA Classification Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the FATCA Classification from the adjoining option list FATCA Classification Description Display fa ORACLE The system will display the description based on the selected FATCA Classification FATCA Reportable Optional FATCA Reportable gets defaulted from the FATCA document maintenance for the entity selected You can change the value from Yes to No but vice versa is not allowed System defaults FATCA Reportable as No FATCA With holdable Optional FATCA With holdable gets defaulted from the FATCA document maintenance for the entity selected You can change the value from Yes to No but vice versa is not allowed System defaults FATCA With holdable as No FATCA Document List Document Category Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the category of the document from the adjoining option list Document Category Description Display The system displays the document category description based on the selected document category Document Type Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the type of document from the adjoining option list Document Type Description Display The system displays the document type based on the selected document type Mandatory Alphanumeric Mandatory You need to indicate whether the document is mandatory or optional The drop down list displays the following options e Standard This indicates tha
147. Cutoff Detail screen is displayed in Amendment mode 6 Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the association 7 Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing Amended Currency Cutoff Time Details An amended cutoff time for a currency must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is the same as the process of normal authorization prar ORACLE 6 6 5 Copying Attributes of Cutoff Time If you want to maintain the same cut off time for another you can copy the cut off time of an existing currency to a new currency To copy the attributes e Retrieve the currency whose cutoff time the new currency should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy in the Actions list e Indicate the new currency code You can however change the cutoff time for the new record if required ee ORACLE 7 Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act FATCA 7 1 Introduction FATCA is the acronym for Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act enacted by the US Government as part of the Hiring Incentives to Restore Employment HIRE Act in 2010 The purpose of FATCA is to help Internal Revenue Service IRS to identify and collect tax from US Persons USP holding financial assets outside US This ch
148. E 3 38 2 Specifying Condition for the Rule Click Condition Builder to invoke the Condition Builder screen where you can specify the condition to be checked for performance fee calculation Condition Builder Condition Builder Field Name Additional Operator Condition Value Logical Operator Mathematical Operator You can specify the following details in this screen Field Name Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the data element to be used to derive the condition for the rule or select the element Id from the option list provided Logical Operator Mandatory Select the logical operator to be used to derive the condition for the rule from the drop down list provided Mathematical Operator Mandatory Select the mathematical operator to be used to derive the condition for the rule from the drop down list provided You can use the And or Or button to join the conditions if required Click Accept to add to the existing value in the condition and click Clear to clear the condition oie ORACLE 3 38 3 3 38 4 3 39 Specifying Expression for the Rule You can specify the expression to be evaluated to derive the performance fee in the Expression Builder screen Click Expression Builder in Rule Maintenance screen to invoke the Expression Builder screen Expression Builder Expression Builder Field Name Value Expression Mathematical Op
149. Fund Manager When the Fund Manager componentis installed on the workstation you can access it through the browser You must specify the URL of the installation in the Address box in the Internet Explorer Address Bar For instance if the URL of the installation is install fundmanager flexsms emg you must key in this URL in the Address box in the Address Bar in the Internet Explorer You can configure the Internet Explorer to invoke the URL of the Fund Manager installation by default The Login Screen When Fund Manager is successfully invoked in the manner described above the login screen is displayed In the Login screen specify your name and password to login to the system ale ORACLE If you are logging in for the first time specify the password allotted to you by the System Administrator After you have logged in for the first time the system forces you to change your password Whenever you login subsequently you must use this password ORACLE ORACLE FLEXCUBE UNIVERSAL BANKING Login Password Theme Defaut 2 3 13 Fund Manager Menu When you successfully log into the system the Fund Manager Main Menu screen is displayed and the various options are enabled or disabled based on the rights given to you in your user profile 2 3 13 1 Choosing Fund Manager AMC Module You must choose the module of your Fund Manager AMC installation in which you are going to operate in in the AMC Branch field When you c
150. If First Load to be Computed is Management Fee then while calculating Trailer Fee system reduces the AUM by the Management Fee accrual amount and calculate Trailer Fee accrual Load Details Section Processing Frequency Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the frequency at which the load that represents the trailing fee must be computed in the system The system will then automatically compute the trailing commission as part of End of Day Processing based on this frequency and a report will be generated By default for daily accrual frequencies the monthly accrual frequency is set for other accrual frequencies the processing frequency is deemed to be the same as the accrual frequency The default option can be changed If so the processing frequency specified must always be greater than the accrual frequency The following frequencies are possible e Monthly e Quarterly e Half yearly e Yearly Accrual Frequency Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the frequency at which the fee must be accrued in the System Any of the following frequencies can be set e Daily e Monthly e Quarterly e Half yearly e Yearly No of Decimals 1 Character Maximum Numeric Mandatory Specify the number of decimals for the periodic load Typically this must be equal to the number of decimals designated for the currency of payment Trailer commissions are typically paid in the base currency of the fund Next Date to Process Date Mandatory Wh
151. Interest Rate Details You can perform the following operations on an interest rate record alee ORACLE New an unauthorized record will be created If you have rights for auto Authorization the record will be authorized Modify an unauthorized record can be modified by the maker edit rights required Delete an unauthorized record can be deleted by the maker You can not delete the unauthorized record created by amendment delete rights required Authorize an unauthorized record can be authorized by anyone other than the maker authorize rights required Amendment you can also amend a rate record if required 3 35 3 Rate Maintenance Summary Screen You can invoke the Rate Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSRATES in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Rate Maintenance Authorized Open Rate Code lai Currency Code a Advanced Search Reset Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Rate Code Currency Code You can perform the following operations in this screen Viewing a Rate Maintenance record Modifying a Rate Maintenance record Deleting a Rate Maintenance record Authorizing a Rate Maintenance record Amending a Rate Maintenance record 3 35 3 1 Viewing a Rate Maintenance Record To view a record that you have previously input you must retrieve the same in the Rate Maintenance Summa
152. LEXCUBE IS Installed 1 Character Maximum Boolean Mandatory Click in the check box to check if Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing is installed at the Agency Branch Sig ORACLE Signed Off 1 Character Maximum Boolean Display This indicates whether the given Agent has signed off for the day This is not used at setup time but used only for EOD purposes by default when you set up an agent the agent record is set up with the status signed on which means this field has a No value Customer Interface Key Alphanumeric Optional This facility is to be used if customer information from an installation of Oracle FLEXCUBE Corporate FCC is to be imported into the FC IS system using the bulk interface facility for the creation of unit holder accounts The customer interface key determines the level at which unit holder account creation must take place in the FC IS system for a given Customer Information File CIF in Oracle FLEXCUBE Corporate either at CIF level or at a customer account level Accordingly you can indicate either of the following two options e For each CIF a corresponding unit holder may be created in the FC IS system For this option choose CIF from the drop down list in this field e For each CASA Customer Access System Account account in a CIF a corresponding unit holder may be created in the FC IS system For this option choose Account from the drop down list in this field The FC IS sys
153. M in respect of all the funds in the fund group The load computation method Nature of Load for management fee loads can either be Simple Slab or Weighted Average Management fee loads can only be set in the Periodic Load Details screen if the trailer commission computation method is Average Daily Balance and daily accrual frequency Distribution of commission below the level set in Periodic load should be through entity commission sharing For instance if the Periodic load setup is at Agency branch level then for commission distribution to Account Officer and IFA commission sharing should be setup Periodic Load Screen The system facilitates the processing of trailing fees or management fees payable from any entity in the system to another entity This trailing fee is set up in the system as a load in the Loads Maintenance The Periodic Load Setup screen facilitates the mapping of the trailing fee load to a fund and setting up the following details regarding the fee e The period in respect of which the trailing fee is to be computed e The From and To entities in respect of which the trailing fee will be paid out received e The frequency at which the trailing fee is processed Sar ORACLE e The computation method nature of the fee e The event of application or action of the fee e The last processed date and the next date on which the fee must be processed e The number of decimals for the load You can invoke the
154. Maintaining Group Rule Mapping You can define a Group ID and map the default Rule Ids for a given event like Inflow Outflow or Period End in PF Group Maintenance screen ariar ORACLE 3 39 1 You can invoke PF Group Maintenance screen by typing UTDHRGMP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button PF Group Maintenance New 73 Enter Query Group Maintenance Group ID Group Description Group Rule In Flow In Flow Description Out Flow Out Flow Description Period End Period End Description Disallowed Transactions 1of1 Txn Type Ref Type Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in Group Mapping Details Screen Group ID Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify a group Id for mapping the rules or select a group Id from the option list provided Group Description Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify a suitable description for the group Inflow Rule Alphanumeric Optional Specify the default rule to be used for inflows for the given group Id You can also select the rule Id from the option list provided Outflow Rule Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the default rule to be used for outflows for the given group Id You can also select the rule Id from the option list provided Period End Rule Alphanumeric Optional Specify the default rule to be used for period end for the
155. O Subscription Redemption request Enter IPO Subscription Redemption details 4 Edit Yes Edit Dage Edit Delete Reject j No Fusthorize Reject Authorize Yes Change Amend the transaction and authorize the amendment No Allot Confirm units gt Send To Registrar Transfer Transactions The system validates the details that were entered against the fund rules and issues an acknowledgment slip to the unit holder for a transfer transaction The fund manager allocates the transfer based on the NAV declared for the fund for that day or any other transfer price After the allocation the agency branch can print the confirmation rejection note The allocation information is then used to update the transferee and transferor If the fund is scrip based the certificate related information is also captured either from the fund or the unit holder based on the fund rule definition Block Lien Processing Transactions The system validates the details that were entered against the fund rules and issues an acknowledgment slip to the unit holder for a block transaction The fund manager allocates the block based on the NAV declared for the fund for that day or on any special block prices that could be derived through any specific formula All the other activities are the same as those followed for any of the transaction types The scrip based funds are also handled in the same manner as for the oth
156. PAYS seistsssarsendsdets 3 70 UTDAUTRE o ceeeeeeeeee 3 92 UTDPARAM ccccccceceeee 4 9 UTDBLCBD eeeeee 5 24 WTDPAY GP cnicana 8 23 UTDBLCBR nosis 5 23 UTDPERLM se iscssciesscensindnis 8 28 UTDBLKPFR ou eee 5 14 UTDRATES siiclssnastcests 3 123 UTDBLKPT 00 5 23 UTDRDRPM onns 4 22 UTDBLKRC nosicie 5 17 UTDSORCE siscasisinsstssancaes 6 12 UTDBLKS aiiin 5 18 UTDSWPRV sci sciirantieusitnaas 3 71 UTDBLKUH ceeee 5 21 WT TCA saiititietiaidcteasincinn 8 44 UTDBLTLO ou eee 5 20 UTDTOPP sissid 8 44 UTDBLTXN oooi 5 19 UTD TG BEE siiani 8 45 UTDBLUHD oo 5 25 UTDTIMEZ wow 9 1 UTDBRIDS e eee 3 25 UTDTSOFF ssop atu 3 63 UTDODPP aiic 5 16 UTDWHTAX sistaseian harass 3 52 UTDCDIDS tricsinerenenene 5 16 UTSAGY BN onasini 3 88 UTDCMPMN ooo 8 51 UTSASSSD uu 3 77 UTDCONCU ou eee 6 8 UTSAUTRE sci lecsedicctnens 3 94 UTDCONPF a 3 97 UTSBRIDS wow 3 36 UTDCURCT 0 6 23 UTSCMPMN cccceeees 8 55 UTDCURMA ociosos 6 1 UTS CONC sii tacts itnanaantaieas 6 9 UTDDEFMT eeeeeeeeeeee 4 2 UTSCOMPF ee 3 98 UTDDMAP ou cece 4 17 UTSCURCT snidccendunnn 6 25 UTDDVCOM o 4 19 UTSCURMA oaoiiaaiiiai 6 5 UTDENMAP e eee 4 15 UTSENMNT sissaisaiansiaasiuns 3 132 UTDENMNT ee eee 3 130 UTSENTMN onaniaa 3 49 5 26 UTDENTCO ou 8 50 UTSENTPY sictadeccrentecniina 3 41 UTDENTMN coiii 3 6 5 9 UTSEXCRM eeeeseeeeeee 6 21 UTDENTPY o 3 39 UTSFATDT uuu 7 5 UTDEUMAP eeeeeeeeeee 4 18 UTSFATMT
157. Periodic Load Maintenance Detail by typing UTDPERLM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the periodic load details Periodic Load Maintenance Detail X E new E Enter query Reference Number Periodic Load Maintenance FundiProductGroup Fund Rule Effective From Date Product ID Group ID ISIN Code Refresh Load Load ID From Entity Type To Entity Type Nature of Load Action For Load Management Fee Load ID Intermediary Last Processed Date Load Details Processing Frequency No of Decimals Round OfffTruncate Round Off Payment Lag Frequency Accrual Frequency Last Accrual Date Next Accrual Date FDAP income No Input by Authorized by Fund ID Rule Effective To Date Product Description Group Description Fund Name Load Description From Entity Type Description To Entity Type Description Nature of Load Description Action Name Load Description Intermediary Details Processing Frequency Description Next Date To Process Minimum Holding Period Payment Lag Frequency Description Accrual Frequency Description Last Accrual Application Date Payment Lag First Load To Be Computed Netted AUM For Second Load DateTime DateTime Trailer Commission No Mod No Open Authorized
158. Price Basis defined for the transaction is considered as an inherent fee or incentive during allocation For instance if the Price Basis for a transaction is Offer Price and Transaction Base Price is 1 009 and the Offer Price is 1 060 the difference 1 06 1 009 0 051 without currency rounding is considered as the inherent fee since the TBP is less than the offer price If the s9 ORACLE offer price were less than the TBP the difference between the two is considered an inherent incentive ROA Threshold for Initial Fee Optional Specify a threshold for initial fees for ROA based loads The system compares the value specified with the cumulative AUM of the client to determine what a client should be charged by way of initial fees If the cumulative AUM exceeds the threshold value maintained the system considers the Cumulative AUM for load slab pick up basis If the cumulative AUM is lower than the Threshold value maintained the system considers the transaction value for load slab pick up basis Slab Mode Section Mode Mandatory Indicate the parameter upon which basis the slabs for the load will be defined A load can be defined based on e Date e Period e Amount e Units e Date and Amount e Period and Amount e Date and Units e Period and Units Period Basis 1 Character Maximum Alphabetic Mandatory Indicate the basis upon which the period specified for period based loads must be interpreted
159. Quotation Units for Reference Default Fluctuation Allowed Currency Pair Currency Details 1of1 _ Pair Currency Quotation Mode Fluctuation Allowed Quotation Units Currency Disabled Diret No gt Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized 6 4 1 Checks Before you maintain an exchange rate source in this screen it is desirable to ensure that the currencies must be set up in the system in the Currency Maintenance ose ORACLE 6 4 2 6 4 2 1 6 4 2 2 6 4 2 3 6 4 3 Fields in Source Currency Pair Maintenance Screen Source Information Section Source ID 6 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify a unique identification for the Source that is to be maintained Source Name 60 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the name of the Source that is to be maintained Source Reference Currency Details Section Source Reference Currency Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the currency that is to be designated as the reference currency for this source This is the currency in which the rates are to be maintained for the other currencies An In Currency can be designated as the Reference Currency for a Source only if the validity period transition period for the currency has not commenced At that point when the validity period commences exchange rates can no longer be captured for this Source The Reference Cur
160. RED_PRICE Redemption price etc Derived you can define your own set of elements to use while building the performance fee formula Some of the derived elements like APFPS CL_FACTOR RED_AMT SUB_AMT RED_UNITS SUB_UNITS and PF_VAL are also factory shipped You can capture the details related to derived data elements in Element Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDENMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Element Maintenance Detail New 7 Enter Query Element ID Element Description Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized aN ORACLE 3 37 1 Fields in Element Maintenance Screen Element ID Alphanumeric Mandatory Element Description Specify a unique code to identify the data element Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify a suitable description for the element In this screen you can also modify an existing derived data element The tables given below list the factory shipped non derived and derived data elements Non derived Factory Shipped Element Id Element Description HWM Latest High Water Mark HWM_RED High Water Mark at time of redemption HWM_SUB High Water Mark at time of subscription HWMHR_RED High Water Mark Hurdle Rate at time of redemption HWMHR_SUB High Water Mark Hurdle Rate at time of subscription HWMHR_LAT Late
161. Reference Information User Guide Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing Release 12 0 4 0 0 Part Number E57474 01 September 2014 ORACLE Table of Contents About this Manual secccccispccss cis casera ace ccen cee cts ease anaona een ceessce ce eetemeeece ened 1 1 TIS MMtrOCUCtHON eecise ces ceases A teeaeteatidecdstuesh ee Paeatheaae sige Saree isin aaa 1 1 1 2 Related Documents ccc ccccceeeeeeceeceeedhcceeeeddenecedeessdheneedessunsceeeseddheeseeeddhecteetennees 1 1 WS AAUGIONCO gs ae Yada oh eis edad te inl nara ith boo inter eat ahi rad ited lets 1 1 Ttk SOrGaniZatlony aA deviates celts E oe dean ty EA tea eee eee 1 1 1 5 Conventions used in this MANUal eee A REE E EARE EEE RER 1 2 1 5 1 General CONVONTONS sessir e aera Ea aa a i aaua aA 1 2 1 5 2 Keyboard COnventiOns ccccccccceecteee cee enneee ian ini iE EE ANRE E 1 2 a E E EAEE E E A ca cada ede EA A E E E 1 2 1 7 Abbreviations and ACronys cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaaeeeseeeneeeeeneeaes 1 2 TS Getting Helpisiascstic inten E T E T in ett 1 3 ON SIMON coca aed annona au re a aooaa Raae ae a eaaa aAa Aa a Aaa SpE Sirei eae iaaeaie aaie 2 1 24 Introduction sienen EAA ANA EVEA EEEN E Eai aiat 2 1 2 1 1 Changing your P SSWOIT s iseiberiremir inn a a a e aiaa 2 1 2 1 2 Performing Record Maintenance Operations ccccecceceenseeeeeeenteeteeeeeaes 2 1 22 SPUC ae A O E E EACEA 2 6 29 Fond Monggo era a T E A sotltgepesaa l
162. Specify Share Class ID optional in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to amend The Switch Privilege Setup screen is displayed in Amendment mode e Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the setup e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing Amended Switch Privilege Setups An amended switch privilege setup must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is subsequently the same as that for normal transactions Copying the Attributes If you want to create a switch privilege having the same attributes of an existing setup you can copy the attributes of an existing setup to a new setup To copy the attributes e Retrieve the entity whose attributes the new entity should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy in the Actions list e Indicate the ID for the new Entity You can however change the details of the entity if required as ORACLE 3 25 3 3 25 4 Period Definition for Allowing Automatic Switch You can define a period for allowing switch transactions between share classes in th
163. Specify the lower and upper amount or units boundaries for each slab in the From Amount and To Amount fields or the From Units and To Units fields as applicable e Specify the applicable return value for each slab in the Return Value field e Specify the floor and ceiling values if any e Save your specifications on ORACLE Slab Sequence No System Generated This number is generated by the system for each slab in the order of entry of the slab details The sequence number begins with 1 You can set up multiple slabs for every load From Date Date Format Mandatory only for date based loads For date based loads i e the slab mode you selected for the load in the main Load Definition screen is either Date Date and Amount or Date and Units specify the date on and following which the slab is applicable Any transaction date higher than this date is reckoned as part of the slab If you have designated the lower boundary as inclusive the load by checking the Consider as Lower Boundary check box in the main Load Definition screen then any transaction date that is equal to the date you specified here is also reckoned as part of the slab To Date Date Format Optional For date based loads i e the slab mode you selected for the load in the main Load Definition screen is either Date Date and Amount or Date and Units specify the date up to which the slab is applicable Specifying the To Date is optional If not specified th
164. Summary Screen Navigation Summary screens display details related to a specific query based on the selected criteria available in the screen Navigation through these criteria can be handled through keyboard keys 10 6 ORACLE Tab Key e From any element of the header key to move focus to the first element of the first row of the result block e If the result block is empty then moves focus to the exit button e From any element of any row to shift focus to the exit button Shift Tab Key e To move focus to the previous enabled field e To move the focus to the first element of the result block header Arrow Keys e To navigate through header of the result block e To navigate between the elements of the rows in the result block Shortcut Keys To avoid focusing on navigation buttons the following shortcut keys are available e First page Home e Previous page Page Up e Next Page Page Down e Last Page End 10 4 2 1 Advance Search Navigation Advance search navigation involves navigating through Query criteria and Other Fields listed in the window Tab Key e To navigate between other fields listed in the window Arrow Keys 10 7 ORACLE 11 Function ID Glossary U UTDKYCMT ou eee 3 103 UTDADINE oooi 4 11 UTDKYCRE catciaccnisteies 3 108 UTDADTAX oiiaaie 8 58 UTDLNGSU isiccedancnsinsenties 3 102 UTDAGYBN eceee eee 3 85 UTDLOADM onssas 8 7 UTDASSSD scsisvssitiietevohanies 3 76 UTDM
165. Summary or Detail screen in the View mode Deleting Records Only unauthorized records can be deleted from the system When you delete a record it is physically deleted from the database and you cannot retrieve such a record again under any circumstances To delete a record from the Summary screen follow the steps given below You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered 1 Invoke the Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion 3 Specify any or all of the details and click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 4 Double click the record that you want to delete The Detail screen is displayed 5 Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database To delete a record from the Detail screen follow the steps given below Click Search button to view the records from the Detail screen All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 1 Press F7 2 Input the Identification Number 3 Press F8 You can perform Delete operation by selecting from the Action list The system will not allow more than one user to edit or delete a record simultaneously Saving Recor
166. The process of authorization is the same as the process of normal authorization 6 4 Maintaining Exchange Rate Sources All sources that will be used to derive prevailing exchange rates between any two currencies must be identified in the system with a unique identification and a profile You can maintain these sources through the Source Currency Pair Maintenance Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDSORCE in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button The profile for each source will consist of the following details e The unique ID and the name of the source e The reference currency associated with this source against which exchange rates for all other currencies will be derived e The default fluctuation percentage that is admissible for this source Exchange Rates derived from this source can be overridden only within this percentage range e Units of quotation for the source reference currency which will be used for the direct rates e The pair currencies for which the exchange rates will be captured against the reference currency This setup can be maintained in the Pair Currencies section of the Source Maintenance screen and is discussed later on in this chapter Source Currency Pair Maintenance Detail New 4 Enter Query Source Information Source ID Source Name Source Reference Currency Details Source Reference Currency
167. UH Duplicates Yes Source ID Da Country Code Client Code FPAM Installed No FPAM User Name Tax Year Start Tax Year End Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Open Authorized Authorized In this screen press F7 F8 to query the data You need to unlock and then modify the data if required Fields in Defaults Maintenance Screen Company Details Section Company Name 60 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter the full name of the Company that is using Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing The system will print this as the company name in all the reports Company Short Name 10 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter the short name of the Company that is using Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing Distributor Defaults Section In this section define the default information applicable for the AMC in any maintenance operation in the system Distributor ID 6 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter the ID of the default distributor for the installation 2 ORACLE Registrar ID 6 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter the ID of the default Registrar for the installation Nationality 15 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter the default Nationality of the unit holder Country 20 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter the default Country of the unit holder Minor Age Numeric Mandatory Enter the default age limit f
168. UTDTGBFE in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button The screen is displayed below Target Based Fee New 5 Enter Query AMC ID Reference Number Load ID Load Description Fund ID Fund Name Broker ID Broker Name Processs Date Processed No Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in Target Based Fee Screen AMC Specify the AMC You can also select the AMC for target based fee from the adjacent option list The list displays all the valid authorized values maintained in the system You can select ALL option if you want to select all the valid AMC maintained in the system Load ID Specify the Load You can also select the load from the adjacent option list The authorized loads having the Slab Mode option selected as Date Amount will be displayed in the option list Load Description The description of the selected load is displayed Fund ID Specify the fund You can also select the fund from the adjacent option list The list displays all the valid authorized values maintained in the system You can select ALL option if you want to select all the valid funds maintained in the system eae ORACLE 8 3 Fund name The description of the selected fund is displayed Broker ID Specify the broker ID You can also select the broker from the adjacent option list The list
169. Unit Holder AMC Trailer Fee Case 1 Load From Entity To Entity T1 AMC Unit Holder However the fee configurations are expected to be handled operationally by the business Hence for UK domiciled broker when the transaction category is Advised Business you should not map any load which will have To Entity as Broker Agent Agency Branch Account Officer IFA Appropriate transaction categories will be mapped to enable system to skip transactions where the transaction category is Advised business for trailer commissions when the To Entity is mapped as Broker Agent Agency Branch Account Officer IFA In case of Agent Agency Branch AO IFA hierarchy the system will compute Trailer commission based on the transaction category mapped for the hierarchy If the trailer commission computed for the hierarchy does not include Advised Business transactions then commission shared among other entities in the hierarchy below the entity for which trailer commission has been computed will also not include the commission eligible due to Advised Business Post RDR the system will setup the payment of front end fees based on load ref type In fund load mapping group load mapping and product load mapping screen you can map the appropriate load ref type for applying desired fee rate 28 ORACLE 5 1 5 2 5 Importing Bulk Client Information Introduction The AMC may need to import information relating
170. When you are defining valid values for a new information head this section is blank and all the fields are enabled The information maintained for each value is as follows e The identification for the valid value in the Valid Value Code field e The text or label representing the value in the Valid Value Description field e Whether the value is to be shown as default in the drop down list for this information head in any maintenance screen in the system This is shown in the Default field Adding a value to the list The Add link is available at the bottom of the list to enable any additions to the list To adda value click the Add link A new row is inserted at the bottom of the list For each value you add in this manner you must specify the following information as mandatory e A unique identifier for the value in the Valid Value Code field e The text or label representing the value in the Valid Value Description field e Whether the value is to be shown as default in the drop down list for this information head in any maintenance screen in the system This is shown in the Default field Click Ok button Your changes are saved the List of Values screen is closed and you are returned to the main Additional Information Maintenance screen Specifying RPO Code for Account Status as Additional Information Head When you set up a unit holder account in the system you can capture the RPO Code that would be used for tra
171. Y Bank Branch Record 3 88 om Em Account Number Account Hi ORACLE 3 27 2 1 3 27 2 2 e Viewing an AGY Bank Branch Record e Deleting an AGY Bank Branch Record e Authorizing an AGY Bank Branch Record e Amending an AGY Bank Branch Record e Authorizing an amended AGY Bank Branch Record e Copying the Attributes Retrieving an AGY Bank Branch Record You can retrieve a previously entered record in the Summary Screen as follows e Invoke the AGY Bank A C Mapping Summary screen e The status of the record in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved e The status of the record in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all records are retrieved e Module ID e Bank e Branch e Branch Code e Bank Code e Account Number e Transaction Type Click Search to view the records All the records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen You can also retrieve the individual record detail from the detail screen by querying in the following manner e Press F7 e Input the Module ID Bank Branch Account Number e Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operations by selecting the operation from the Action list You can also search a record by using a combination of and alphanumeric value Editing an AGY Bank Branch Record You can modify
172. YGP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click the adjoining arrow The screen is displayed below Payment Group Maintenance New 5 Enter Query Payment Group Code Payment Group Description Entity Details 1of1 Entity Type Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized In this screen you can maintain the following details Payment Group Code Mandatory Specify the code to identify the payment group Payment Group Description Optional Specify the description of the payment group Entity Information Section Entity Type Mandatory Specify the type of entity You can also select the entity type from the option list provided The list consists of all the valid and authorized entities type You can also link multiple entities of same type to the payment group However if a entity is already mapped to a payment group then you cannot map it again to a different payment group Entity ID Mandatory Specify the type of entity ID You can also select the ID from the option list provided The list consists of all the valid and authorized entities iay ORACLE Entity Name Display Base on the ID selected the name of the entity is displayed 8 1 14 2 Bank Details Section Click the Bank Details tab to specify the bank details for the payment group Payment Group Maintenance New 5 Enter Query Payment Group
173. a change to any of the clearing options you can retrieve the record in this screen by clicking on Ok button in this screen All the clearing options maintained for each of the modes of payment are displayed in the lower portion of the screen SDa ORACLE 3 24 1 You can invoke the Mode Of Payment Detail screen by typing UTDMPAYS in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Mode Of Payment Detail New 753 Enter Query Payment Mode Minimum Clearing Period Payment Mode Description Maximum Clearing Period Sub Payment Mode Auto Clearing Process Yes v Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in Mode of Payment Details Screen Payment Mode Display Only The system displays the different modes of payment The different modes of payments can be Cash Demand Draft and Money Transfer and so forth Payment Mode Description Display Only A description of the mode of payment is displayed here This could be any of the instruments such as Draft Check Transfer Credit Card etc Sub Payment Mode Display Only The code or short name given to any of the payment modes used in the system is displayed here Minimum Clearing Period Numeric Display Can be altered Specify the number of days after which you will be able to clear the payment instrument for a particular mode of payment You can alter the valu
174. ab Key e To move the focus to the first drop down menu Shift Tab Key e To move the focus to the selected side bar menu header Arrow Keys e To navigate between the action keys that are enabled 10 3 3 2 Drop down Menu You can navigate through drop down menus using keyboard Tab Key e To move the focus to the fast path Shift Tab Key e To move the focus to the first action key in the toolbar that is enabled Note If the action keys are hidden then it moves the focus to the last side bar menu 10 3 ORACLE 10 4 10 4 1 10 4 1 1 10 4 1 2 Arrow Keys e To navigate between the drop down menus e To navigate between the items of the selected drop down menu Esc e To close the drop down menu Custom Window Keyboard Compatibility Oracle FLEXCUBE provides keyboard compatibility to navigate through Detailed and Summary screens Detail Screen Navigation Detail screens contain Tabs and Buttons Clicking them opens a sub screen Hence navigation in these screens is handled in different stages Generic Navigation Generic navigation involves navigating through the general fields available Tab Key e To navigate through the fields e To move the focus from the first field to the next Shift Tab Key e To move the focus to the previous fields Shortcut keys e To navigate through LOV Calendar Pop up editor buttons Tabs Navigation Tabs navigation involves navigating through t
175. ab for load L4M above and the load applied will be 4 of the transaction amount Load 4 100 3000 120 Here again if the aging policy is FIFO only 2000 units would be aged and the load would be 4 100 2000 80 Therefore the total load amount applied for the redemption transaction T3 is 90 120 210 If the aging policy is FIFO the total load amount would be 30 80 110 F9 ORACLE Note Both the loads applied as shown in the example above are based on periods and also on the original subscription transaction s that have generated the units being redeemed in a subsequent redemption transaction These loads have no other basis than these two factors Since they are based on the period for which the unit holder has continued with the fund they are known as aging loads Loading based on aging date Ageing for period based loads is calculated based on the ageing date specified at the time of setting up a fund It can be the dealing date transaction date or the confirmation date Period is calculated using the following formula Period Transaction Dealing date Price date of the redemption Link transaction date of the corresponding subscription transaction Here the link transaction date of the subscription is the date of inflow for the redemption Setting up Loads in System The Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing system provides the facility of setting up the pattern according to which you can process
176. abase by constructing simple query statements called the Query Builder Conventions to be Followed in Screens e The words screen and form noun are used interchangeably throughout the entire document They refer to the active interface presented to the user for the purpose of data entry operations throughout the system e Inthe screens all checkboxes can accept only two valid entries Yes or No If the user checks a checkbox a cross mark or a tick mark appears in the box indicating to the system that the value specified is a Yes If the box is not checked and is empty the value indicated to the system is a No For example if the On line Allocation checkbox has a cross mark or a tick mark in it it indicates to the system that on line allocation is to be allowed If the box is empty it indicates to the system that on line allocation is not to be allowed Entering Dates The user is advised to check all dates that he has specified in any of the forms before executing a Save operation Before You Login Before you attempt to log in to Fund Manager ensure that all the following activities have been performed e The user profile has to be defined by the system administrator for all the users of the back office e The Defaults required for Fund Manager namely the default language currency and so on must already have been defined Logging in to Fund Manager Invoking
177. ad Maintenance Summary Authorized Open X Load ID a3 Load Type X Advanced Search Reset Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open LoadID LoadType Load Description Amount Or Percentage Load Calculation Method Ut 8 1 11 1 Retrieving Load To retrieve a previously entered load e Invoke the Load Maintenance Summary screen and specify the following The authorization status of the load maintenance records in the Authorizedfield If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the load maintenance records in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The Load ID Load Type e Click Search button after you have specified the required details All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve an individual Load ID from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value Example ee ORACLE You can search the record for Load ID Description code by using the combination of and alphanumeric value Search Load Description by C The sys
178. ad is authorized you can designate that it must be applicable either to a single fund or a group of funds a load group You can indicate this mapping in the Fund Load Setup screen for a single fund or the Group Load Mapping screen for a load group An unauthorized load must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a load e Invoke the Load Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the load that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list e Specify any or all search parameters of the load for retrieving the records e Click Search button All loads with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the load that you wish to authorize The Load Maintenance Detail screen displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes a load details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the load during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the load 8 1 11 6 Amending Loads After a load is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to an after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation If a load is attached to a fund then the system wil
179. ailing fee is defined as the commission or incentive that is paid normally by the fund to unit holders brokers agents agency branches account officer or IFA for the continued loyalty of the unit holders to the fund Here the term loyalty refers to the fact that unit holders who are allocated units hold them for a certain minimum period of time which in turn results in the fund manager being able to project cash flows and investments with a greater degree of accuracy The fee is calculated based on the holdings of the investor using any of the following methods e Quarterly Average Holding e Average Holdings e Average Units e Latest Balance A minimum period can also be set for which the balances must be held before a trailing fee can be applied FCIS provides the facility to compute trailer commission at any level i e Agent Agency Branch Account officer or IFA The commission sharing will be applicable below the level at which trailer commission is computed For instance if trailer commission is computed at Agency branch level commission sharing on flat percentage will be applicable to all levels below agency branch eee ORACLE 8 1 14 8 1 14 1 Maintaining Payment Groups To support different trailing fee rate across the different groups you can maintain payment groups for the unit holder agent agency branch separately using Payment Group Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDPA
180. ails of a fund type that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Fund Type Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the fund type that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorization Status field You can only modify records of fund types that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the details of the fund type in the corresponding fields on the screen to retrieve the fund type that is to be modified Click Search button All unauthorized fund types with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the fund type that you want to modify The Fund Type Maintenance screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Fund Type Maintenance screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Fund Type Summary screen 3 3 2 3 Viewing Fund Type To view a fund type that you have previously entered Invoke the Summary Screen from the Browser Select the status of the fund type that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all fund types that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Sp
181. aintenance in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the Bulk Clients Maintenance record that you wish to authorize The FCIS Bulk Client Defaults Maintenance screen displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes an bulk client record details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the record during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the bulk client record Amending Bulk Client Records After a bulk client is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to a bulk client record after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation Invoke the Bulk Client Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the bulk client records that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of bulk clients that are authorized Specify any or all of the search parameters Click Search button All bulk client records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the bulk client record that you want to amend The FCIS Bulk Client Maintenance screen is displayed in Amendment mod
182. also captured either from the fund or the unit holder based on the fund rule definition In the system split transactions are supported only for scrip based funds Accept IPO Subscription Redemption request Enter IPO Subscription Redemption detals Edit Yes Edit Dage Edit Delete Reject j N Authorize Reject Authorize Allot Confirm units _ Send To Registrar 2 4 6 10 Reissue Transactions 2 4 7 The system validates the details entered against the scrip based fund rules and issues an acknowledgment slip to the unit holder for the reissue transaction The fund manager allocates the reissue based on the NAV declared for the scrip based fund for that day After the allocation the agency branch can print the confirmation rejection note The certificate related information is also captured either from the fund or the unit holder based on the fund rule definition In the system reissue transactions are supported only for scrip based funds Security and Control The Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing system provides application level security features that will prevent unauthorized users from accessing the system For a detailed discussion of the Security Management System of Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing refer Ensuring Security Typically the business user roles associated with the Agency Branch component of the system are the following e Teller This role is responsible for accept
183. also differ accordingly Hence the performance fee calculations are carried out using a special accounting methodology called equalization accounting which ensures that the fund manager is paid the correct performance fee and also that the fees are fairly allocated between each investor in the fund The investors also receive profit only for the period during which they stay invested in the fund Hedge funds can be of any of the following types or structures Simple Asimple hedge fund is a regular fund with normal processing rules These funds usually have monthly dealing frequency and valuation points Performance fee is generally accrued on monthly basis and paid out on yearly basis Master Feeder A master feeder fund structure is set up to accept assets from both foreign and domestic investors in the most tax and trading efficient manner possible A traditional setup consists of a master fund company into which different feeder funds invest The transactions of feeder funds will be fed into master fund either on net or non netted basis Fund of Funds A fund of hedge fund invests in hedge funds rather than investing in individual securities Performance fee will be collected at two levels one for the underlying hedge funds and the other for the fund of funds Net asset value also is calculated separately for the underlying funds and the fund of funds The details related to the minimum and maximum number of investors investing is maintai
184. an delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered Invoke the Group Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Query All records with the specified fields are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to delete in the list of displayed records The Group Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete Operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is physically deleted from the system database 3 39 3 4 Authorizing a Group Maintenance record 3 40 An unauthorized Group Maintenance must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a record Invoke the Group Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the unauthorized option Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Query All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Group Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from the Action List When a
185. an existing restriction you can copy the attributes of an existing KYC Ref Type restriction to a new restriction To copy the attributes 1 Retrieve the KYC Ref Type Restriction record whose attributes the restriction should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter 2 Click on Copy in the Actions list 3 Indicate the parameters for the new KYC Ref Restriction type You can however change the details if required SIP SWP STP Rules FCIS allows you to meet the following requirements related to rules for systematic plans e Multiple frequencies for SIP SWP STP e Min Max SI amount per frequency and automatic cancellation after n failures e Minimum number of SIP SWP STP to be committed per frequency e Validation of holdings for SWP STP setup e Automatic cancellation after last installment in SWP STP The multiple frequencies provided for SI at Fund level are as mentioned below Available values Frequency for each frequency Explanation Weekly A 1 8 15 22 You need to select any 4 dates from 1 to 31 There 2 10 20 28 would be 5 such sets of dates at fund level 36 16 27 While capturing SI you can select any of the sets mae available at the fund level and map it to the 4 7 18 29 unitholder 5 10 15 20 og ORACLE Weekly B Sun Mon Tue At the fund rules level
186. andatory Enter the address of the entity being set up in the system aM ORACLE City 20 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Optional Enter the city where the entity is located You can select the city from the drop down list provided The available options depend on the values defined at the params maintenance If the city is not available in the list you can specify the city in the field provided alongside State 20 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Optional Enter the State where the City is located You can select the state from the drop down list provided The available options depend on the values defined at the params maintenance If the state is not available in the list you can specify the city in the field provided alongside Country Alphanumeric Optional Select the country in which the entity is based from the drop down list If the Address type is SWIFT Address enter the country of the SWIFT address for the entity US State Optional Check this box to indicate that the specified state is a US United States state Zip Code 6 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Optional Enter the Zip Code of the Address of the entity being set up Contact Person 40 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Optional Enter the name of the contact person at the entity s offices Telephone 1 amp 2 15 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Optional Enter the telephone number of the entity who is being set up in the system Fax Number 15 Character M
187. anguage Support Maintenance 1of1 Language Code Language Description 8 Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Open Authorized Authorized Specify the following language support details Language Code Specify the code of the language The adjoining option list displays valid language codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Language Description Display Upon selection of the language code the system displays the description of the specified language code ote ORACLE 3 31 3 31 1 3 31 1 1 KYC AML Maintenance For each jurisdiction segment you need to maintain standard and additional lists of documents to be collected from the investor You may capture transactions however system does not allow you to complete a transaction unless all the KYC requirements for that unit holder are met The lists of such documents vary based on the following parameters e Investor Entity Type Trust Individual Fund etc e Origin of funds the investor s bank account is in a FATF or Non FATF Country Use the KYC Maintenance Detail screen to maintain the standard and additional lists of documents You can invoke this screen by typing UTDKYCMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the
188. ansaction is being captured During handoff of Fund Rule the cut off time is not changed as per the local time but Fund Amendment is allowed from distributor The fund cut off time must be amended manually to reflect the local time by the Distributor This Fund local time is used to arrive into transaction cut off time at the time of transaction capturing from distributor and if the fund local time exceeds the fund cut off time the transaction date is captured as next working date Maintaining Default Time Zones and Scheduler Changes Each Agency Branch is associated with a time zone This time zone is used in case a country has multiple time zones While setting up the job for scheduler you can schedule a job based on the client time This time has to be the web server time for that module The Defaults Maintenance screen allows you to capture the default time zone Refer to the chapter Maintaining System Parameters in this User Manual for further information on the Defaults Maintenance screen 0 ORACLE 10 1 10 2 10 Appendix Introduction Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing is accessibility compliant This chapter deals with the following activities on the screens available in the browser e Minimizing Main Screens explains methods of minimizing screens e Keyboard Compatibility helps you to comfortably navigate using keyboard Minimizing Main Screens You can minimize main screens by clicki
189. ansactions within AMC In this case switch transactions are accepted across fund families so long as both families belong to the same AMC For distributor installations the switching logic will not be applicable Unit Holder Generation Logic Alphanumeric Mandatory if Entity Type is AMC Click on the drop down menu and choose any one of the options available This option enables multiple AMC branches to opt for different unit holder ID generation logic Therefore the UH Generation Logic field will be a valid value from UH generation table for a specific AMC service provider or a distributor e The first option i e AGT amp BRN amp SERIAL amp CHK stands for the Agent Code Branch Code Serial Number and Check Digit e The second option i e SERIAL amp AMC amp CHK stands for the Serial Number AMC ID or Distributor ID and Check Digit e The third option i e SERIAL amp AGT amp CHK stands for the Serial Number Agent Code and Check Digit e The fourth option i e LEADINGZERO amp SERIAL stands for Leading Six Zeros and a running Serial Number e The fifth option i e Unit Holder ID is assigned with User entered Unit Holder Reference Number e The sixth option i e Ctry 1 amp Busi 1 amp FMG DIST 4 amp A Z 1 amp NUM 5 stands for Country Code Business Type AMC ID or Distributor ID a running Serial character and running Serial Number Note The above option is applicable only for service provider installations F
190. apped to the overridden load From Load Description The description of the load is displayed Overridden Load ID Specify the overridden load ID which should override the from load To Load Description The description of the load is displayed Campaign Criteria Section Click Campaign Criteria tab to maintain the criterion for the campaign Campaign Maintenance New 73 Enter Query Campaign Code Campaign Description Campaign Start Date Campaign End Date Fund Mapping Load Mapping iain Investor Category AUM Description AUM Currency Code Communication Mode Currency Description Description Investment Amount Occupation Investment Amount Currency Description Code Staff Related Currency Description Birth Day No of Transactions Re Activated Suspension Accounts Of RSP Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized In this screen you can maintain the following details Investor Category Optional Specify the investor s category You can also select the category from the adjacent option list The list consists of valid investor categories maintained in the system Communication Mode Optional Specify the mode of communication You can also select the mode of communication from the option list provided The list consists of valid communication modes maintained in the system pe ORACLE Occupation Optional Specify the occupation of the investor Staff Related Opt
191. apter deals with Foreign Account Tax Compliance regulation It includes the description about functions that would help FCIS to support FATCA 7 2 FATCA Classification Process Batch to Mendty amp Entities classified as classify entities as pending classification US indicia Yes Doc rovd for entities who are marked pending Classification existing Existing Entity or New Entity UK in system Visit Entity FATCA New Classification Maintenance Ye Post 90 days Batch to mark Pending classification as recactirant Entity marked as Compliant No Follow tor FATCA documents Valid documents not rcvd Entity marked as recalcitrant ia ORACLE System Parameters The below mentioned table describe the system parameters for the related fields z Maximum Field System Parameter Length FATCA Classification FATCACATIND 10 Individual FATCA Classification FATCACATCOR 10 Corporate FATCA Classification FATCACATREASON 10 Reasons FATCA Effective Date FATCAEFFDATE 10 FATCA Individual UH FATCAINDUHLIMIT 10 Reporting FATCA Corporate UH FATCACORPUHLIMIT 10 Reporting FATCA Verification Time FATCAVERTMLIMIT 4 Limit in days FATCA Due Diligence FATCADUEDELIGENCEDATE 10 Date FATCA Country Code FATCACNTRYCD 3 FATCA Amount Limit FATCAAMOUNTLIMIT 10 FATCA WHT Applicable FATCAWHTAPPLICABLE 3 FATCA WHT Effec
192. ar if maintained If fund prices are being uploaded through bulk upload process the fund calendar is used to arrive at the Next Price Date Fund Dividend Maintenance Dividend maintenance for the fund can be done only on working days in the system calendar AMC calendar if maintained and the fund calendar if maintained Also the Freeze Holdings Date and Ex Dividend NAV Date must also be working days for the system AMC if maintained and the fund if maintained Specifying transaction sign off on a working day On a working day for the fund you can signal the end of transaction input on an ad hoc basis if necessary The transaction date of any transaction that is entered after the sign off status has been marked for the day will be defaulted to the next working day according to the fund calendar if maintained or AMC calendar if maintained or the system calendar You can mark the sign off status in the Fund Transaction Sign Off screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDTSOFF in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details Fund Transaction Sign Off i New 5 Enter Query Fund ID Fund Identification Number AMC Fund Calendar Info 1of1 Fund ID Sign Off No In this screen you can specify the Fund ID and Fund Identification Num
193. aranteed Fund record that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows 1 Invoke the Policy Guaranteed Fund Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorization Status field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the unauthorized option 3 Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields to retrieve the record that is to be modified 4 Click Search All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you want to modify in the list of displayed records The Policy Guaranteed Fund Detail screen is displayed 6 Select Unlock Operation from the Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information 7 Click Save to save your changes The Policy Guaranteed Fund Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Policy Guaranteed Fund Summary screen Viewing a Policy Guaranteed Fund Record To view a record that you have previously input you must retrieve the same in the Policy Guaranteed Fund Summary screen as follows 1 Invoke the Policy Guaranteed Fund Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field
194. asis definitions can be built only on Period and Units as parameters pa ORACLE 8 1 10 8 1 10 1 8 1 10 2 8 1 11 Fields in Basis Load Screen Basis Information Load ID 6 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory The ID of the load that you specified in the Load Definition screen for which you are creating a basis definition is displayed here Load Type Display Only The type of the load for which you are creating a basis definition is displayed here from the Load Definition screen Basis Criteria In this section you can set up the criteria that will characterize this basis definition Depending upon whether the basis is reckoned on a number of units or a number of days click the Criteria link and then use the Query Builder to make your specification To do so click the Criteria link The Query Builder is opened The criteria that you set up through the Query Builder must return a single value Once you have saved your specification and closed the Query Builder the SQL statement corresponding to the desired criteria appears in the Criteria box and the tables that have been referred in the execution of the criteria are clicked in the Tables Referred Box Take Current Transaction into Account 1 Character Maximum Boolean Optional Check this box to indicate the basis definition you are making in this record must take any current transactions into account while computing the return values By default thi
195. ate e Dealing Date All transactions with dealing date in trailing commission period and which have non zero holding in the trailer commission period are considered The commission would accrue as of the dealing date Description Alphanumeric Optional Specify description for the specified trailing commission transaction pickup basis Basis for Units Alphanumeric Optional In this field you can indicate whether the trailing commission is to be based on settled units or all units both provisional and settled Price Component Alphanumeric Mandatory if the Price Basis is Component Based If the price basis for periodic load computation is component based then select the fund price component to be utilized for computation from the list The list displays all the components belonging to the type User Entered Include for Netting Optional Select Yes from the adjoining drop down list if you need to net the fees or incentive amount The system defaults the value as No Vat Percentage Numeric Optional Specify a valid percentage you need to apply for the period load commission oe ORACLE 8 1 17 6 8 1 18 Threshold on Ongoing Fee Optional Specify threshold amount for ongoing fees if the load type mapped is ROA load The system compares the value specified with the cumulative AUM of the client to determine the Trailer fees to be charged Trailer Comm Aum Slab Basis Mandatory Specify a vali
196. ate details that you have previously entered 1 2 Invoke the Entity Payment Summary Screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the exchange rate records that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorized field You can also view all the exchange rate records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records Click Search All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view The Entity Payment screen Detail is displayed in view mode Delete an Entity Payment Record You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete an exchange rate record 1 2 3 4 Invoke the Entity Payment Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the search parameters in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the currency record that you want to delete The Entity Payment Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database Authorizing an Entity Pa
197. ateTime Mod No Open Authorized For import of unit holder accounts you must maintain Client Defaults e Title e Sex e Marital status e Resident status e Investor type e Country e Occupation e Corporation e Language e Nationality e Individual category e Corporate category e Whether introducer broker must be defaulted e Whether a system generated reference number is indicated e Redemption mode of payment e Account type e Account operation type 321 ORACLE e Identification type e Account statement frequency e Introducer broker e Base currency e Bank account currency e Account statement currency e Template ID 5 9 1 13 Choosing Template for Automatic Replication Modifications made to a unit holder account under a CIF through an Information Change operation might require to be replicated to all unit holder accounts under the CIF Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing provides the facility of configuring the system so that automatic replication could be achieved through automatic replication templates For each bulk client you can define the template to be used for automatic replication as part of the client default information The automatic replication template you select here is used for replication of changes made to a unit holder account through Information Change to all unit holder accounts belonging to the CIF How the template is used Any changes that have been made through Information C
198. ated Bulk Client as online interface from the adjoining drop down list if you have maintained Entity Type as Bulk Client This field is not applicable for other entity types Module Agent Type Alphanumeric Optional Select the type of the Module that is being set up Module Agent Desc Display Only The system displays description for the specified agent type Nature of Business Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the business avenues supported by the AMC by selecting the desired option from the drop down list This option is only available for entities where the entity type is AMC Finware Posting Choose Yes if you wish to allow FINWARE posting ISA Reference Number Alphanumeric 5 Characters Optional Specify ISA reference number aM ORACLE Min ISA Transfer In Alphanumeric 8 Characters Optional Specify the minimum ISA that is validated during the transfer in Min ISA Transfer Out Alphanumeric 8 Characters Optional Specify the minimum ISA that is validated during the transfer out Switching Logic Alphanumeric Mandatory if Entity Type is AMC Select the type of logic to be enforced by the AMC in accepting switch transactions There are two possible approaches provided by the system e Switch transactions restricted to fund family In this case switch transactions will be accepted only if the From and To funds are part of the same fund family Cross fund family switching is not allowed e Switch tr
199. aximum Alphanumeric Optional Enter the fax number of the entity who is being set up in the system E Mail 50 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Optional Specify the Email address of the entity being set up Contact Person 40 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Optional Enter the name of the contact person at the entity s offices Cell Phone Number 16 Characters Maximum Numeric Optional Specify the cell phone number of the entity being set up Effective From Date Date Format Optional This is applicable if the Address Type is Alternate Address a ORACLE 3 4 1 2 Specify the date that marks the beginning of the period for which the specified alternate address is in effect Effective To Date Date Format Optional This is applicable if the Address Type is Alternate Address Specify the date that marks the end of the period for which the specified alternate address is in effect BIC Code 12 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the Bank Identifier Code BIC of the entity Maintaining Bank Details for Entities You can capture details of bank accounts held by the entity with multiple accounts in foreign currencies if required These are the settlement details that would be used for settlement of payment to the entities You must designate one default account for each currency which would be deemed to be the default settlement account in the selected currency for the entities Bank details can be capt
200. ay Maintenance Detail screen you must have another user authorize the list Before the holiday list is authorized you can edit itas many times as necessary You can also delete a holiday list before it is authorized After authorization you can make changes to the holiday list through an amendment The Holiday Maintenance Summary screen can be used for the following operations on holiday lists e Retrieval for viewing e Editing an unauthorized list e Deleting an unauthorized list e Authorizing a list e Amending an authorized list You can invoke the Holiday Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSHOLID in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Holiday Maintenance Summary Authorized Open Year az Calendar Type Entity ID a Advanced Search Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Year Calendar Type Entity ID Retrieving Holiday List You can retrieve a previously entered holiday in the Summary screen as follows e Invoke the Holiday Maintenance Summary screen and specify the following TOR ORACLE 3 23 1 2 The status of the record in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the entity in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved Year Calendar Ty
201. bank in which the account is held Branch 60 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory From the list select the name of the branch of the bank in which the account is held Account Type Alphanumeric Mandatory From the list select the nature of the account held by the entity The list provides all account types that have been set up in the Account Type Maintenance records Account Number 15 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the number of the account held by the entity in the selected bank Swift Format Indicate one of the following swift formats from the drop down list e MT103 e MtT102 Beneficiary Enter the beneficiary Details Beneficiary Address1 Specify the first line of beneficiary address Beneficiary Address2 Specify the second line of beneficiary address Beneficiary Address3 Specify the third line of beneficiary address Beneficiary IBAN Specify the beneficiary IBAN Intermediary Specify the intermediary Intermediary Add 1 Specify the first line of beneficiary intermediary Intermediary Add 2 Specify the second line of beneficiary intermediary Intermediary Add 3 Specify the third line of beneficiary intermediary Intermediary IBAN Specify the intermediary IBAN Further Credit Name Specify the further credit name oe ORACLE Reference 1 Enter the first reference Default Use this check box to identify the bank account that is to be reckoned as the default bank account for the e
202. bearing the latest number is deemed to be the latest rate that will be effective Note The system will allow input in the FX Deal Date and FX Value Date fields only if the client country parameter FORWARD_FX_RATE is set to true If this parameter is set to false then the system will allow only the application date as valid values in both these fields Reference Currency 3 Character Maximum Optional Select the currency that is to be designated as the reference currency for this source This is the currency in which the rates are to be maintained for the other currencies Pair Currency 3 Character Maximum Optional Select the currency that must be set up as a pair currency for the source Buy Rate Numeric Mandatory Specify the buy rate for the pair currency Sell Rate Numeric Mandatory Specify the sell rate for the pair currency This rate must always be greater than zero and greater than the buy rate Mode of Quotation Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the mode of quotation that will be used to derive the exchange rate for this currency pair It could be a direct or an indirect quote ey ORACLE 6 5 3 Units of Quotation Numeric Mandatory Specify the units of quotation that must be used in direct rates for this currency pair This is defaulted to the units specified in the Source Maintenance record for this source If the mode of quotation specified for the pair is direct then the default value
203. ber of the fund for which you are marking the transaction sign off on the current application date You can also specify the AMC to which the fund belongs Trading Transactions Trading transactions can only be entered on working days for the fund in the fund calendar if maintained or AMC calendar if maintained or system calendar Transactions The transaction date date of entry is defaulted to the application date The transaction date is defaulted to next working day for the fund if it falls on a holiday or if the transaction is entered after marking of transaction sign off for the day or after cut off time The transaction date for switch transactions is arrived at by considering the fund calendar if Spa ORACLE any maintained for the switch from fund the date must be a working day for the switch from fund but need not be so for the switch to fund The backdating limit for backdated transactions is derived from the fund calendar Dates for instrument clearing are also based on the fund calendar Settlement Dates The settlement dates for payments must not be holidays for the settlement currency as designated in the currency calendar During transaction entry the payment date or clearing date for a subscription is computed based on the transaction date and payment lag The system checks that the payment date derived is a working date for the transaction currency For redemptions the redemption c
204. by choosing the appropriate option from the list The options are Days Months and Years This information is mandatory for slab modes based on Period Period and Amount or Period and Units Load Calculation Method 1 Character Maximum Alphabetic Mandatory From the list select the option that indicates the method by which the load must be computed The following methods of calculation are available e Slab Basis e Weighted Average e Linear Interpolation e Progressive Weighted Average a ORACLE 8 1 4 2 8 1 4 3 8 1 4 4 UH Deal Maintainable Optional Check this box to indicate whether maintaining any deal based on the load would be permitted for unit holders Refer the chapter Managing Investor Accounts in the Agency Branch User Manual for more information on deals for unit holder Tables Referred Section You can define a single criterion for a single load Criteria can be based on any one of the ten parameters given under the Tables Referred section They can be any of the following Agent Broker Fund Investor Payment Mode Investor Fund Investor Transaction UH Additional Info Transaction Rule Transaction Detail Agency Branch Account Officer or IFA Agency Branch Account Officer and IFA options are applicable only for trailer commissions Criteria Section Click Criteria button to specify criteria for criteria based loads The Query Builder is opened and you can specify the required criteria
205. c Mandatory You can either classify documents as Standard or as Additional Documents marked as Standard will be marked as Requested at the time of unit holder creation by default Requirement Select this option to mark the selected document for deletion Operations on KYC AML Documents After you have maintained lists of required KYC documents in the system you can perform any of the following operations before the record is authorized e Edit the specified documents in the record e Delete the record After authorization you can make changes to the record through an amendment operation The KYC Find Options screen helps you locate and retrieve the KYC list that you want to edit view delete authorize or amend from the database You can invoke the KYC Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSKYCMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button ot ORACLE The following screen is invoked KYC Maintenance Summary Authorized Open SI No az Country Type Investor Category ai Document Type Advanced Search Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open SINo Country Type Investor Category Document Type Requirement 3 31 2 1 Retrieving KYC List The KYC Documents feature is available only if your installation has specifically requested for it To perform any operation on a KYC record you must first retrieve the record fro
206. c interface or bulk interface facility Process To import information from bulk clients and process the same in the FC IS system you must e Setup the bulk client in the system and maintain default information for the client e Setup interfaces that will actually perform the uploading the import of information from the hand off files to the system database e Schedule the interfaces to be run whenever necessary without manual intervention For a fuller discussion of each of the steps refer the following sections under the appropriate heads in this chapter e Setting up the bulk import clients e Setting up the interfaces for the import e Scheduling the interfaces to be executed al ORACLE 5 3 You can understand the process from the following illustration Step 1 Set up bulk cients through Bulk Clients Maintenance screen Step 2 Set up default information for bulk clients through Bulk Giients Defaults Maintenance screen Step 3 Through Interface Maintenance screen set up an interface for the import of unit holder informetion Step 4 Through Interface Maintenance screen set up an interface for the irnport of nonunit holder information Step 5 Through the Interface Meintenance screen set up an interface for the export of tgected information Step 6 Associate the Interface ID s with the corresponding pre defined task and set up ajob to execute the same in the Scheduler Services Unit Hold
207. can be optionally set to capture additional data relating to the investor It is possible to set a restrictive list of values to be captured in the additional information value fields All additional information setup through the additional information master where the restrictive clause is not applied are considered to be free format fields These fields will be the candidates to be set as the scheme cross reference numbers Scheme Cross Reference Number as Unit Holder ID If the Scheme Cross Reference Number value is set the same as the Unit Holder ID this means that the bulk client would supply the Unit Holder ID in all the file imports If the Scheme Cross Reference Number is another uniquely identifiable value then the relevant value should be specified in the import file In such cases the system will map the Scheme Cross Reference Number to Unit Holder ID and the transaction will be tagged to the relevant unit holder Scheme Cross Reference Number as Unit Holder Reference Number If the Scheme Cross Reference Number value is set the same as the Unit Holder Reference Number this means that the bulk client would supply the Unit Holder Reference Number in all the file imports If the Scheme Cross Reference Number is another uniquely identifiable value then the relevant value should be specified in the import file In such cases the system will map the Scheme Cross Reference Number to Unit Holder Reference Number and the transaction wil
208. can maintain FATCA Classification and record document details in the Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Detail screen To invoke this screen type UTDFATMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button Entity FATCA Classification MaintenanceDetail FATCA Documents Reference Number FATCA Entity Type Unit Holder X Entity 1D a Entity Name FATCA Classification Reason Entity Category Type Description FATCA Classification ai Description Document Category Document Type Mandatory Document ID Issue Date a3 af Standard A FATCA Compliant No DateTime DateTime Open Authorized You can capture the following details in this screen Reference Number Optional Specify the reference number FATCA Entity Type Alphanumeric Mandatory Expin E Select the FATCA entity type from the adjoining drop down list The options available are Entity ID Unit Holder Single Entity Nominee Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the Entity identification from the adjoining option list 7 7 ORACLE Entity Name Display The system defaults the entity name from the entity record Entity Category Type Display The system displays the entity category type FATCA Classification Alphanumeric Optional Select the FATCA Classification from the adjoining option list Description Alphanumeric Op
209. ce Summary screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the bulk client records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorization Status field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters of the bulk client in the corresponding fields Click Search button All unauthorized bulk client records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Maintenance screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Summary screen 5 9 4 3 Viewing Bulk Client Details To view the bulk client details that you have previously entered Invoke the FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Maintenance Summary Screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the bulk client records that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all bulk client records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option et ORACLE Specify any or all of the search parameters Click Search button
210. ce screen Bulk Import Processing Workflow After you have set up the import interfaces and scheduled the imports the system automatically performs the import and the processing of imported information in the following sequence Import of unit holder new accounts and information change If errors occur during this import all subsequent processes are terminated The details of the errors are logged into the interface error log table Processing of the imported unit holder information This results in updating the system database with the new unit holder accounts and the information change accounts Again if errors occur during this processing all subsequent processes are terminated The details of the errors are logged into the interface error log table Upon successful completion of the unit holder information import and processing the event Bulk UH is raised by the system and the subsequent bulk imports are triggered Import and processing of new and amended transactions and standing instructions load overrides income distribution setup records and fund prices The system database is updated with the new records created Upon successful completion of all the non unit holder imports and processing of the same the event FAILEDRECS is raised by the system The FAILEDRECS event triggers the export of rejected records and reports the errors encountered during the processing The entire import and processing cycle is n
211. certain whether the advisor is domiciled in UK or not It is required to define the front end commission and trail commission payable based on classification of transaction and domicile of advisor It will be required to provide the audit trail for front end commission and trail commission In the absence of commission payments on new advised business investor will be required to pay fees to the advisor for the advice received The advisor fee will be agreed upon by the investor and the advisor The advisor will also be able to charge for ongoing services provided to investors It will be required to provide audit trail for advisor fees These fees are expected to be handled outside the system An investor may hold units in a fund and could have made investments based on advice received Pre RDR and Post RDR The payment of commission or fees will depend on the classification of transactions It will be required to segregate an investors holding Pre RDR Post RDR and classify them Segregation of investor s holdings will also be required to classify transactions resulting from reinvestment of dividends It will be required to provide the audit trail for Pre RDR and Post RDR holdings Payment of commission on SI transactions will depend on whether the SI transaction is classified as Legacy Business Advised Business or Execution Only Business The escalation in SI transactions will also need to be classified similarly Re regis
212. cessing The creation of new investor accounts known as unit holder accounts with all the investor preferences and the entry of any transactions in the account are all functions that are managed in the Agency Branch However any changes made to authorized accounts or authorized transactions will require the scrutiny and approval of the fund manager and can only be authorized through the Fund Manager component You can also authorize any interface defined with an external system as well as any defined job associated with the Scheduler Services Interfaces to External Systems FCIS provides the facility to define and process interfaces to external systems for the purpose of effecting data transfers and information exchanges For instance the NAV for a fund may be imported from an external Asset Management system by processing an internally defined interface You can define and execute these interfaces through Fund Manager Scheduler Services The FCIS system provides a facility that you can use to schedule any internal activities that need to be executed either on a periodic basis or event based frequency When you schedule these activities they will be executed by the Scheduler Services as pre programmed proceedings according to the frequency defined for them Security and Control The Fund Manager System provides application level security features that will prevent unauthorized users from accessing the system Refer
213. cessing of transactions is facilitated in the system refer the Processing Transactions Setting up Standing Instructions for Unit Holders Any Regular Savings Withdrawal Plans that an investor desires to issue standing instructions for can be set up and maintained in the Agency Branch The system provides for the maintenance of standing instructions for a unit holder For a fuller understanding of how the entry and processing of standing instructions transactions is facilitated in the system refer the Maintaining Standing Instructions alo ORACLE 2 4 4 2 4 5 2 4 5 1 2 4 5 2 2 4 5 3 2 4 6 2 4 6 1 2 4 6 2 Clearing of Payment Instruments The clearing status of payment instruments used for transactions and standing instructions can be updated at the Agency Branch For a complete understanding of how the clearing of payment instruments is facilitated in the system refer the Data Entry The system provides an option to print the acknowledgment confirmation slips on line They can be printed again if required for investor related operations Unit Holder Account Servicing Operations Opening New Unit Holder Account The investor fills out an account opening application and hands it over to the agent along with supporting documents The Account Administrator crosschecks the application and the supporting documents and enters the details into the system The system prints an acknowledgme
214. cessing transaction settlements Interim Tax Paid Date Date Format DD MM YYYY Specify the tax payment date here This is only applicable for non pensions funds Note It is mandatory to specify the interim tax for funds where IOF IRRF is applicable Interim Tax Frequency Numeric Specify the tax payment frequency here This is only applicable for non pensions funds Note It is mandatory to specify the interim tax frequency for funds where IOF IRRF is applicable Fund ID Generation Logic 6 Characters Maximum Optional Indicate the pattern using which the fund ID needs to be generated where the first two characters represent the ISO Country Code except for any jurisdiction with distributor schemas where the 2nd character will designate whether it is R egistrar world or D istributor world and the following four characters are auto generated numerals Branch Defaults Section In this section define the default information applicable for any branch of the AMC in any maintenance operation in the system Round Off Amount Vat Percent Amend Period Default Level High Counter Check UH Duplicates Yes Source ID Country Code Client Code FPAM Installed No FPAM User Name Tax Year Start Tax Year End j PATI T STS Ontlamant nual Cund Nana uean Title 15 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter the Title to default during unit holder Data Entry You can make a blank specification so that a bla
215. ch event that can be raised during the End of Day EOD process You can also capture the user s telephone numbers To map an EOD operator with an event use the Event User Mapping Detail screen You can invoke this by typing UTDEUMAP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar aN ORACLE 4 8 1 4 8 1 1 49 and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details Event User Mapping Detail New 73 Enter Query Event User Mapping Event Code Event Description Event User Mapping 10f1 UserID User Name Contact Number 1 Contact Number 2 Contact Number 3 Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in Event User Mapping Screen Event Code Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the event for which you wish to map a user from the drop down list The list contains all the valid event codes maintained in the system Event Description Display Only On selecting the event code the system displays the description of the event code Event User Mapping Section User ID Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the User Id of the person who is to be mapped to the chosen event The list contains all the valid users maintained in the system Contact Numbers 1 3 Alphanumeric Contact Number 1 is Mandatory Enter the contact telephone numbers of
216. ch you are designating the payout account or the type of inflow transaction for which you are designating a collection center in this screen Payment Mode Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the mode of payment for which the collection center is applicable for the selected module and transaction type For redemption transactions the payment mode is not applicable Fund ID Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the fund for which the collection center or payout account is applicable for the selected module transaction type and payment mode Bank Details Section Bank 9 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the code of the bank that is being designated as a collection center or a payout bank The collection account or the payout account must reside in this bank 760 ORACLE 3 27 1 2 Branch 9 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the code of the branch of the bank that is being designated as a collection center or a payout bank The collection account or the payout account must reside in this branch of the selected bank Account Type Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the type of the collection or payout account Account Currency Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the currency of the collection or payout account Account Number Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the number of the collection or payout account Account Holder Name Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the name of the owner of the collection
217. cify the payment lag to be applicable for the trailing commission fee Funds Products and Groups Sections If you are defining the periodic fee to be applicable for a product you must define the specific funds and or groups in the product portfolio to which the fee would be applied When you select the product in the Fund Product Group ID field any groups or funds that are mapped to the product portfolio are displayed in these sections To specify the funds or groups to which the fee must be applicable use the arrow buttons to move the selected funds or groups from the Available Portfolios Available Groups boxes to the Mapped boxes Note It is mandatory that you map all available portfolios to the groups a ORACLE 8 1 17 4 8 1 17 5 FDAP Income Mandatory Select to indicate load being distributed is FDAP income or not at component level from the drop down list Following are the options available in the drop down list e Yes e No Reversals Section Reversal Date Basis Alphanumeric Mandatory In this field you can specify whether the impact of transaction reversals must be affected from the transaction date Reversal at Source or from the reversal date Reversal at Current Depending upon the option you specify here the basis units for trailer commission would be affected as of the date of reversal Reversal at Current or as of the date of the original transaction Reversal at Source If you opt for
218. circumstances e lIthas been specified as the default source for the AMC in the Defaults Maintenance e Exchange Rates have been captured for the source e The currency combination selected for amendment is in use as a fund base currency transaction currency combination for any one fund in the system e The currency combination selected for deletion is being used to arrive at a derived rate between two currencies that do not form part of a currency pair for a source The Source Currency Pair Maintenance Summary screen can be used for the following operations on exchange rate sources e Retrieval for viewing e Editing unauthorized sources and currency pairs e Deleting unauthorized sources and currency pairs e Authorizing sources and currency pairs e Amending authorized sources and currency pairs if amendment is possible ous ORACLE You can invoke the Source Currency Pair Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSSORCE in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Source Currency Pair Maintenance Summary Authorized Source ID Source Reference Currency Open Source Name Quotation Units for Reference Currency Advanced Search lad om Em Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 a Authorized Open Source ID Source Name Source Reference Currency Quotation Units for Reference Currency 6 4 4 1 Retrieving Source Currency Pair Record To
219. ck Unlock then all the fields will be enabled for editing 3 Click the Save button in the Detail screen to save your changes The Detail screen is then closed and the changed details are displayed in the Summary screen in the lower grid list portion of the screen 4 Even when you are editing you must specify all mandatory details before you choose the Save button in the Detail screen If you do not the system prompts you to specify the same when you choose the Save option 5 When the Save operation is successfully completed a message Record Saved is displayed The system will not allow more than one user to edit delete a Record simultaneously Viewing Records You can select records for viewing in any Summary screen in any of the modes To view a record in any of the Summary screens follow the steps given below 1 In the Authorization Status field choose the status of the record which is to be viewed ee ORACLE 2 1 2 5 2 1 2 6 2 Retrieve the maintenance record that you want to view from the database by specifying search parameters in the Summary screen The search parameters for each business function are different 3 When the record or record list is displayed in the lower grid portion of the screen double click on the record The record is displayed in view mode in the Detail screen for the function and you can view the details You will not be able to change any information displayed on the
220. ck Query All records with the specified fields are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to view in the list of displayed records The Group Maintenance screen is displayed in View mode 3 39 3 2 Modifying a Group Maintenance record You can modify the details of a Group Maintenance record that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows e Invoke the Group Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the unauthorized option aa ORACLE Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields to retrieve the record that is to be modified Click Query All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify in the list of displayed records The Group Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from the Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save your changes The Group Maintenance Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Group Maintenance Summary screen 3 39 3 3 Deleting a Group Maintenance record You c
221. cking the status of the account To enable this the RPO Code is provided as an additional information head in the Additional Information Maintenance with valid values such as Bankrupt Deceased Lien on Holdings Return Mail and so on as a pre shipped maintenance Based on the RPO Code specific transaction types could be allowed or disallowed as follows RPO Code Processing Implications Normal No associated RPO Code Active Bankrupt Redemptions Transfer In will be allowed Subscription Switch Out Switch In Transfer Out transactions will not be allowed Deceased All transaction types disallowed Deceased Estate Frozen All transaction types disallowed Hold All transaction types allowed aM ORACLE Blacklist All transaction types disallowed Suspicious All transaction types allowed Closed All transaction types disallowed The RPO code can be tracked separately for each installation therefore the same account could have the BLOCKED status in one installation and ACTIVE in another To mark a status an Information Change must be used To capture the effective date for the RPO status an additional information head RPO Effective Date is provided with the data type as Date Type The format for the date is picked up from the Parameter Code DATEFORMATFORADDINFO which is a pre shipped maintenance These additional information heads are provided at your instal
222. confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database ool ORACLE 3 34 1 5 Authorizing Interest Rate Details An unauthorized record must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize the interest rate details Invoke the Interest Rate Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Interest Rate Maintenance screen displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes an entity details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the transaction during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the entity 3 34 1 6 Amending Interest Rate Details After the interest rate details are authorized they can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to the interest rate details after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation Invoke the Interest Rate Maintenance Su
223. could also be operable within a date range and an amount range Period and Amount The fee could be charged on each amount slab based on a certain number of days months or years that the unit holder remains in the fund Note If the lower boundary is to be inclusive then a transaction value of 1000 currency units would be reckoned as falling in the slab 002 for any of the loads If not as in this case then the transaction value of 1000 currency units would be reckoned as falling in the slab 001 for any of the loads ee ORACLE Let us suppose that a certain unit holder has entered into transactions with the AMC in the following manner Transaction Reference Transaction Total Transaction Transaction Number Type Amount Date T1 Subscription 1000 3 1 2001 T2 Subscription 2000 3 4 2001 T3 Redemption 3000 3 7 2001 For the redemption transaction on 3 7 2001 the load based on period and amount is explained below assuming that the ageing policy for the fund is designated to be FIFO first in first out The load for this transaction is based on the period that has elapsed between the original subscription transaction and the redemption transaction through which the units resulting from the original transaction are redeemed It also takes into account the amount being redeemed Load applied based on the subscription transaction T1 The number of days between the transaction T1 and T3 Difference
224. cters Maximum Alphanumeric Optional Specify the ID of the entity to which this load is payable This must be the ID of a valid entity in the system and the load setup must be applicable for this entity type Cap to Parent Load Amount Select Yes to indicate that the derived load amount is to be capped to the parent load amount If selected as Yes then the sum of derived load amounts cannot be greater than the parent load amount If not the net derived amount can be negative that is the resultant front end load for a particular entity could be negative This specification is used for derived loads that are set up for the purpose of fee commission sharing between the AMC and the Distributors Amount Basis Alphanumeric Optional In this field you can indicate whether the derived load is a percentage of the parent load amount or whether it is derived based on the transaction amount Select either Gross or Net to indicate that the derived load is to be derived based on the transaction amount leave this field blank to indicate that the derived load is a percentage of the parent load amount This specification is used for derived loads that are set up for the purpose of fee commission sharing between the AMC and the Distributors eS ORACLE Return Percentage 5 Characters Maximum Numeric including a maximum of 2 decimal places Mandatory Enter the load percentage that is applicable for this derived load This value must be great
225. cy Branch in the Single Entity Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by clicking the Detail option under the Entity menu item in the Browser To set up an agency branch select the Agency Branch option from the drop down list in the Entity Type field and then proceed to enter the details for the agency branch The Agent Code Branch Code combination should be unique and not already in use for any other entity in the system If so an error message is displayed when you save the record Setting Up AMC You can enter the record of an AMC into the system by creating it as an entity You can set up an AMC in the Single Entity Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by clicking the Detail option under the Entity menu in the Browser To set up an AMC select the AMC option from the drop down list in the Entity Type field and then proceed to enter the details for the AMC You must specify all information such as the common information basic information and contact details for any AMC that you set up Note AMCs can only be maintained at Distributor installations Atan AMC installation the profile of the logged in AMC can be viewed in the Single Entity screen but a new profile cannot be created The attributes specific to setting up of AMC s are e Weekend e Section e Switching Logic i ORACLE 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 e UH Generation Logic e Nature of Business e Effective Date for Capital Gains Calcu
226. cy Preferences You can retrieve a previously entered frequency preferences record in the Summary screen as follows e Invoke the Frequency Preferences Summary screen and specify the following The authorization status of the record in the Authorized field The status of the record in the open field The Frequency ID Frequency Set Type e After you have specified the required details click Search button All entities with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve the individual Frequency Preference record from the detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value For Example e You can search the record for Entity ID by using the combination of and numeric value e Search by 7 System will fetch all the records whose entity ID Type ends by numeric value 7 For example 1247 Soeg ORACLE Search by 17 System will fetch all the records whose Entity ID contains the numeric value 17 For example 1417 3 33 2 2 Editing Frequency Preference Record You can modify the details of a frequency preference record that you have already entered into
227. d be applicable for income earned by the selected entity from all funds Also if specific op tions need to be defined for an individual fund they can be defined separately Such spe cific options if defined for an individual fund would take precedence only for income earnings from the fund for which they are defined over options defined for ALL funds Fund Name Display Only The system displays name of the specified fund ID based on the details maintained at Fund Maintenance level Currency Name Display The system displays name of the specified payment currency based on the details maintained at Currency Maintenance level Distribution Mode Alphanumeric Mandatory From the list indicate the manner in which the selected entity prefers to avail of income earned in the selected fund This could be any of the following e Full Payment Choose this option to indicate that the entity prefers to receive the entire income derived from an income distribution cycle in the selected fund as a payment Note For commission payments for entities other than brokers the distribution mode is consid ered to be Full Payment by default This option is selected and cannot be changed Further the entity can choose to avail of payment either in the form of a check or an account transfer e Full Reinvestment Choose this option to indicate that the entity prefers to reinvest the entire income derived from an income d
228. d the record e Amend the necessary information and click on Save to save the changes Maintaining High Water Mark Details High Water Mark HWM is defined to determine the performance fee associated with a hedge fund High Water Mark mechanism ensures that the Fund Managers do not get the performance fee when the fund has negative performance compared to the previous performance fee period The Fund Manager receives performance fee only on increases in Net Asset Value of the fund in excess of the highest net asset value High Water Mark it had previously achieved The following example illustrates performance fee calculations for hedge funds having High Water Marks Example Assume that a fund launched at a net asset value of 100 per share rose to 120 in its first year In this case performance fee would be payable on the 20 return on each share If in the next year the share value drops to 110 no performance fee will be paid If in the third year the share value rises to 130 performance fee will be calculated only on the 10 return from the previous highest value 120 high water mark rather than on the full return from 110 to 130 eles ORACLE 3 36 1 3 36 2 You can maintain the details related high water mark for a fund in High Water Mark Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDHWM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow but
229. d Set Up screen displays and you can set up the derived load in this screen Load Maintenance Detail Parent Load Details Load ID Description Derived Load 10f1 Load ID Load Description Differential Load Dependent Load To Entity Type No os ORACLE 8 1 7 1 Fields in Derived Load Set up Screen The following fields are available for data entry in the Derived Load Set Up screen Load ID Display Only The ID of the Load to which the derived load that is being set up should be mapped is displayed here from the Load Definition screen This is the parent load Derived Load Section In this section you may specify the parameters for a new derived load Once you tab out of the last field in the row i e the Criteria field the record is saved automatically Load ID 6 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify a unique alphanumeric identifier for the derived load This ID must not be the ID of a load already existing in the system database Load Description 60 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter some descriptive or narrative text qualifying the derived load It should describe the purpose for which the load has been set To Entity Type 1 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory From the list select the type of entity that will be the recipient of the derived load The load setup must be applicable for the entity type you select in this field To Entity ID 12 Chara
230. d basis system to pick up AUM to determine the trailer commission load slab Few of the basis systems are e UH Product Policy Fund Level UPPF e _UH Product Policy Level UPP e UH Product Level UP e UH Level e CIF Product CP e CIF C You can not change the AUM basis specified for trailer commission in the accrual cycle after it is defined Fund Load Details Section Next Accrual Date uescnpuon Last Accrual Application Date Payment Lag FDAP income No FirstLoad To Be Trailer Commission Computed Netted AUM For Second No Load Fund ID Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the fund id The adjoining option list displays valid fund ids maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Load ID Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the load id The adjoining option list displays valid load ids maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Management Fee Load ID Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the load id of the management fee The adjoining option list displays valid management fee load ids maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Periodic Load Maintenance Summary Screen After you have set up a periodic load you must have another user authorize it so that it would be effective in the system eat ORACLE Before the periodic load is authorized you can edit it as many times as necessary You can also delete a periodic load before it is authorized After aut
231. d in View mode Authorizing Records Any business maintenance or processing information that is entered into the system must be authorized for it to be effective in the system database A user other than the one who entered it must perform the authorization 29 ORACLE 2 2 2 3 2 3 1 An unauthorized record must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a record 1 Invoke the Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the unauthorized option 3 Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All transactions with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 4 Double click the transaction that you wish to authorize The Detail screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from Action Assigning a record for editing If a record requires to be edited and the user that entered the record the maker is not available a user with authorization rights can assign the record to another user who can make the necessary edits You can assign a transaction through Delegation screen Select the Delegate operation and select the user to whom the record is being assigned Assigning of records in this manner is audit trailed Structure Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing consist
232. d record created by amendment delete rights required e Authorize an unauthorized record can be authorized by anyone other than the maker authorize rights required oe ORACLE 3 39 3 PF Group Maintenance Summary Screen You can invoke the PF Group Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSHRGMP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button PF Group Maintenance Summary Authorized Group ID In Flow Open Group Description Out Flow Period End Laz Advanced Search Records per page 15 v Authorized Open Group ID Group Description In Flow Out Flow Period End You can perform the following operations in this screen e Viewing a Group Maintenance record e Modifying a Group Maintenance record e Deleting a Group Maintenance record e Authorizing a Group Maintenance record 3 39 3 1 Viewing a Group Maintenance record To view a record that you have previously input you must retrieve the same in the Group Maintenance Summary screen as follows e Invoke the Group Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorized field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option e Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen e Cli
233. datory for Third Party transfer payment Specify the name of the holder of the third party account IBAN 36 Characters Only Alphanumeric Optional Specify the IBAN International Bank Account Number of the account holder 3 5 1 4 Specifying Reinvestment Details As part of maintaining the reinvestment details you can define the pattern in which the entity can reinvest income earnings back into the funds of the AMC The entity can reinvest earned income in any of the following ways e Reinvest either in the entity s own default unit holder account or another unit holder account In the latter case the unit holder in whose account the reinvestment is proposed i e the Reinvestment Unit Holder must belong to the same AMC as the source entity e Reinvest the income back into any of the funds of the AMC e Reinvest the income in as many target fund unit holder combinations subject to the constraints expressed above This is again subject to the consideration that the sum of the percentages of reinvestment in all these combinations must be equal to 100 Note Reinvestment is only allowed into or out of a fund if so designated in the Corporate Actions profile for the fund and corporate action type If you have chosen either Both or Full Reinvestment as the distribution mode specifying all information in this section is mandatory aaa ORACLE Click Reinvestment Details tab to capture the details Income Distr
234. de Currency Name Muli Lanauane Datails Currency Details Number Of Decimals o Currency Higher Amount Format 9 999 999 Currency Lower Currency Separator Round Off Truncate Round Off Validity From Date Currency Type Out validity To Date Conversion Rate Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in Currency Maintenance Screen Currency Information Section Currency Code 3 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify a unique 3 character code for the currency that is being maintained in this record Currency Name 25 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify a unique name for the currency that is being maintained in this record Currency Details Section Number of Decimals 1 Character Maximum Numeric Mandatory Specify the number of decimals to be displayed and considered in the amount formats for the currency This value is used by the system to determine the relationship between the Higher and Lower Currencies For example let us suppose that the number of decimals specified is 2 This would mean that 100 units of the Lower Currency must be considered as equivalent to one unit of the Higher Currency Similarly if the number of decimals specified is 3 1000 units of the Lower Currency must be considered as equivalent to one unit of the Higher Currency Currency Higher Alphabetic Mandatory Specify the actual currency for example
235. dent collection or payout account Account Currency Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the currency of the correspondent collection or payout account Account Number Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the number of the correspondent collection or payout account Account Holder Name Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the name of the owner of the correspondent collection or payout account Limit Amount Numeric Mandatory Specify the value of the limit placed on payouts to the correspondent payout account If the value of the payment exceeds this value a demand draft payment must be made For payments below this value check payments may be made Correspondent IBAN 36 Characters Only Alphanumeric Optional Specify the IBAN International Bank Account Number of the account holder AGY Bank A C Mapping Summary Details Screen You can invoke the AGY Bank A C Mapping Summary screen by typing UTSAGYBN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button AGY Bank A C Mapping Summary Authorized Module ID Bank Account Number Branch Code Records per page 15 v Authorized Open Module ID Open Transaction Type Branch a Bank Code Account Number Advanced Search Transaction Type PaymentMode Bank Branch You can perform the following operations from this screen e Retrieving an AGY Bank Branch Record e Editing an AG
236. described below e Access the Job Maintenance screen in the Maintenance menu category of the Fund Manager component e Inthe Task ID field select the FAILEDRECS task ID e Inthe Frequency Basis field select the Event based option e Check the Enabled check box so that the job is enabled e Inthe Schedule section select the Recurring option If the unit holder and the transactions import jobs are scheduled as recurring jobs then this export must also be scheduled the same e Inthe Recurring section specify the frequency at which the export of rejected records must be executed by the job It is important that you specify the same frequency as for the unit holder and the transaction imports e Inthe Occurs section specify whether the export is to be executed on a daily weekly or monthly basis If daily then specify the number of days apart that the export must be executed in the Daily section e Inthe Duration section specify the start and end dates that will signify the period during which the export is required to be executed If the export is to run indefinitely without an end date then check the No End Date check box e Inthe Event Code field in the Event tab select the FAILEDRECS option e Save the job The Job ID is displayed by the system Note Typically the import of any information other than unit holder information is performed af ter the successful import of unit holder information Accordingly when both the impo
237. ds When you save a record in any Detail screen the details that you have specified or changed in the record are accepted and written into the database in the system In the case of records such as fund rule records unit holder account records transaction request entry records and Load details records the information you have specified is accepted as unauthorized information if it is entered for the first time or if you have edited the record i e you have made changes using the Edit option This information must subsequently be authorized to make it effective in the system To save a record in any Detail screen follow the steps given below 1 Specify all the details necessary to save a record in the fields on the screen In particular specify all the mandatory details 2 Click Ok button to save your specifications or changes made to a record If you specify incomplete information and omit mandatory details the system prompts you to specify the oe ORACLE 2 1 2 7 2 1 2 8 same when you click the Save button and the record will not be saved until you specify these details If the record is invalid for any other reason the system will display an error message 4 When the Save operation is successfully completed a message Record Saved along with any ID generated for the record is displayed The system does not allow more than one user to Save a record simultaneously Finding Records In any of
238. e Maintaining Currencies The different currencies that will be in use in the processing of transactions must be uniquely identified in the system and a profile maintained for each You can use the Currency Maintenance Detail screen to set up the currencies in the system You can invoke this screen by typing UTDCURMA in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the currency details The profile that is maintained for each currency includes the following details e The currency type There are three types of currencies that you can maintain and these are enumerated below in the discussion for the Currency Type field in this screen e The currency separators e The fixed conversion rate for In currencies e The number of decimals for the currency e The round off truncate setup for the currency e The amount formats e The validity period for In currencies The currency Euro must be maintained with a profile of its own in this maintenance screen After the Euro currency has been defined and set up no other currency can be designated to ca ORACLE 6 2 1 6 2 1 1 6 2 1 2 be of currency type Euro which means that only one currency can be set up as a Euro Currency in the system Currency Maintenance Detail New 5 Enter Query Currency Information Currency Co
239. e Exchange List Maintenance Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDASSSD in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to maintain the list gt Exchange List Maintenance Detail New 73 Enter Query Exchange List Information From Share Class ID To Share Class ID Period Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized e Specify the share classes switching between which will be allowed after the period has elapsed in the From Share and To Share fields e Define the period at the end of which the switching will be permitted in the Period field e Save your changes by clicking the Save button Exchange List Maintenance Summary Screen After you have designated a period for allowing switch transactions between share classes you must have another user authorize it so that it becomes effective in the system Before the switch period is authorized you can edit it as many times as necessary You can also delete it before it is authorized After authorization you can only change the switch period through an amendment The Exchange List Maintenance Summary screen can be used for the following operations on switch periods e Retrieval for viewing e Editing an unauthorized switch period e Deleting unauthorized switch periods
240. e oe ORACLE e Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the bulk client parameters e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes 5 9 4 7 Authorizing Amended Bulk Client Details An amended bulk client record must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is the same as that of normal authorization process 5 9 4 8 Copying Attributes If you want to create a bulk client record having the same attributes of an existing record e Retrieve the bulk client record whose attributes the new record should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy in the Actions list e Indicate the new Bulk Client Code You can however change the details if required ee ORACLE 6 1 6 2 6 Maintaining Currencies Introduction The Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing system provides the AMC with the facility of transacting with different currencies maintaining different exchange rate sources and also capturing exchange rates The following menu options are available in the Data Entry Menu Item of the Fund Manager component to take care of these functions e Currency Maintenance e Country Currency Maintenance e Source Maintenance e Exchange Rate Maintenance e Currency Cutoff Time Maintenanc
241. e Maintenance e The different currency pairs must be set up for the exchange rate sources in the Currency Pair Setup maintenance Fields in the Exchange Rate Maintenance Screen Source ID Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the Source ID of the source for which the exchange rates are being entered from the drop down list When the selected Source ID is populated in this field the following fields are populated with the corresponding details of the Source from the Source Maintenance record for the source e The Source Name os ORACLE e The Source Reference Currency e The different Pair Currencies that have been maintained for the source e The Modes of Quotation specified for each currency pair that has been maintained for the source e The Units of Quotation for the reference currency that have been maintained for each currency pair FX Deal Date Date Mandatory Specify the deal date for the currency pair This date cannot be earlier or later than the application date FX Value Date Date Mandatory Specify the date on which the exchange rates must be effective This date cannot be lesser than the date specified as the FX Deal Date Additionally you can enter a future date as the FX Value Date only if you have set the Exchange Rate for Report as No The exchange rates may be captured any number of times during a business day Each exchange rate is given a serial number in the system and the entry
242. e AMC in the following manner Transaction Reference Transaction Transaction Transaction Number Type Amount Date T1 Subscription 1000 3 1 2001 T2 Subscription 2000 3 4 2001 T3 Redemption 3000 3 7 2001 For the redemption transaction on 3 7 2001 the load based on period is explained below The load for this transaction is based on the period that has elapsed between the original subscription transaction and the redemption transaction through which the units resulting from the original transaction are redeemed Note The three loads in this example are to be reckoned as separate loads A single load can not have slabs based on all three parameters days months and years Load applied based on the subscription transaction T1 The number of days between the transaction T1 and T3 Difference in days between 3 7 2001 and 3 1 2001 180 days This period falls in the slab for load L1Y above and the load applied will be 3 of the transaction amount Load 3 100 3000 90 Load applied based on the subscription transaction T2 The number of days between the transaction T2 and T3 Difference in days between 3 7 2001 and 3 4 2001 90 days This period falls in the slab for load L4M above and the load applied will be 4 of the transaction amount Load 4 100 3000 120 oe ORACLE Therefore the total load amount applied for the redemption transaction T3 is 90 120 210 Note B
243. e Aseparate AMC calendar can only be maintained if the system calendar has already been maintained and a separate fund calendar can only be maintained if both the AMC and system calendars have already been maintained e The system calendar once maintained is replicated to be the AMC calendar as well as the fund calendar for all funds of the AMC If separate calendars are required for the AMC and for a specific fund these can be maintained after the system calendar is maintained Therefore maintaining the AMC and fund calendars is optional elf separate calendars are maintained a day can be designated a working day in the AMC calendar only if it is also a working day in the system calendar A day can be designated a working day in the fund calendar only if it is also a working day in both the AMC as well as system calendars e Ifa working date in the system calendar is set as a holiday it takes effect after authorization of the record e When a fund calendar is maintained the rule effective date of the fund cannot be designated as a holiday Similarly when the AMC calendar is maintained the rule effective date of any of the funds of the AMC cannot be designated as a holiday e Ifa working day in the system calendar is subsequently designated a system holiday it must be a holiday in the AMC and fund calendars too if they have been maintained e The weekend options maintained at the time of installation i e for the system are reckon
244. e BIC of the beneficiary Beneficiary Address Optional Specify the beneficiary address Beneficiary Acct No Optional Specify the beneficiary account number Beneficiary Code Optional Specify the beneficiary code Beneficiary Info Optional Specify any other information of the beneficiary Intermediary Optional Specify the intermediary of the payment group Intermediary BIC Code Optional Specify the BIC of the intermediary Intermediary Address Optional Specify the intermediary address Intermediary Acct No Optional Specify the intermediary account number 8 26 ORACLE 8 1 15 8 1 16 Intermediary Code Optional Specify the intermediary code Intermediary Info Optional Specify any other information of the intermediary Further Credit Name Optional Enter further credit name Further Credit Acct No Optional Enter further credit account number Reference1 and Reference2 Optional Specify the reference for the account holder Note The detail maintained through Payment Group Maintenance screen does not have any processing impact on trailing commission and this is just an informative maintenance Ongoing Management Fees Ongoing management fees are levied by an AMC as payment for maintenance services rendered to unit holders In the Periodic Load Details screen management fee loads are always set up at a fund group level and are applied based on the Assets Under Management AU
245. e Interest Rate Maintenance Summary screen 3 34 1 3 Viewing Interest Rate Details To view the interest rate details that you have previously entered Invoke the Interest Rate Maintenance Summary Screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the search parameters in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view The Interest Rate Maintenance Detail screen is opened in view mode 3 34 1 4 Deleting Interest Rate Details You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete an interest rate parameter Invoke the Interest Rate Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the search parameters in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to delete The Interest Rate Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to
246. e appropriate value from the list Amount or Percentage 1 Character Maximum Alphabetic Mandatory Indicate whether the return value for the load is a flat Amount or a Percentage of the Base Price Transaction Amount by choosing the appropriate value from the list Amount Basis Alphanumeric Optional You can use this field to indicate whether the load return value is to be applied on the fund capital This specification is applicable only for Loaded to Price LTP loads Select the Gross option to indicate that the load return value is to be applied on the fund capital If not select the Net option Description 60 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter some descriptive or narrative text qualifying the load It should describe the purpose for which the load has been set Price Basis Load Optional You can use this field to indicate whether the load being defined is a price basis load that is whether the load could be an inherent fee or incentive in respect of fund prices for which price bases other than the NAV and Transaction Base Price components are used Note Any loads that have been defined as price basis loads are only used as the indicator for computing load values and are not picked up during evaluation of criteria That is the oth er load details specified for such loads such as the return value slabs and so on are not taken into consideration The difference between the Transaction Base Price and the
247. e for amendment You can only amend records that are authorized 3 Specify any or all of the search parameters in the corresponding fields on the screen 4 Click Search All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you want to amend The Entity Payment Detail screen is displayed in Amendment mode 6 Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the record 7 Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing an amended Entity Payment Record An amended exchange rate record must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is the same as the process of normal authorization Copying the Attributes If you want to create an entity type having the same attributes of an existing entity type you can copy the attributes of an existing entity type to a new entity type To copy the attributes 1 Retrieve the entity type whose attributes the new entity type should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter 2 Click on Copy in the Actions list 3 Indicate the ID for the new entity type You can however change the details of the entity type if required Setting up Agents Agents as mentioned earlier are conduits that
248. e import fails and the import records are rejected ORACLE 5 4 Each file that needs to be imported from the bulk client into the system for all the information set has a specified format If the file is formatted in any other way than prescribed in the required format then the import will fail and all the import records will be rejected The prescribed formats for the hand off files from the bulk client that are to be uploaded are found in the chapter Appendix B Upload File Formats B of the Upload Format User Manual Refer the same for complete information about the file formats Note The default information that you maintain fora SMDPARAWM bulk client in the Bulk Clients Defaults Maintenance screen contains the defaults for all the different types of data imports unit holder new accounts information change transactions unit holder income distribution setup standing instructions transaction load overrides fund prices Unit Holder Deal uploads broker details check book requests fund rules and redemption checks When the import of data is performed by the system the validations for the imported data are performed in the same manner as they are applicable when you set up the default information for the bulk client in the Bulk Client Defaults Maintenance screen Setting up Interfaces for Import After you have set up the client from whom the bulk information is being imported yo
249. e lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view in the list of displayed records The KYC Maintenance Detail screen is displayed in View mode 3 31 2 4 Deleting KYC Details You can delete only unauthorized KYC records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered Invoke the KYC Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the details and click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to delete The KYC Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database oI ORACLE 3 31 2 5 3 31 2 6 3 31 2 7 3 31 2 8 Authorizing KYC Details An unauthorized KYC record must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a record e Invoke the KYC Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option e Specify any or all of the search parameters of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All the records with the specified details that are pending autho
250. e modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to a transaction after authorization 1 Invoke the Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the transaction that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend only authorized records 3 Specify any or all of the details of the Detail screen All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 4 Double click the record that you want to amend The Detail screen is displayed in Amendment mode Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the record 5 Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Viewing Record To view a record that you have previously entered you must retrieve the same in the Summary screen as follows 1 Invoke the Summary Screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the transaction that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option 3 Specify any or all of the details of the transaction in the corresponding fields on the screen and click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 4 Double click the record that you want to view in the list of displayed records The Detail screen is displaye
251. e percentage of the derived income that is to be reinvested in the specified reinvestment unit holder s account in the specified reinvestment fund You can make any number of such entries specifying a percentage for each combination The sum total of all Saa ORACLE split percentages for all reinvestment unit holder reinvestment fund ID combinations you have specified must be equal to one hundred percent Specifying Routing Details Click on the Routing Details tab to enter routing details income Distribution Setup Detail New 4 Enter Query Client Information Entity Type Entity ID Details Fund ID Distribution Mode X Payment Percentage _ Rule Applicable for All Funds Payment Details Reinvestment Details MAMAS Swift Format Beneficiary Details Beneficiary Beneficiary Add1 Beneficiary Add2 Beneficiary Add3 Intermediary Details Intermediary Intermediary Add1 Intermediary Add2 Intermediary Add3 Further Credit Details Further Credit Name Reference Reference1 Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized You need to maintain the following details Swift Format Optional Entity Name Description Payment Currency Reinvestment Percentage ISIN Code Fund Name Currency Name Bank Charged Beneficiary BIC Code Beneficiary Acct No Beneficiary Code Beneficiary Info Intermediary BIC Code Intermediary Acct No Intermediary Code Intermediary Info
252. e slab is applicable The period you specify here will be interpreted by the basis you have specified in the Period Basis field in the main Load Definition screen For instance if you enter a value 1 then it will be deemed as 1 day of the period basis is Days 1 month if the period basis is Months and 1 year if the period basis is Years Specifying the To Period is optional If not specified the system defaults the same based on the system High Period Value maintained in the Defaults Maintenance Return Value Numeric Mandatory Enter the load value applicable for the slab This is the value that will be applied if the load is applicable for any transaction If the return value is indicated to be a percentage of the base price transaction amount then the value entered should not be greater than one hundred percent Floor Value Numeric Optional Specify the minimum amount that must be paid for this load If the computation of the load returns a value that is lower than this figure then the applicable load considered is this figure Bale ORACLE Ceiling Value Numeric Optional Specify the maximum amount that must be paid for this load If the computation of the load returns a value that is higher than this figure then the applicable load considered is this figure UH Deal Ceiling Value Numeric Optional You can specify the UH deal ceiling value either in terms of amount or in terms of percentage
253. e system defaults the same based on the system High Date Value maintained in the Defaults Maintenance From Amount Numeric Mandatory for all loads with Slab Mode as Amount Date and Amount or Period and Amount only Specify the lower amount boundary for the slab Any amount higher than this amount is reckoned as part of the slab If you have designated the lower boundary as inclusive the load by checking the Consider as Lower Boundary check box in the main Load Definition screen then any transaction amount that is equal to the amount you specified here is also reckoned as part of the slab To Amount Numeric Optional Specify the upper amount boundary for the slab Any amount lower than this amount is reckoned as part of the slab Specifying the To Amount is optional If not specified the system defaults the same based on the system High Amount Value maintained in the Defaults Maintenance From Units Numeric Mandatory for all loads with Slab Mode as Units Date and Units or Period and Units only Specify the lower units boundary for the slab Any number of units higher than this value is reckoned as part of the slab If you have designated the lower boundary as inclusive the load by checking the Consider as Lower Boundary check box in the main Load Definition screen then a number of units applied that is equal to the value you specified here is also reckoned as part of the slab eae ORACLE To Units Numeric Optional
254. e that is displayed here For each mode of payment the Minimum Clearing Period is the period after which you will be able to clear the payment instrument Maximum Clearing Period Numeric Display Can be altered Specify the number of days before which the payment instrument must be cleared for a particular mode of payment You can alter the value that is displayed here ony ORACLE 3 24 2 3 25 3 25 1 For each mode of payment the Maximum Clearing Period is the period before which you must clear the payment instrument Auto Clearing Process Display If you have ticked the check box under Auto Clear the instrument automatically gets cleared if you do not clear the same before the max clearing period Mode of Payment Detail Summary screen You can invoke the Holiday Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSMPAYS in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Summary gt ons Authorized v Open v Payment Mode a Sub Payment Mode ag Advanced Search Reset Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open PaymentMode SubPaymentMode Payment Mode Description Minimum Clearing Period Ma You can use this screen to set up the clearing options for the various modes of payments that are valid in the system For each mode of payment you can e Enter the clearing options e Edit the existing unauthorized clearing options e Authorize the clear
255. e the FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list e Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you wish to authorize The FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Maintenance screen displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes an entity details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the transaction during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the entity 3 22 4 6 Amending Withholding Tax Setup Parameters After a withholding tax setup is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to an withholding tax setup record after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation e Invoke the FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Summary screen from the Browser Sroa ORACLE 3 22 4 7 3 22 4 8 3 23 e Select the status of the record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of entities that are authorized e Specify any or all of
256. earch parameters Click Search button All unauthorized loads with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the load that you want to modify The Periodic Load Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Periodic Load Maintenance Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Periodic Load Maintenance Summary screen 8 1 18 3 Viewing Periodic Load Maintenance Details To view the periodic load maintenance details that you have previously entered Invoke the Periodic Load Maintenance Summary Screen from the Browser Select the status of the periodic load maintenance records that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorized field You can also view all periodic load maintenance records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the other periodic load search parameters for retrieving the records Click Search button All the periodic load maintenance records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen eae ORACLE Double click the periodic load that you want to view The Periodic Load Maintenance Detail screen is displayed in view mode 8 1 18 4 Deleting Periodic Loads You can d
257. ecify any or all of the details of the fund type in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All fund types with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the fund type that you want to view in the list of displayed fund types The Fund Type Maintenance screen is opened in view mode 3 3 2 4 Deleting Fund Type You can delete only unauthorized fund types in the system To delete a fund type Invoke the Fund Type Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the fund types that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the details of the fund type in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All fund types with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the fund type that you want to delete The Fund Type Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database 3 3 2 5 Authorizing Fund Types An unauthorized fund type must be authorized in the system for it to be processed ORACLE 3 3 2 6 3 3 2 7 3 3 2 8 To authorize a fund type e Invoke the Fund Type Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the fund type that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the U
258. ect Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Exchange List Maintenance screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Exchange List Summary screen 3 25 4 3 Viewing Exchange List Record To view an exchange list record that you have previously entered Invoke the Exchange List Summary Screen from the Browser Select the status of the exchange list records that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify the Share Class ID optional in the corresponding field Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view The Exchange List Maintenance screen is opened in view mode 3 25 4 4 Deleting Exchange List Record You can delete only unauthorized exchange list records in the system To delete an exchange list record Invoke the Switch Privilege List Setup Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify Share Class Type ID Optional in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of
259. ed after the restrict sale status has been marked for the day Reverse If you choose this option any unauthorized transactions entered after the restrict sale status has been marked for the day are deleted Any authorized transactions including system generated transactions or those that have been entered on the previous system working day after the transaction cut off time are reversed Any transactions allotted after the restrict sale status has been marked are left unaltered An error message is displayed when the sale restriction is authorized in respect of these transactions Carry forward If you choose this option the transaction date of any transaction that is entered after the restrict sale status has been marked for the day will be defaulted to the next working day according to the fund calendar if maintained or AMC calendar if maintained or the system calendar eo ORACLE 3 23 0 4 3 23 1 3 23 1 1 Any transactions allotted after the restrict sale status has been marked are left unaltered An error message is displayed when the sale restriction is authorized in respect of these transactions Uploading Holiday Details You can use the upload facility to upload holiday details if required For more details on holiday upload file formats refer Upload File Formats chapter in FC IS system Holiday Maintenance Summary Screen After you have set up the list of designated system holidays in the Holid
260. ed at the bottom of the list For each value you add in this manner you must specify the following information as mandatory e A unique identifier for the value in the Param Value field e The text or label representing the parameter value in the Param Text field For a given Param Value the system allows you to enter different descriptions for different languages i e you can describe the same Param Value differently in various languages e The serial number representing the sorting order of the parameter value in the Sort Order field a0 ORACLE 4 3 2 1 4 4 If you wish to record the parameter value in the other languages supported by the system click on the Details link under the Multi Language column and enter the A unique identifier for the value in the Param Text field Click Ok button Your changes are saved the System Params Value Maintenance screen is closed and you are returned to the main System Parameter Codes Maintenance screen If the existing value list is not editable all fields are in display only mode and the Add link is not available Note The system makes available the Param Codes to a user based on the language if they have been maintained in that language which has been specified in the SMS screen for the user If you amend the language for a user the system accordingly displays Param text in the latest language For example if the language for User is initially German the
261. ed by default to be the weekend options for the AMC calendar however you can alter these options when you set up the AMC calendar Similarly the AMC calendar weekend options are taken as default options for the fund calendar and you can alter them when you set up the fund calendar e The current system date cannot be set as a holiday 3 23 0 2 Effect of Defining Holiday Calendars The effect of setting up holiday calendars in the system is discussed below for all maintenance or transaction input operation Fund Rules Fund Demographics The Start Date and Rule Effective Dates for a fund must be working days for the AMC or in the system calendar General Operating Rules The Next Price Date and Maturity Date must be a working day in the system calendar and AMC calendar if maintained and the fund calendar if maintained For limit order processing the prior or after rule may be specified Corporate Actions The First Dividend Declare Date must be a working day in the system calendar and AMC calendar if maintained and the fund calendar if maintained Amendment of Fund Rules The new amended Rule Effective Date for the fund must be a working day in the system calendar and AMC calendar if maintained and the fund calendar if maintained a2 ORACLE Fund Price The prices for a fund cannot be entered into the system for a holiday in the system calendar or AMC calendar if maintained and the fund calend
262. ee 2 6 2 3 1 Maintaining Reference INfOrmation ccccccceccecenseeeceeenteeeeeeesneeeeesennaes 2 6 2 3 2 Maintaining Funds and Products cccccccccsseeceeenseeeeseeentieeeseeensaeeeeeeeaas 2 7 2 3 3 Authorization Functions in Fund ManagQet cccccscccseseeeettnnneeeeeeeee 2 10 2 3 4 Interfaces to External SystemMS sseeeesrrreeersrnnrrrsrrnnnrrrnnnnererrnnnrrrnnnnrenrene 2 10 2 3 5 SCHECUIOr Serita Serera irar A EET AATE AE TETT R E 2 10 2 3 6 Security and CONTO arenar a E E EE 2 10 ZST PRREPONMS oe naa aa e rae eaaa sian ahs ati ete 2 11 2 3 8 End Of Day ProC SS S 11 cccccsstenscccdeentecettedennansedeueneasaecsenneastesderbeasetener 2 11 29 rOle FUNCTIONS eryri iniiai ies toda i keik a e SAAE AESA Aan thats devisees tees 2 12 2 3 10 Conventions to be Followed in Screens ssseeeissseeeinneserrrnreeenennneeeene 2 12 2 93 11 Bae YOU LOGIN orero a E EE E OA 2 12 2 3 12 Logging in to F nd Manag f mi isiriiissisiiieia i eanrodiiiinariridasiabaiitat i eraiedaii ii 2 12 2 3 13 Fund Manager Me nu isisisi iieis erririidireeni iari idire Eeit ea reii a 2 13 24 Agency Branchens ai a a a er 2 14 241 Semicing INVOSIONS ernaar E aT EIRE TE AEO OE EET 2 15 2 4 2 Entry Maintenance and Processing of Transactions ccccccieeeee 2 15 2 4 3 Setting up Standing Instructions for Unit Holders 0 ccccccceccetteeeeeeeeee 2 15 2 4 4 Clearing of Payment Instruments 0000 ceeeecc ttt tee eee ente
263. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeettaeeeeerens 5 4 5 5 1 Setting up Jobs for Interface related TaSkS ccccccsseeeeenteeeeeeeenteeeeeeeaas 5 4 5 6 Processing Imported Bulk Information cccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeenaeees 5 6 5 6 1 Bulk Import Processing WOrkfOW cccccssseeeceesseeeeceeenteeeeeeenieetesseeaaes 5 7 5 7 Errors during Import or Processing of Client Information c ceceeeeeeeeetteeeeees 5 8 5 8 Bulk Account Clients Maintenance ccccecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenaaeeeseeeaaeees 5 9 5 8 1 Fields Specific to Bulk Clients in Single Entity Maintenance Screen 5 10 5 9 Bulk Clients Defaults Maintenance cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeentaeeeeenenaaes 5 11 5 9 1 Maintaining Default Information for Bulk Client Imports cece 5 11 5 9 2 Default Information for Broker eesssseeerreenrerrrnnnenrrnnnrrrnnnnenernnnnrnrnnnnreena 5 24 5 9 3 Default Information for UH Deal Upload 2 cccccscceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteteens 5 25 5 9 4 Bulk Clients Defaults Summary SCION cect ttre ee etnteeeeeetnneeeeeees 5 26 Maintaining Currencies ccc cee heen ee eee eee 6 1 OF Introduction s scer eco avleten det inet ei ad in en elt eee Nek 6 1 6 2 Maintaining Currencies cececcececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeaeeeeeneeaees 6 1 6 2 1 Fields in Currency Maintenance SCreen ccccccccccsececeeeenteeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaas 6 2
264. eeeeeeeentieeeeseeeneeeeeeeeaas 3 127 3 36 3 High Water Mark Summary screen ou eee centte eee eeentteteteeenateeeeeenaes 3 128 3 37 Maintaining Data Element cecceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeaas 3 130 3 37 1 Fields in Element Maintenance SCreen cccccceccccesseeeeeeenteeeeenenaas 3 131 3 37 2 Operations on Data Elements 2 cccccceccecceeceeeeeeeeteeenennenneceseeseeeeeees 3 132 3 37 3 Element Maintenance Summary Screen 00 eee ececccettte eee eeenteeteeeeeaees 3 132 3 38 Maintaining Rules for Performance Fee Calculation 0 ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee 3 134 3 38 1 Fields in Rule Maintenance SCrOCN ui ccscecccccentteeeceestieeeeeetneeteeenenaees 3 135 3 38 2 Specifying Condition for the Rule cccccesccceceeeteeeeceeenneeeseeetaeeeeeeeaas 3 136 3 38 3 Specifying Expression for the RUIC cccccccccssseeeeeeeenteeeeeeetneeeeeseenaes 3 137 3 38 4 Operations on Performance Fee Rules 1 1 ccccccccceceeeeetnesteeeteeeeeeteees 3 137 3 39 Maintaining Group Rule Mapping cceeceeeeeeeeneeceeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeecneesaeeeeeeeees 3 137 3 39 1 Fields in Group Mapping Details Screen cccccccccceeeeteeseeeeeeeteeeeees 3 138 3 39 2 Operations on Group Rule Mapping 22 1ccccccceceeeeteetecenentecaeeateneeess 3 139 3 39 3 PF Group Maintenance Summary SCLOON Li cececccetteeeeeettteteeeeeaees 3 140 3 40 Maintaining Policy Restrictions for Guara
265. eeeesenaes 3 103 3 31 2 Operations on KYC AML Documents cccccceceeeeeeeteennentnsaneeseeeteess 3 104 3 32 KYC Ref Type Restrictions roa ee ETA AAEE ETE 3 108 3 32 1 Fields in KYC Ref Type Restrictions ccccccceceecteeeeteeeeteeeneeeeteeenaeeees 3 108 3 32 2 KYC Ref Type Restrictions Summary SCION cecccccseeteetteeteeteenetees 3 109 3 33 SIP SWP STP RUES noirir isien eai idl didnt ene ee 3 112 3 33 1 Fields in Frequency Preferences Maintenance SCreen cc08 3 114 3 33 2 Frequency Preferences Summary Screen ecceceeectetteteeeeenteeteeeeenaees 3 115 3 34 Maintaining Interest Rate Details ec ccceeeeceeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaaes 3 119 3 34 1 Interest Rate Summary Screen cc ccc cette ttn tte eee ceenteeeeeeentaeeteesenaaees 3 119 3 35 Maintaining Rate Details for Hedge Funds ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeetetneeeeeeeneeeeeeee 3 123 3 35 1 Fields in Rate Maintenance SCreen cccceccccccssseeeceentteteeeeeenieteeeeeeaes 3 123 3 35 2 Operations on Interest Rate Details 2 csccccccceeceeeeeesneententeeeeeeenes 3 123 3 35 3 Rate Maintenance Summary SCICON cccceccente ee eeeenteeeeteeeneeeeesennaes 3 124 3 36 Maintaining High Water Mark Details 0 cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeetnaeeeeeeeeas 3 126 3 36 1 Fields in High Water Mark Maintenance Screen 0 ceeeeeceneeeeeeeeeee 3 127 3 36 2 Operations on High Water Mark cccccccsscecceest
266. elect New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the frequency preference details Frequency Preferences Detail New 453 Enter Query Frequency Maintenance Details Set Type Dates Frequency ID Display individual set values No Description Frequency Frequency Details 1of1 Set ID List Of Dates Days Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in Frequency Preferences Maintenance Screen Frequency Maintenance Details Section This section allows you to capture the following information Freq ID 10 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter a unique ID for the setup Description 255 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the description of the setup os ORACLE 3 33 1 2 3 33 2 Frequency Mandatory This drop down list displays the list of available frequencies which are e Weekly e Fortnightly e Monthly e Quarterly Set Type Mandatory This is applicable only if frequency selected is Weekly The Applicable values being e Dates e Days For other frequencies it would be defaulted to Dates and you will not be allowed to change it Display individual set values If you check this option you can enter the set of options in the SET ID field however if this is unchecked individual values in SI capture For example in case the frequency is fortnightly the SI
267. elect the fund for which you are setting up the tax slabs The base currency of the fund is displayed in the Fund Base Currency Code field Fay ORACLE 3 22 3 Country Code Alphanumeric Mandatory When you select the ID of the fund the country associated with the fund is displayed in this field and you can change it by choosing from the drop down list This is the country for which the tax slabs that are being set up must be applicable All tax deductions and computations will be done in this currency Currency Code Display Only Depending on the Country the system displays the corresponding currency Product ID Alphanumeric Optional Select the product for which you are setting up the tax slabs The option list contains all valid products maintained in the system With Holding Tax will be applicable to all funds mapped to the product GL entries will be populated with the respective product Id and policy number along with the dividend payment details and tax details Tax Details section In the lower grid portion of the screen maintain the details of each slab as follows Slab Sequence No 3 Characters Maximum Numeric Mandatory Enter the slab number for this investor category tax definition Income From Numeric Mandatory Specify the minimum income for which this tax slab definition is applicable for the specified investor category This slab will apply to incomes that range between the values you specify in thi
268. elete only unauthorized periodic loads in the system To delete a Periodic load Invoke the Periodic Load Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the periodic load records that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the other search parameters for retrieving the records Click Search button All periodic load records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the periodic load record that you want to delete The Periodic Load Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database 8 1 18 5 Authorizing Loads 8 1 18 6 An unauthorized periodic load must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a periodic load Invoke the Periodic Load Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the periodic load that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all search parameters of the periodic load for retrieving the records Click Search button All the periodic load records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the periodic load record that you wish to authorize The Period
269. em displays unit holder s category name if the Entity Type is maintained as Unitholder Effective Date DD MM YYYY Numeric Mandatory Specify the date the system should consider for calculating tax Tax ID Alphanumeric Mandatory From the list select the tax ID to be used for application of withholding tax according to the slabs maintained for the entity type The system displays the associated Tax Component Name Each set of slabs can be given an ID that reflects the nature of the slabs The value list for the Tax ID s is obtained from the system parameter values maintained for the Tax ID system parameter code Investor Status Alphanumeric Mandatory You will be allowed to select the status if the entity type is Unit Holder Select the status for which this tax slab is applicable The system displays the corresponding Investor Status Name This will enable the system to decide which tax slab needs to be applied depending on whether the unit holder is a foreign resident unit holder To ORACLE If the entity type is a broker the system defaults the investor status You will not be able to modify the status Dividend Component ID Alphanumeric Optional Specify whether the tax slab details being maintained apply to capital gains earnings from cash dividends or income earnings from cash dividends for the fund The system defaults the Dividend Component ID and Description for brokers You will
270. en you are setting up a periodic fee for the first time you must specify the date on which the fee is to be first processed Round off Truncate Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify whether the computed load must be rounded off or truncated Bae ORACLE Minimum Holding Period Numeric Optional You can indicate a minimum period for which the units must be held before they can be considered for computation of the trailing fee This value is reckoned in days It is not mandatory to set a minimum holding period If this value is not specified all holdings during the trailer commission period are eligible for trailer commission Last Accrual Date This indicates the last date on which the periodic fee was accrued Last Accrual Application Date This indicates the last application date when the periodic fee was accrued Next Accrual Date This indicates the next date when the periodic fee will accrue FDAP Income Mandatory Select to indicate periodic load being distributed is FDAP or not from the drop down list Following are the options available in the drop down list e Yes e No Processing Lag Frequency Alphanumeric Optional Specify the lag for the payment of trailer commission arrears You can specify a monthly lag Payment Lag Frequency Description Display Only The system displays description for the specified payment lag frequency based on the details maintained in the system Payment Lag Days Numeric Optional Spe
271. encies must be set up in the system in the Country Maintenance e The currencies must also be set up in the system in the Currency Maintenance Fields in Country Currency Maintenance Screen Country Code Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the country that must be associated with its currency from the list provided A country can be associated with only one currency in the system Currency Code Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the currency that must be associated with the selected country Country Currency Summary Screen After you have mapped a country to a currency you must have another user authorize the mapping An unauthorized mapping cannot be used in the system Before a country currency association is authorized you can edit it as many times as necessary An unauthorized country currency mapping can also be deleted oe ORACLE After a country currency association is authorized it can be changed only through an amendment only under the following circumstances The Country Currency record has not been used in a unit holder account as the domicile or preferred currency The Country Currency record is not in use as a base currency for an entity broker agency branch or fund The currency that is part of the record is not in use as a source reference currency for an exchange rate source in the system There is not even a single fund bank account maintained in this currency There is not even a single unit holder ba
272. ency Details After a currency is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to a currency after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation e Invoke the Currency Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the currency record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of currencies that are authorized e Specify any or all of the search parameters of the currency in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All currency records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the currency that you want to amend The Currency Maintenance screen is displayed in Amendment mode e Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the currency e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing Amended Currency Details An amended currency must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is the same as the process of normal authorization Copying Attributes If you want to create a currency having the same attributes of an existing currency you can copy the attributes of an existing currency to a new currency To copy the attributes e Retrieve the currency whose attributes the new currency should inherit Y
273. endment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is subsequently the same as that for normal process Copying Attributes If you want to create an entity having the same attributes of an existing entity you can copy the attributes of an existing entity to a new entity To copy the attributes e Retrieve the entity whose attributes the new entity should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy in the Actions list e Indicate the ID for the new Entity You can however change the details of the entity if required Setting up Withholding Tax You can configure the system to perform withholding tax WHT deductions out of the earnings derived from any investor or a broker To do this you must specify the slabs according to which the rates will be determined WHT is deducted from the earnings of an investor or a broker according to the WHT slabs that you maintain in the system before the net earnings are paid out or reinvested depending upon the Income Distributions Setup You can maintain such slabs for earnings from cash dividends that involve capital gains as well as income earnings In the system you maintain the slab details for WHT Input in the FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDWHTAX in the field at the top right
274. ensure that all the following activities have been performed e The user profile has to be defined by the system administrator for all the users of the branch e The Defaults required for the branch namely the default language currency and so on must already have been defined Logging in to Agency Branch When the Agency Branch component is installed on the workstation you can access it through the browser In the Login screen specify your name and password to login to the system 2 20 ORACLE If you are logging in for the first time specify the password allotted to you by the System Administrator After you have logged in for the first time the system forces you to change your password Whenever you login subsequently you must use this password ORACLE ORACLE FLEXCUBE UNIVERSAL BANKING Login Password Theme Default 2 4 11 Agency Branch Menu When you successfully log into the system the Agency Branch Main Menu screen is displayed and the various options are enabled or disabled based on the rights given to you in your user profile 2 4 11 1 Choosing your AMC Branch You must choose the branch of the AMC that you are going to operate in in the AMC Branch field When you choose the AMC branch the menu that is accessible to you according to the definitions made in your user profile are displayed 2 4 11 2 Logging in to Different Branch To login to a different branch click the Chg Brn b
275. ent site is located Client Code 15 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Optional Displays the code given to the client where Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing has been installed FPAM Installed Alphanumeric Optional If Oracle FLEXCUBE Asset Management has been installed at the client site it is indicated here FPAM User Name 15 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Optional The name of the user where Oracle FLEXCUBE Asset Management has been installed is displayed here Tax Year Start Date Format Optional Specify the start date from which the tax payment should be considered Tax Year End Date Format Optional Specify the date till which the tax payment should be considered EUSD Option Alphanumeric Optional Select the default EUSD European Union Savings Directive option for the segment The options available are e WithHolding Tax WHT EUSD tax is computed and deducted e Exchange of Information EOI EUSD tax is computed but not deducted e Tax Exemption Certificate TEC EUSD tax is computed but not deducted By default the option is left unchecked If you do not indicate any EUSD option then EUSD option will not be applicable for the segment q4 ORACLE 4 2 1 3 Note This functionality is applicable only for the Fund Manager module Settlement Level Mandatory Indicate whether the payment amount must be compared with the fund base currency amount or the transaction currency amount while pro
276. entry screen in the system is discussed on ORACLE 5 9 1 1 Note on Scheme Cross Reference Number The Bulk Client would wish to export in the hand off files a unique identifying number for each upload type that might be different from that of the Oracle FLEXCUBE generated identification In such cases it is possible to set a reference between the Oracle FLEXCUBE identification and the unique identifying number given by the bulk client To specify such a request use the Scheme Cross Reference Number field for transaction and unit holder related data imports and the Fund Scheme Cross Reference Number for fund information related imports Effect of applying Scheme Cross Reference Number For example the Credit Card Number of investors can be a uniquely identifiable value In such cases the credit card number can be setup as an additional information and this field can be referred to here as a unique value by making it the Scheme Cross Reference number column in the Bulk Client AMC default maintenance This means that when the unit holder import file upload is performed the relevant Scheme Cross Reference Number field will be populated with the value given in the import file Note The Scheme Cross Reference Number value should be given in the appropriate field po sition in the import file This is not applicable where the Scheme Cross Reference Number is itself the Unit Holder ID for transaction and unit holder related
277. eporting purposes The option list contains the valid dividend component Ids maintained in the system RDR Parameters The Financial Services Authority FSA is an independent non governmental regulatory body FSA has proposed new regulations Retail Distribution Review RDR on Retail Advised portion of the Fund Market with effect from 1st January 2013 The Retail Distribution Review regulations ban the payment of commission on retail advised retail business after 31t December 2012 Execution only Business can be defined as transactions by investor post RDR without any advice from any advisor While Advised Business can be defined as transactions done by investor post RDR based on advice from advisor Post RDR neither front end nor trail commission can be paid on advised new retail business However payment of commission front end trail can continue on New Business 4 20 ORACLE classified as Execution only Business Commission payments can also continue to be paid on Legacy Business Post RDR the payment of commissions will depend on the classification of transactions Legacy Business Advised Business and Execution Only Business The RDR regulations will be applicable to UK domiciled advisor irrespective of whether they purchase UK funds or non UK funds The TAs for funds outside UK that are purchased as result of advice from a UK domiciled advisor will need to comply with RDR It will be required to as
278. er than zero and less than one hundred Mandatory Optional Select Yes to indicate that the derived load is to be processed as a mandatory load If you select No then the derived load is deemed to be an optional load A mandatory derived load will be applied or processed based on the criteria setup for this load An optional derived load will be applied based on the priority you assign to it depending upon the priority number you specify in the Priority No field in this screen Priority No Numeric Mandatory for optional derived loads Specify the priority number that will indicate the priority of application for the derived load Criteria Optional Specify any criteria that determine how this load is to be applied To specify the criteria click the Criteria link The Query Builder is opened and you can specify an SQL statement by the directives of which the load will be processed Tables Referred Window The derived load that you have created may be referring many tables in the system As you specify the details in the criteria Query Builder the check boxes corresponding to each of the tables referred are checked in the main screen in this window FDAP Income Mandatory Select to indicate derived load is FDAP income or not from the drop down list Following are the options available in the drop down list e Yes e No Basis Loads The basis of application of a load is not restricted only to the following parameters
279. er Import Time based job executed at pre defined intevds Non unit holder imports Event based jobs run on occurrence of unit holder import event Failed records export Event based job run on completion of one import cycle Setting up Bulk Import Clients The client from whom bulk information needs to be imported must be introduced into the FC IS system You can do so as follows 1 Identify the external client called the bulk client in the system by providing a profile for the same You can do this using the Bulk Clients Maintenance screen Access this screen through the Bulk Clients Defaults menu Browser Set up the information that would be used as default for import of any information from the bulk client If the import information files from the client do not contain the required data then the default information maintained for the bulk client in the FC IS system is used to furnish the same To set up the default information for a bulk client use the Bulk Clients Defaults Maintenance screen Access this screen through the Bulk Clients Defaults option in the Browser Click new icon to enter the details The following considerations must be borne in mind when you set up the default information for a bulk client in the Bulk Client Default Maintenance screen If any mandatory information required in the FC IS system is not found either in the import hand off file or the defaults maintained for the client the entir
280. er transaction types Unblock Lien Processing Transactions The system validates the details entered against the fund rules and issues an acknowledgment slip to the unit holder for the unblock transactions The fund manager allocates the unblock transaction based on the NAV declared for the fund or any special unblock price for that day All the other activities are the same as those followed for any of the transaction types Consolidation Transactions The system validates the details entered against the scrip based fund rules and issues an acknowledgment slip to the unit holder for the consolidation transaction The fund manager allocates the consolidation based on the NAV declared for the scrip based fund for that day or any other formula based price After the allocation the agency branch can print the confirmation rejection note The certificate related information is also captured either from aTe ORACLE 2 4 6 9 the fund or the unit holder based on the fund rule definition In the system consolidation transactions are supported only for scrip based funds Split Transactions The system validates the details entered against the scrip based fund rules for a split transaction The fund manager allocates the split based on the NAV declared for the scrip based fund for that day After the allocation the agency branch can print the confirmation rejection note The certificate related information of the certificate is
281. erator Accent anit Additional Operator a year In this screen you can specify the expression to derive performance fee in the same manner as condition builder The result obtained from the Expression Builder screen gets displayed at the Element Id field If the system encounters predefined factory shipped elements like RED_AMT SUB_AMT RED_UNITS or SUB_UNITS as expression element then the system generates the transactions as indicated below e RED_AMT amount based Net redemption transaction is generated e SUB AMT amount based Gross subscription transaction is generated e RED _UNIT unit based Gross redemption transaction is generated e SUB _ UNIT unit based Net subscription transaction is generated For outflow transactions the elements PF_VAL and CL_VAL are used for the performance fee calculation Operations on Performance Fee Rules You can perform the following operations of a performance fee rule record e New an unauthorized record will be created If you have rights for auto Authorization the record will be authorized e Modify an unauthorized record can be modified by the maker edit rights required e Delete an unauthorized record can be deleted by the maker You can not delete the unauthorized record created by amendment delete rights required e Authorize an unauthorized record can be authorized by anyone other than the maker authorize rights required
282. ered Invoke the Exchange Rate Maintenance Summary Screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the exchange rate records that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all the exchange rate records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the search parameters of the exchange rate for retrieving the records Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view The Exchange Rate Maintenance screen Detail is displayed in view mode 6 5 3 4 Deleting Exchange Rate Details You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete an exchange rate record Invoke the Exchange Rate Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the exchange rate record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the search parameters of the currency record in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the currency record that you want to delete The Exchange Rate Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record i
283. etail Screen Summary Screen Landing Page Keyboard Compatibility Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing provides keyboard compatibility in navigating through Side Bar and Toolbar of the Application Browser Navigating through Side Bar Side bar menu refers to the menus available in the Application Browser You can navigate through the side bar menus using Tab Key Shift and Tab Key and Arrow Keys The side bar menus include Menu Workflow Customer My Dashboard etc Tab Key e Tomove from the selected side bar menu header to the first element of the selected side bar menu container 10 2 ORACLE e To move the focus to the first enabled Action key in the toolbar from any of the side bar menu Note If the action keys are hidden then it moves to the first drop down menu Shift Tab Key e To move the focus at the selected side bar menu header e To move the focus to the selected side bar menu header when the focus is on any of the side bar Note If the element of the side bar menu container further opens its details in the dashboard then the focus will shift to the first element of the detail Arrow Keys e To navigate within the elements of the side bar menu container e To navigate between the side bar menus 10 3 3 Navigating through Toolbar You can even navigate through the toolbar options using keyboard 10 3 3 1 Action Key You can navigate through Action Keys using keyboard T
284. etails 0 0004 7 12 7 7 2 Deleting Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Details 7 12 7 7 3 Modifying FATCA Maintenance Detallls 0 ccccceccecessteeeeeenteeeeeeenaaes 7 13 7 7 4 Authorizing FATCA Maintenance Details 0 0 ccccciccccinsteeeeeennieeeeteenaaes 7 13 Setting p Loads sioi Sass cascades ecaca ci cine ceca eeectegac at pecas dace dececeeecapecenetd 8 1 Gull UOADS E i ise adet T ten et nde aah oe ek Pet eee de eee 8 1 8 1 1 Parameters that form Basis for Applying Load ccccccteeeeeeeenteteeeeenaes 8 1 8 1 2 Setting up Loads iN Syster rriei eieri iria ie Enr iE AEAEE 8 6 8 1 3 Creating Load Load Maintenance Screen uu ccceeeccenteeeeeeentteeeeeeenaas 8 7 8 1 4 Fields in Load Maintenance Screen 0 ccccccccssccccecesteeeeceeenteeeeeseenieeteeeeeaas 8 8 8 1 5 Derived Loads srsssareisiianiiiehriniaiir ianei EAE E AEE ea EE AENEA aE RTE 8 14 8 1 6 Setting up Derived Loads Derived Load Set Up screen asssnsnnn1ana 8 14 8 1 7 Fields in Derived Load Set up SCIeen c cccceceeececceeceeeeeteeeteeseensaeees 8 15 BTB Bass Load S ir a a ea ee ein ae ee ee 8 16 8 1 9 Setting up Basis Definitions ssssseeensrinnnrennnnennrnnnnrnrnrnnnnnrrrnarnennnnnnnnnna 8 17 8 1 10 Fields in Basis Load Screen seessrssnnrerrrnnrrrrnnrrnrrnnnnnerrnnnnenrnnnnrnrnnnane 8 18 8 1 11 Load Maintenance Summary Screen sseeeisnneeeinnseenrnnnreennnnnneeennn
285. etion 3 Specify any or all of the search parameters in the corresponding fields on the screen 4 Click Search All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you want to delete The KYC Ref Type Restriction Detail screen is displayed 6 Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database Authorizing KYC Ref Type Restrictions Record An unauthorized record must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize the interest rate details 1 Invoke the KYC Ref Type Restriction Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen 4 Click Search All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you wish to authorize The KYC Ref Type Restriction screen displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes an entity details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the transaction during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides res
286. f the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The KYC Ref Type Restriction Detail screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The KYC Ref Type Restriction Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the KYC Ref Type Restriction Summary screen 3 32 2 3 Viewing KYC Ref Type Restrictions Record To view the interest rate details that you have previously entered 1 Invoke the KYC Ref Type Restriction Summary Screen from the Browser ond ORACLE 3 32 2 4 3 32 2 5 3 32 2 6 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the search parameters in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you want to view The KYC Ref Type Restriction Detail screen is opened in view mode Delete KYC Ref Type Restrictions Record You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record 1 Invoke the KYC Ref Type Restriction Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for del
287. f the time zone code is where the server would be located Behind GMT Check this option to denote that the Time Zone being maintained is behind GMT Click Ok button to save the Time Zone captured in the system Note If there are multiple time zones within a country one Front office module agency branch has to be created and associated to each time zone The latest rule of the time zone incase it has been amended is updated during BOD processing Time Zone Maintenance Summary Screen To perform any operation on Fund ISIN association you must first retrieve the record from the database in the Summary screen You can invoke the Time Zone Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSTIMEZ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button e You can perform the following operations on a Time Zone View Edit Delete Authorize Amend Authorize an amended record 2 ORACLE Copy the Attributes Time Zone Summary Authorized Time Zone a Search Advanced Search Reset Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Time Zone Description Rule Effective Date Latest Rule DayLight Start Date DayLight Endl 9 1 3 Retrieving Record in Time Zone Summary Screen You can retrieve a previously entered record in the Summary Screen as follows Invoke the summary screen and specify any or all of the followi
288. f these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the record Amending Auto Replication Preference After an auto replication preference is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to an auto replication preference record after authorization e Invoke the Auto Replication Preference Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend only authorized records e Specify any or all of the details of the Income Distribution Setup in the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to amend The Auto Replication Preference Maintenance screen is displayed in Amendment mode Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the record e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing Amended Auto Replication Preferences An amended auto replication preference record must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The authorization of amended records can only be done from Fund Manager Module and Agency branch Module The process of authorization is subsequently the same as that for normal transactions Copying Attributes If you want to create a new auto replication preference having the same
289. f you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the record in the Record Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the record are retrieved The Bulk Account Client Code 720 ORACLE AMC Code Click Search button after you have specified the required details all records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve an individual bulk client detail from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value Example You can search the record for Bulk Account Client code by using the combination of and alphanumeric value Search by A The system will fetch all the records whose Bulk Account Client code starts from Alphabet A For example ACCB Search by 7 The system will fetch all the records whose Bulk Account Client Code has 7 For example ACT7 5 9 4 2 Editing Bulk Client Details You can modify the details of the bulk client details that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Bulk Clients Defaults Maintenan
290. fective in the system The process of authorization is the same as that of normal authorization process Copying Attributes If you want to create a periodic load having the same attributes of an existing periodic load you can copy the attributes of an existing periodic load to a new periodic load To copy the attributes e Retrieve the periodic load whose attributes the new periodic load should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy in the Actions list e Indicate the parameters for the new Periodic Load if required Computation of Trailing Fees The computation of trailing fees depends upon the method of calculation that is specified for the trailing fee load The fee can be calculated either using the Average Holdings approach or the Quarterly Average Holdings approach The method of computation also depends upon the entity for whom the fee is payable i e the From Entity The From Entity could be the fund the AMC or the unit holder The two approaches are explained below Let us suppose that the trailing fee has been set up with the following slabs From Amount To amount Return Value age 0 10000 1 25 10000 30000 2 50 30000 And above 3 50 Quarterly Average Holdings approach when the From entity is the fund or the AMC In this appr
291. ference type from the adjoining option list Ref Type Description The system displays the description of the selected reference type KYC Ref Type Restrictions Summary Screen You can invoke the KYC Ref Type Restrictions Summary screen by typing UTSKYCRE in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button KYC Ref Type Restrictions Summary Authorized Open Auto Invest Applicable Auto Invest Lag ag Reminder Lag EZAN EI Records per page 15 v E Authorized Open Auto Invest Applicable Auto Invest Lag Reminder Lag Transaction Type The following operations can be performed in the KYC Ref Type Restrictions Summary screen e Retrieving KYC Ref Type Restriction Record e Editing KYC Ref Type Restrictions e Viewing KYC Ref Type Restrictions Record e Delete KYC Ref Type Restrictions Record e Authorizing KYC Ref Type Restrictions Record e Amending KYC Ref Type Restrictions Record e Authorizing KYC Ref Type Restrictions Record e Copying the Attributes oi ORACLE 3 32 2 1 Retrieving KYC Ref Type Restriction Record You can retrieve a previously entered entity in the Summary screen as follows Invoke the KYC Ref Type Restriction Summary screen and specify the following The status of the entity in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the entities are retrieved The status of the entity in the Open field
292. fied entity here based on the details maintained at Single Entity Maintenance level Payment Options Section Next Payment Date Date Format Mandatory When you are setting up the Payment Details for the first time specify the next payment date on which the entity is to receive commission payment Payment Frequency AlphaNumeric Mandatory Specify the frequency at which commission payment is to be processed for the entity The following commission payment frequencies are available e Monthly e Quarterly e Half Yearly Payment Frequency Description Display Only The system displays description of the selected payment frequency Last Processed Date Display Only The system displays the last date when the entity commission was processed Last Payment No Display Only The system displays the payment number of the entity commission which was processed last GST Applicable Mandatory Indicate whether GST is applicable or not for the entity GST Rate Mandatory If you have indicated GST Applicable If you have made GST applicable specify the GST rate as a percentage Min Amount Reference Currency AlphaNumeric Mandatory This indicates the currency of the minimum accrued amount that can be paid to the entity Reference Currency Description Display only The system displays currency name of the specified reference currency here Minimum Payment Amount in Ref Ccy Numeric Mandatory Stipulate the minimum accr
293. for the tax computation Fields in Indexation Maintenance Screen From Date Date Format Mandatory Specify the date on and following which the indexation value is to be applicable for computation of capital gains income To Date Date Format Mandatory Specify the date up to which the indexation value is applicable for computation of capital gains income Indexation 5 Characters Maximum with a maximum of two decimal places Numeric Mandatory Specify the indexation value that is to be applicable between the from and to dates that you have specified You cannot specify duplicate indexation values for a period and for a given range you can only specify one value Indexation Summary Screen An indexation value you have specified for a given period must be authorized for it to be effective in the system You can use the Indexation Summary screen to authorize the value 780 ORACLE You can also perform the following operations on an indexation value record in this screen e Edit unauthorized values e View records e Delete unauthorized values e Amend authorized values You can only amend the current indexation value record and not any of the earlier records When you amend a value specified for a period it will come into effect when another user authorizes the amendment You can invoke the Indexation Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSINDE in the field at the top right corner of the Appl
294. fund has a restriction on the nationality of the entity as maintained in the Fund Residency Restriction list then reinvestment is not allowed at all Payment Percentage Alphanumeric Optional Mandatory if distribution mode is either Both or Full Payment Specify the percentage of income earned that the entity prefers to receive by way of payment If the distribution mode chosen is Both specify a percentage that is below one hundred percent If the distribution mode chosen is Full Payment this field contains one hundred percent as a default value If so you cannot specify any other value If the distribution mode chosen is Full Reinvestment and the reinvestment is disallowed for the selected fund this field contains one hundred percent as a default value If so you cannot change it Payment Currency 3 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Optional Specify the currency of income earned that the entity prefers to receive by way of payment Reinvestment Percentage Alphanumeric Optional Mandatory if distribution mode is either Both or Full Reinvestment Specify the percentage of income earned that the entity prefers to reinvest back into the funds of the AMC If the distribution mode chosen is Both specify a percentage that is below one hundred percent If the distribution mode chosen is Full Reinvestment this field contains one hundred percent as a default value If so you cannot specify any other value If the distr
295. g Data Mapping You can map data from external systems to FCIS using the FCIS Data Mapping Maintenance Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDDMAP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button ee FCIS Data Mapping Maintenance Detail 4S Enter Query FCIS Data Mapping Maintenance External System External System Details 1of1 Code Description FCIS Code External System Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Open Authorized Authorized Aie ORACLE 4 7 1 4 7 1 1 4 8 Fields in FCIS Data Maintenance Screen External System 2 Character Maximum Mandatory Select the external system from which the data needs to be mapped The options being e CAMS e TEMPLETON e KARVY e HSBC e Oasis External System Details Section Code Description Select the category of codes from factory shipped values available FCIS Code Select the corresponding factory shipped value available in FCIS for the specified category code External System Code 2 Character Maximum Mandatory Specify the external system code here Note If the code description selected from the available list is linked to any existing PARAMS system would display all valid codes irrespective of the maintenance User Event Mapping FCIS provides the facility to map the users responsible for ea
296. h button after you have specified the required details All the records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve an individual country currency association from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value For Example You can search the record for currency code by using the combination of and alphanumeric value that is Search by Z The system will fetch all the records whose currency code starts from Alphabet Z For example ZAR 6 3 3 2 Editing Country Currency Association Details You can modify the details of a country currency association that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Country Currency Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the country currency association records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records of the associations that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the reco
297. h fund The rules will apply cumulatively on all investment into the fund and they are called the fund rules as given below e Fund Demographics the basic profile of the fund including the name and effective date e Corporate Actions rules governing the processing of dividends and distribution of earnings derived by investors from investment into the fund e General Operating Rules guidelines for pricing policies automatic redemption check writing and so on e Shares Characteristics guidelines for scrip based and scrip less funds for certificate processing e Transaction Processing Rules the processing limits for each transaction type allocation rules limits for investor categories standing instructions and transaction requests coming through each communication mode e Fund Load Setup associating the fees charges or incentives to be applicable to investment transactions in each fund e Fund Formula Maintenance maintaining expressions for calculation of NAV or transaction base price for each transaction type e Fund Sale Country identifying the countries of domicile in which the AMC can offer the fund for sale e Fund Transaction Currencies identifying the currencies in which the AMC can accept investment into the fund e Fund Residency Restriction identifying the nationalities of investors that can invest in the fund A ORACLE e Specific Price Dates for funds identifying specific dates on which prevalent
298. h agency type Default Information for Fund Price Imports The only default information to be maintained for fund price import is whether authorized fund prices must be generated for the fund Specify this in the Generate Authorized Fund Price field You must also specify the Fund Scheme Cross Reference Number op ORACLE You can invoke the FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Fund Price Detail screen by typing UTDCDFP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Fund Price Detail i New 7 Enter Query Bulk Clients Details Bulk Client Code Distributor ID Bulk Client Name Distributor Client Defaults Generate Authorized Fund Price Other Details Fund SchemeiCross Check Fund Price Fluctuation Reference Number Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized 5 9 1 7 Default Information for Income Distribution Setup Imports You can invoke the FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Income Distribution Rule screen by typing UTDCDIDS in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Income Distribution Rule Detail i New 3 Enter Query Bulk Clients Details Bulk Account Client Code Distributor ID Bulk Client Name Distributor Client Defaults Generate Authorized IDS Other Details Scheme Cross Refe
299. hange to any of the fields defined in the template are replicated to all unit holder accounts belonging to the CIF when the Information Change is authorized The replication occurs at the level defined for the template CIF level changes made to CIF fields are replicated or Identification Type level changes made to Identification Type fields are replicated Additional Information Defaults For the additional information defaults the list shown is the additional information for which the valid values restrictive list are maintained as part of Additional Information Master Setup and Additional Information Valid Values Setup Other Defaults e Unit holder account type e RPO Code e Registration type e Preferred mailing mode e Individual fee category and sub category e Corporate fee category and sub category e Whether payment by FEDWIRE or ACH is indicated e Whether IRS Notification on account is to be validated e Whether redemption or switch requests by telephone are allowable e Whether check writing is allowable 5 9 1 14 Default Information for Check Book Requests Imports For check book request imports you must maintain whether check book requests are mandatory ame ORACLE You can invoke the FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Cheque Book Request screen by typing UTDBLCBR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Cheque
300. hanges to the record through an amendment Country Preference Maintenance Summary Screen After you have set up the country preferences you must have another user authorize it so that it would be effective in the system Country preferences for an unauthorized record will not be used in the system You can invoke the Country Preference Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSCOMPF in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Country Preference Maintenance Summary Authorized Open Country Code B CRRT Risk Level EUSD Options Advanced Search Records per page 15 v 1of1 Authorized Open Country Code CRRT Risk Level EUSD Options You can perform the following operations from this screen e Retrieving Country Preference Details e Editing Country Preference Details e Viewing Country Preference Details e Deleting Country Preference Details e Authorizing Country Preference Details oe ORACLE 3 29 2 2 3 29 2 3 e Amending Country Preference Details e Authorizing Country Preference Details e Copying the Attributes Retrieving Country Preference Details To retrieve a previously entered currency record 1 Invoke the Country Preference Maintenance Summary screen and specify the following The authorization status of the currency record in the Authorization Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the rec
301. hanumeric value as follows oad ORACLE Search by Z The system will fetch all the records whose currency code starts from Alphabet Z For example ZAR Search by 2 The system will fetch all the records whose interest rate ends by numeric value 2 For example 12 3 34 1 2 Editing Interest Rate You can modify the details of an interest rate that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Interest Rate Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the interest rate records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorization Status field You can only modify records of entities that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters of the interest rate details in the corresponding fields on the screen to retrieve the entity that is to be modified Click Search button All unauthorized entities with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The Interest Rate Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Interest Rate Maintenance Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in th
302. hat will use this currency 2 ORACLE 6 2 1 3 Specifying Multi Language Details 6 2 2 Click Multi Language Details button to access the Multi Language Details screen The following screen is invoked Multi Language Details Multi Language Details 1of1 Currency Code Currency Name Language Code Language Name The Currency code and the Currency Name specified in the Currency Input screen are displayed You can re enter the Currency name in the languages shown in the screen Refer the chapter Maintaining Reference Information in FC IS system for information about Multiple language support Making Changes to Currency Profiles After you have set up a currency you must have another user authorize it so that it would be effective in the system An unauthorized currency cannot be associated with any entity in the system Before the currency is authorized you can edit its details as many times as necessary You can also delete it before it is authorized After authorization you can only make changes to any of the details through an amendment except in the following circumstances The currency selected for deletion is in use as a source reference currency for an exchange rate source in the system There is at least one fund bank account maintained in this currency in the system There is at least one unit holder bank account maintained in this currency in the system The currency selected for
303. he Additional Information Head is linked If the additional information head being maintained is to be linked to a system parameter that has been maintained for the installation you must also enter the code of the specific system parameter to which the additional information head is linked The values maintained for the linked parameter are also applicable for the additional information head When you click on the Valid Values button you can select the system parameter to which the additional information head must be linked Specifying the data type Select the type of data that can be entered into the additional information field This specification can be made only for those additional information heads that are not linked to a system parameter In the system when a value is entered into the additional information field the data type of the entered value is validated by the system List of Values Screen When you click the Custom Values button for a selected information head in the Additional Information Maintenance screen the List of Values screen is opened Customvalues Add Info Custom Values 1of1 Language Code Label Code Value Code Label Description Default Value T No ala ORACLE 4 4 2 1 The selected Label Code and Label Description are shown in the header portion of the screen Any maintained values are listed in the lower grid portion of the screen in the Valid Value Details section
304. he Authorization Status field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search All records with the specified fields are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 5 Double click the record that you want to view in the list of displayed records The AGY Bank A C Mapping Detail screen is displayed in View mode Deleting an AGY Bank Branch Record You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered 1 Invoke the AGY Bank A C Mapping Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion 3 Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen 4 Click Search All records with the specified fields are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you want to delete in the list of displayed records The AGY Bank A C Mapping Detail screen is displayed 6 Select Delete Operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is physically deleted from the system database You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered 1 Invoke the Agency Branch A O Sum
305. he fund is generated e GL Export processing is done only for funds working on the current date e Updating of the latest rule for a fund is done only for funds working on the current date e The Beginning of Day outstanding units for a fund are only updated if the fund is working on the current date e After the system date change the fund holiday status change process updates the holiday status for all the funds and resets the transaction sing on status e Standing instructions escalation processing is done only for funds working on the current date The generation of standing instructions is done on fund working days and the generation date is arrived at taking into account the fund calendar after the standing instructions holiday rule has been applied e Amount unblock transactions as well as amount block escalations and amount block transaction generation for the fund are generated only on fund working days e Automatic redemption transactions are only generated for funds working on the current date 3 23 0 3 Restricting Transactions into Fund on Working Day On a working day for the fund you restrict sale of the fund if necessary On doing so the current date is marked as a holiday for the fund When a sale restriction is marked it must be authorized for it to be effective in the system When you restrict sale of a fund in this manner you can opt for either of the following options for transactions that have been enter
306. he tabs available Tab Key e To focus on the first element of the same tab Shift Tab Key e To move the focus to the first text field in the header of the screen Arrow Keys e To navigate through multiple tabs Data Table Navigation Data Table navigation involves navigating through the rows and cells of the rows in the table Tab Key e To navigate to the next cell in the row Shift Tab Key e To navigate to the previous cell in the row a ORACLE 10 4 1 3 10 4 1 4 Up and Down Arrow Keys e To navigate through Data Table rows Shortcut Keys To avoid focusing on pagination adding row deleting row and single view buttons of data table the following shortcut keys are available e First page Home e Previous page Page Up e Next Page Page Down e Last Page End e Add Row Ctrl Insert e Delete Row Ctrl Delete e Single View Ctrl i e Navigation to the form field after data table Ctrl Tab e Navigation to the form field before data table Ctrl Shift Tab Single View Screen Navigation You can open single view screen by using Ctrl I shortcut key Tab Key e To navigate between the fields Esc e To close the window Shortcut Keys To avoid focusing on navigation buttons the following shortcut keys are available e Previous Record Up Arrow Key e Next Record Down Arrow Key LOV Navigation You can open LOV window by pressing F4
307. his import must also be scheduled the same In the Recurring section specify the frequency at which the import of transactions and other information from the bulk client is required to be executed by the job It is important that you specify the same frequency as for the unit holder import In the Occurs section specify whether the import is to be executed on a daily weekly or monthly basis If daily then specify the number of days apart that the import must be executed in the Daily section In the Duration section specify the start and end dates that will signify the period during which the import is required to be executed If the import is to run without an end date then check the No End Date check box In the Event Code field in the Event tab select the Bulk UH option Save the job The Job ID is displayed by the system Note Typically the import of any information other than unit holder information is performed af ter the successful import of unit holder information Accordingly when the unit holder im port job is executed the system creates an event BulkUH for the execution and inserts it into the event log Now the system is ready to perform the other imports using this as a trigger for the execution of all the other imports oF ORACLE 5 6 Setting up a job for the export of records rejected during import To set up a job for the export of records that are rejected during import proceed in the manner
308. hoose the module the menu that is accessible to you according to the definitions made in your user profile are displayed 2 3 13 2 Logging in to Different Branch To login to a different AMC Fund Manager module click the Chg Brn button and choose the relevant branch in the AMC Branch field ORACLE 2 3 13 3 Main Menu Screen The main menu screen is as shown below You can choose any of the options from the left hand side of the screen Home Pavradions tata Pana Change Module Options Help Sign Off Menu Alc System Component Alc System GL Setup AGY Bank A c Mapping AMC Agent SLA AccountOfficer IFA AdHoc Price Admin Tax Agency Branch A O Agent Price Basis Asset Management NAV Auth Rep Auto Replicate Pref amp AutoSwitch Setup Back Data Propagation Bank Reconciliation Batch Branch Sign OfffOn Broker Journal Broker Maintenance Broker Migration Broker Payment Currency preference Broker Type Bulk Client Defaults amp CIF Addr Fund Map CIF Address Campaign Maintenance Cheque Book Request Cheque Printing Cheque Status Cheque Tracking Cheque Writing Status Corporate Actions Country Currency Country Preference Currency Cutoff Currency Maintenance Distributor SI Dividend Component Dividend Equilization Dividend Reversal EFT Setup Early Redemption Eleme
309. horization you can only make changes to a periodic load through an amendment The Periodic Load Maintenance Summary screen can be used for the following operations on periodic loads e Retrieving periodic loads for viewing e Editing unauthorized fee setups e Deleting unauthorized setups e Authorizing setups e Amending authorized setups You can invoke the Periodic Load Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSPERLM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Periodic Load Maintenance Summary Authorized Fund Product Group Product ID Open Fund ID Group ID ai FA Advanced Search Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Status Fund Product Group Fund ID Product ID Group ID Load ID From Entity Type s m 4 m 8 1 18 1 Retrieving Periodic Load To perform any operation on a periodic load record e Invoke the Load Maintenance Summary screen and specify the following The authorization status of the periodic load maintenance records in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the periodic load maintenance records in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved Whether Fund Product Group Fund ID Product ID Group ID e Click Search button after
310. horized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in Campaign Maintenance Screen In this screen you can maintain the following details Sal ORACLE 8 5 1 1 8 5 1 2 Campaign Code Mandatory Specify the code to identify the campaign Campaign Description Mandatory Specify a name to the campaign Campaign Start Date Date Mandatory Specify the campaign start date Campaign End Date Mandatory Specify the campaign end date The end date cannot be less than or equal to the Application date Fund Mapping Section Fund ID Mandatory Specify the fund which has to be mapped to the campaign You can also select the funds to be mapped from the option list provided The option list consists of valid and authorised funds maintained in the system Fund Name Display On selecting the fund ID the fund name is displayed Load Mapping Section Select Load Mapping tab to map a load with an override load Campaign Maintenance New 73 Enter Query Campaign Code Campaign Description Campaign Start Date Campaign End Date Fund Mapping Coad Mapping Campaign Criteria Load Mapping 1of1 E LoadID Load Description Overridden Load id Overridden Load Description a Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No 07e Authorized Be ORACLE 8 5 1 3 In this screen you can maintain the following details Load ID Mandatory Specify the load ID which should be m
311. ibution Setup Detail New 73 Enter Query Client Information Entity Type Entity Name Entity ID Description Details Fund ID Payment Currency Distribution Mode Reinvestment Percentage Payment Percentage ISIN Code Rule Applicable for All Fund Name Funds Currency Name Payment Details Reinvestment Details Routing Details Reinvestment Details 10f1 _ Reinvestment Unit Holder ID Reinvestment Unit Holder Name Reinvestment Fund ID Fund Name Split Pe Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Reinvestment Unit Holder ID 12 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Optional Specify the ID of the unit holder in whose account the income is to be reinvested When you select the ID of the reinvestment unit holder the name of the unit holder is displayed in the Reinvestment Unit Holder Name field The entity s default Unit Holder ID is displayed here If necessary you can change it Re investment Unit Holder Name Display Only The system displays the name of the Unit Holder based on the Reinvestment Unit Holder ID Reinvestment Fund ID 6 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Optional Select the ID of the fund in which the income is to be reinvested Fund Name Display Only The system displays name of the specified reinvestment fund based on the details maintained at Fund Maintenance level Split Percentage Numeric Optional Specify th
312. ibution mode chosen is Full Reinvestment and the reinvestment is disallowed for the selected fund this field contains zero as a default value If so you cannot change it Maintaining Payment Details As part of maintaining the payment details you can define the pattern in which the entity can receive income earnings in the form of payment The entity can receive the payment income either in the form of checks or through account transfers If you have chosen either Both or Full Payment as the distribution mode you must specify all information in this section oe ORACLE Click Payment Details tab in the Income Distribution Set Up Detail screen to specify the payment details for the entity Income Distribution Setup Detail New 3 Enter Query Client Information Entity Type Entity Name Entity ID Description Details Fund ID Payment Currency Distribution Mode Reinvestment Percentage Payment Percentage ISIN Code C Rule Applicable for All Fund Name Funds Currency Name E Reinvestment Details Routing Details Payment Mode v Payment Type Self v Third Party Details Third Party Reference US State Non US State Address ZIP Code City Transfer Details Alc No Branch Select Bank Account Alc Ccy Bank Name Alc Holder Name Alc Type IBAN Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Payment Mode Alphanumeric Mandatory From the list select the m
313. ic Load Maintenance Detail screen displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes a periodic load details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the periodic load during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the periodic load Amending Periodic Loads After a periodic load is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to an after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation Invoke the periodic Load Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the periodic load records that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of periodic loads that are authorized Specify any or all other search parameters for retrieving the records Click Search button All the periodic loads with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the periodic load that you want to amend The Periodic Load Maintenance Detail screen is displayed in Amendment mode Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the load Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes eae ORACLE 8 1 18 7 8 1 18 8 8 1 19 Authorizing Amended Loads An amended periodic load must be authorized for the amendment to be made ef
314. ication tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button indexation Maintenance Summary Authorized X Open X From Date E To Date El Indexation a Advanced Search EI Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open From Date To Date Indexation a m 3 26 2 1 Retrieving Indexation in Summary Screen You can retrieve a previously entered entity in the Summary screen as follows e Invoke the Exchange List Maintenance Summary screen and specify the following The status of the indexation record in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the record in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved From Date and To Date for which the indexation is maintained Specify the indexation value The adjoining option list displays the valid indexation values maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one e After you have specified the required details click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve an individual record from the Detail screen by doing query in the fol lowing manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen on ORACLE Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting
315. iled advisor to Advised Execution Only Business the system will display the following warning message Default Transaction Category has been overridden Do you want to continue The above validation is also applicable if you change the transaction category during edit amend operation In case of agent hierarchy if any entity in the hierarchy is domiciled in UK you should tag the transaction as Advised or Execution Business In such a case if you choose the transaction category as Legacy Business even if any one of the entity mapped in the Hierarchy is domiciled in UK then the system will display the following warning message Default Transaction Category has been overridden Do you want to continue The above validation is also applicable if you change the transaction category during edit amend operation The system will default the Transaction Category field based on the country of Domicile of Advisor RDR Applicable RDR Date and the classification of broker at UH maintenance screen In case the transaction has broker which is not mapped at UH level and if the intermediary is UK domiciled the system will default the transaction category to Execution For non UK domiciled intermediary the system will default the transaction category to Legacy Direct Business A ORACLE 4 10 2 The above validation is applicable if RDR Applicable is selected as Yes and the transaction date is greater than or equal to RDR
316. ils of validation if any that were overridden by the maker of the record during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the record Amending an AGY Bank Branch Record After a AGY Bank A C Mapping record is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from the Action List To make changes to a record after authorization 1 Invoke the AGY Bank A C Mapping Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization You can only amend authorized records Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen 4 Click Search All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you wish to authorize The AGY Bank A C Mapping Detail screen is displayed in amendment mode Select Unlock operation from the Action List to amend the record 6 Amend the necessary information and click on Save to save the changes Authorizing an amended AGY Bank Branch Record An amended AGY Bank A C Mapping record must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The authorization of amended records can be done only from Fund Manager Module and Agency Branch module The subsequent process of authorization is the same as that for normal transactions Copying the Att
317. ime Zone Maintenance Detail screen allows you to capture time zones for various modules You can invoke this screen by typing UTDTIMEZ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the time zone details gt Time Zone Maintenance Detail New 5 Enter Query Timezone Maintenance Time Zone Rule Effective Date Description Daylight Start Date Server Time Zone No Mi Behind GMT No Daylight End Date Offset From GMT HH24 MI SS Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in Time Zone Maintenance Screen Time Zone Mandatory Enter the Time Zone This can be captured for a particular entity Description Character Enter a brief description of the Time Zone specified Rule Effective Date Mandatory DD MM YYYY Enter the date from when the Time Zone has to be considered for any particular entity 1 ORACLE Daylight Start Date Mandatory DD MM YYYY Specify the date from when the Daylight Saving Time or Summer Time starts Daylight End Date Mandatory DD MM YYYY Specify the date from when the Daylight Saving Time or Summer Time ends Offset From GMT Mandatory HH24 MM SS Enter the time difference between the Time Zone and Greenwich Meridian Time Server Time Zone Check this option in order to specify i
318. in view mode 3 29 2 5 Deleting Country Preference Details You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a country preference record 1 Invoke the Country Preference Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the currency record that you want to retrieve for deletion 3 Specify any or all of the search parameters of the currency record in the corresponding fields on the screen 4 Click Search All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the currency record that you want to delete The Country Preference Maintenance Detail screen is displayed 6 Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a currency record 1 Invoke the Currency Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the currency record that you want to retrieve for deletion 3 Specify any or all of the search parameters of the currency record in the corresponding fields on the screen 4 Click Search All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the currency record that you want to delete The Currency Maintenance Detail screen is displayed 6 Select Delete opera
319. ing information is already setup in the system e The countries that must be associated with EUSD options must be set up in the system in the Country Maintenance Fields in Country Preference Maintenance Screen Country Code Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the country for which you wish to define preferences CRRT Risk Level Optional Specify the CRRT i e the Country Reputation Risk Table associated with the country The reputation risk level may either be High or Low High implies that it is a high risk country while Low indicates cautionary risk country ot ORACLE 3 29 2 1 While creating a unit holder if the unit holder domicile country is listed in the CRRT list then system throws up an error depending on the country risk level EUSD Options Optional You need to associate a EUSD European Union Savings Directive option with each country Based upon unit holder s country of domicile the corresponding EUSD option of that country will get defaulted during unit holder creation Alpha Country Code Maximum 2 characters Alphanumeric Optional You can assign a two character alpha code for the country After you have defined the preferences of a country you must have another user authorize it so that it would be effective in the system Before the record is authorized you can edit it as many times as necessary You can also delete it before it is authorized After authorization you can only make c
320. ing Detail New 9 Enter Query AGY Bank Branch Details Maintenance Module ID Transaction Type Payment Mode Fund ID Bank Details Bank Account Holder Name Branch Account Number Account Type Limit Amount Account Currency Default Account No IBAN Correspondent Bank Details Bank Code Account Holder Name Branch Code Account Number Account Type Limit Amount Account Currency Correspondent IBAN Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized For each collection center account you need to specify the following information in the AGY Bank A C Mapping Detail screen e The code of the bank and branch collection center e The type of account maintained in the collection center bank or branch e The currency of the account e The number of the account and the owner of the account e Whether the account is the default collection center account for the agency branch transaction type payment mode and fund ID combination You must maintain at least one default collection center account 3 27 0 2 Maintaining Default and Correspondent Payout Accounts In the AGY Bank A C Mapping Details Maintenance screen you can maintain payout accounts for a combination of e Agency branch module ID e Outflow transaction type either redemption switch out or transfer e Payment mode e Fund ID oes ORACLE 3 27 1 3 27 1 1 This would mean that you could maintain payout acco
321. ing periods e View existing clearing options for any of the Modes of Payment e Amend the authorized clearing periods During amendment or editing it is possible to alter the Clearing Period and set the Auto Clear Option During installation the modes of payment and the default clearing periods for each mode are entered into the system automatically Subsequently if you need to view or make a change to any of the clearing options you can retrieve the record in this screen by clicking on OK in this screen All the clearing options maintained for each of the modes of payment are displayed in the lower portion of the screen Static Maintenance for Switch Transactions Switch Privilege List Setup You can set up a restrictive list of switching between share classes for switch transactions in the Switch Privilege Setup Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDSWPRV in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button on ORACLE Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details Switch Privilege Setup Detail New 753 Enter Query From Share Class ID Switch Privilege Set Up 1of1 To Share Class ID Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized e Select the share class from which a switch transaction can be entered into in
322. ing the transaction requests from investors The teller will check all the application forms and enter the transactions in the system e Supervisor This role is responsible for authorizing the transactions entered by the teller group e Accounts Officer This role is responsible for opening maintaining and closing unit holder Accounts azg ORACLE 2 4 8 2 4 9 2 4 10 Conventions to be followed in Screens e The words screen and form noun are used interchangeably throughout the entire document They refer to the active interface presented to the user for the purpose of data entry operations throughout the system e Inthe screens all checkboxes can accept only two valid entries Yes or No If the user checks a checkbox a cross mark or a tick mark appears in the box indicating to the system that the value specified is a Yes If the box is not checked and is empty the value indicated to the system is a No For example if the On line Allocation checkbox has a cross mark or a tick mark in it it indicates to the system that on line allocation is to be allowed If the box is empty it indicates to the system that on line allocation is not to be allowed Entering Dates The user is advised to check all dates that he has specified in any of the forms before executing a Save operation Before You Login Before you attempt to log in to the Agency Branch component
323. ining Data Mapping ereina ae E E R 4 17 4 7 1 Fields in FCIS Data Maintenance Screen eeuiseeeeesseeeienreerennneeennnee 4 18 4 8 User Event Mapping cccccececeececcceecceeeeeeeeeeeeececeaaecaeceeeeeeeeeseseseenncaaeeeeeeeeeess 4 18 4 8 1 Fields in Event User Mapping SCreen cc ccceesecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeesentees 4 19 4 9 Maintaining Dividend Component Details ce ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeaeees 4 19 4 9 1 Fields in Dividend Components Screen cccceceeeeeeenceneeeeeeeteteteteens 4 20 4510 RDR Parameters ince ccccsidetg if se cea seceded E tecctid ded cectlawdd AE 4 20 4 10 1 Maintaining RDR Parameters cccccecccctenne eee ceennneeeeteseaeteeeeenaeeeeeseeaaes 4 22 4 10 2 Processing RDR Parameters 0 cccccccceccectetsee eee ceennneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeteesennaes 4 24 4 10 3 Front end Fees and Trail Commission Payments ccccceeseeeeeeeneees 4 26 Importing Bulk Client Information cccsseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 5 1 et UNtrOGUCHION sees sarees ate ain areca Mane le ai ae 5 1 DIZ PROCOSS sh cess taraa Tr dens dasaedav cet AT LATAE a AT EEATT Ta 5 1 5 3 Setting up Bulk Import Clients cccceeceeeecceccee cee eeeeee cece tee eeeeeaaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteees 5 2 5 4 Setting up Interfaces for IMport ccc cece eee eececeeeeee cece eter cette eeeeeceaaesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 5 3 5 5 Scheduling Import Interfaces to be executed 2 2 ece
324. ion note The check or the draft as specified by the unit holder that is equal to the redemption consideration handed over If the fund is scrip based the certificate related information including the denominations is also captured either from the fund or the unit holder based on the fund rule definition Wherever certificates are to be surrendered to the AMC the certificate numbers are captured and validated against the certificate information defined in the system Switch Transactions The system validates the details that were entered against the fund rules for switch transaction The fund manager allocates the switch based on the NAV declared for the fund or based on any other formula for that day or the last day of declaration of price If the switch allocation is partial on a given date the unit holder will receive multiple confirmation notes for the same transaction The other activities are same as those that are followed in a normal transaction as for any of the transaction types If the fund is scrip based the certificate related information including the denominations is also captured either from the fund or the unit holder based on the fund rule definition Wherever certificates are to be surrendered to the AMC the certificate numbers are captured and validated against the certificate information defined in the system aut ORACLE 2 4 6 5 2 4 6 6 2 4 6 7 2 4 6 8 Switch Transfer Transactions Accept IP
325. ion f f Date MICR Code Number EIN Tax Certificate Expiry Date Global Intermediary Identification Number GIIN Sunday _ Wednesday Saturday Monday Thursday Tuesday Friday Others Section Customer Interface Key Customer Online Interface No Cross Branching Allowed FLEXCUBEIS No Signed Of No Modulel Agent Type neanekong Finware Posting Nature of Business Module Agent Desc Effective Date for Capital Gains Switching Logic f lt Unit Holder Generation sl Logic F Corresp Address Bank Details AltLang Details CPF Account Types Def Broker Details AIA Get Additional Information Additional Information Details 1of1 El Otherinfo Field Field Value Input by DateTime Mod No Authorized by Open DateTime Authorized Check against the following fields in the additional tab e Other Info Field e Field Value Click on the Get Additional Information button in the screen After saving the above listed details in the single entity maintenance screen click on the Exit button 3 5 Maintaining Income Distribution Setup IDS Options The different entities involved in transactions in funds of the AMC avail of earnings resulting from their involvement For instance an intermediary such as a broker derives commission earnings from the transactions in the funds of the AMC Each of the entities could opt for any of the following ways of using earnings from
326. ion that will be used to derive the exchange rate for this currency pair It could be a direct or an indirect quote Fluctuation Allowed 5 Characters Maximum Numeric with a Maximum of 2 Decimals Mandatory Specify the default percentage by which the exchange rates can be overridden or within which they can be allowed to fluctuate for this currency pair This is defaulted to the value specified in the Source Maintenance record for this source but it can be altered at this stage Quotation Units Numeric Mandatory Specify the units of quotation that must be used in direct rates for this currency pair This is defaulted to the units specified in the Source Maintenance record for this source If the mode of quotation specified for the pair is direct then the default value cannot be altered If the mode is indirect then the default value may be altered Making Changes to Sources or Currency Pairs for Source After you have set up an exchange rate source you must have another user authorize it so that it would be effective in the system Exchange rates for an unauthorized source will not be used in the system Before the exchange rate source with its associated pair currencies is authorized you can edit its details as many times as necessary You can also delete it before it is authorized After authorization you can only make changes to any of the details of the source and currency pairs through an amendment except in the following
327. ional Specify the related staff of the investor Birthday Optional Specify the birthday of the investor No Of Transactions Optional Specify the number of transactions to be made by the investor to avail the campaign Re Activated Suspension Accounts OF RSP Optional Mention the RSP account number AUM Optional Specify the fund level corpus AUM i e Asset Under Management AUM Currency Code Conditional Specify the AUM currency You can also select the AUM currency from the adjacent option list The list consists of valid and authorised currency codes maintained in the system Currency Description Display The currency of the selected AUM currency code is displayed Investment Amount Optional Specify the amount invested by the investor Investment Amount Currency Code Conditional Specify the investor s amount currency code Currency Description Display The currency of the selected currency code is displayed This feature is available only for subscription switch in and RSP type of transaction If more than one campaign is running at the same time for a fund user will select the best campaign for the investor while capturing the transaction eae ORACLE 8 5 2 Campaign Summary Screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTSCMPMN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click the adjoining arrow The screen is displayed below Campaign Summary Authorized Open
328. ions on Data Elements You can perform the following operations on a data element record e New an unauthorized record will be created If you have rights for auto Authorization the record will be authorized e Modify an unauthorized record can be modified by the maker edit rights required e Delete an unauthorized record can be deleted by the maker You can not delete the unauthorized record created by amendment delete rights required e Authorize an unauthorized record can be authorized by anyone other than the maker authorize rights required 3 37 3 Element Maintenance Summary Screen You can invoke the Element Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSENMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Element Maintenance Summary Authorized Element ID a Advanced Search Reset Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Element ID Element Description sisa ORACLE You can perform the following operations in this screen Viewing an Element Maintenance record Modifying an Element Maintenance record Deleting an Element Maintenance record Authorizing an Element Maintenance record 3 37 3 1 Viewing an Element Maintenance record To view a record that you have previously input you must retrieve the same in the Element Maintenance Summary screen as follows Invoke the Element Maintenance Summary screen from the
329. is opened in view mode Parameter Setup Detail i New 5 Enter Query Parameter Maintenance Param Code Param Description Maintainable Yes Parameters 1of1 Param Value Param Language Param Text Sort Order The selected parameter code and description is shown in the header portion of the screen Any maintained values are listed in the lower grid portion of the screen The information maintained for each value is as follows e The identification for the parameter value in the Param Value field e The text or label representing the parameter value in the Param Text field For a given Param Value the system allows you to enter different descriptions for different languages i e you can describe the same Param Value differently in various languages e The serial number representing the sorting order of the parameter value in the Sort Order field Parameter values may be stored in languages other than the default language Click on the Details link under the column Param Language to view the list of languages in which the parameter value is stored in the system Adding a value to the list If the list is editable then the Param Text and Sort Order fields are enabled for editing and the Add link is available at the bottom of the list to enable any additions to the list The default language in which the codes are stored is also displayed in the grid To add a value click the Add link A new row is insert
330. istribution cycle in the AMC back into the funds of the AMC This option is available only for brokers and not for other entity types Further the entity can choose to have the income reinvested either in the entity s own default unit holder account or the account of another unit holder In the latter case the unit holder in whose account the reinvestment is proposed i e the Reinvestment Unit Holder must belong to the same AMC as the source entity e Both Choose this option to indicate that the entity prefers to have the income derived from an entire income distribution cycle in the selected fund divided into two portions receive one portion as payment and reinvest the remaining portion This option is available only for brokers and not for other entity types oe ORACLE 3 5 1 3 Note In some funds in which reinvestment is not allowed according to the Corporate Actions profile for the fund and corporate action type the entity cannot choose to have income earnings reinvested In such cases this field is locked with the Full Payment option dis played as a non editable default option Also the Payment Percentage field is locked with a default non editable value of one hundred percent displayed and the Reinvestment Percentage field is locked with a default non editable value of zero percent displayed If you have chosen the distribution mode in this field as Full Reinvestment or Both and the reinvestment
331. it them as many times as necessary You can also delete a default specification for a bulk client before it is authorized After authorization you can only make changes to any of the specifications through an amendment The Bulk Client Summary screen can be used for the following operations on bulk client default specifications Retrieving bulk client default specifications for viewing Editing unauthorized bulk client default specifications Deleting unauthorized bulk client default specifications Authorizing bulk client default specifications Amending authorized bulk client default specifications To invoke the Bulk Client Default Find screen click on Summary under the Bulk Client Defaults menu in the Browser You can invoke the FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Broker Summary screen by typing UTSENTMN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Single Entity Maintenance Summary Authorized Open Entity ID E Entity Name Entity Type Advanced Search Reset Records per page 15 v Authorized Entity ID Entity Name Entity Type 5 9 4 1 Retrieving Default Specifications Record for Bulk Client To retrieve a previously entered default specifications record for a bulk client Invoke the Bulk Clients Defaults Maintenance Summary screen and specify the following The authorization status of the entity in the Authorization Status field I
332. item of the Fund Manager component Scheduling Import Interfaces to be executed After you have set up the interfaces that will drive the import of information from an external client you must schedule their execution so that the imports can occur according to a pre defined frequency without manual intervention You must schedule all the three interfaces that have been set up for the import of bulk information You can do this as follows e For each interface through the Task Maintenance screen set up the corresponding interface ID as a parameter for the pre defined task set up for the interface Note Initially at the first instance when the interfaces are scheduled they are associated with the pre defined tasks in the Scheduler Services Task Maintenance facility The imple menters at the installation will perform this activity Subsequently the administrator at the installation would perform any change to the task e Through the Job Maintenance screen in the Maintenance menu category in the Fund Manager component set up each of the tasks as jobs in the system These jobs can be scheduled as follows e The import of unit holder new accounts and information changes must be set up as a time based job with a specific desired frequency e For the import of all the information sets apart from unit holder information you must set up an event based job e For the export of rejected records set up an event based job
333. kers Fund ID 6 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the ID of the fund from which the selected entity derives income which will be distributed according to the IDS options you are creating in this screen If the selected entity receives income from many funds then you must create the IDS options for the income from each fund in this screen as applicable if so requested by the entity When you specify the ID of the fund the ISIN Code of the fund is displayed in the ISIN Code field Note The ALL option is defaulted in this field and cannot be changed if the Rule Applicable for All Funds option has been chosen In such a case the IDS options being defined would be applicable for income earned by the selected entity from all funds Also if specific op tions need to be defined for an individual fund they can be defined separately Such spe cific options if defined for an individual fund would take precedence only for income earnings from the fund for which they are defined over options defined for ALL funds oat ORACLE ISIN Code 12 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the ISIN Code of the selected fund If you specify the ISIN Code of a fund the ID of the fund is displayed in the Fund field Note The ALL option is defaulted in this field and cannot be changed if the Rule Applicable for All Funds option has been chosen In such a case the IDS options being defined woul
334. l Specify the GIIN issue date The GIIN issue date cannot be greater than the application date GIIN Expiry Date Date Format Optional Specify the GIIN expiry date The GIIN expiry date cannot be lesser than the GIIN issue date ae ORACLE Global Intermediary Identification Number GIIN Alphanumeric Optional You can select or specify the GIIN from the adjoining option list GIIN Verified Flag Display System displays the GIIN verified flag based on the GIIN If you specify the GIIN then GIIN verified flag gets displayed as No If you select the GIIN then GIIN verified Flag gets displayed as Yes WeekEnd The Fund Manager System weekend options that were designated at the time of installation will be considered as default options for an AMC but you can alter them if necessary while setting up the AMC record in the Single Entity Maintenance screen You can only specify two days as weekend days The days you specify here are defaulted as weekend holidays for the AMC in the AMC calendar Section Alphanumeric Optional Specify any descriptive text about or qualification for the AMC being maintained Cross Branching Allowed Optional Select Yes if you want to allow cross branching for the specified entity ID from the adjoining drop down list If you need to disallow cross branching then select No from the adjoining drop down list Online Interface Optional Select Yes to utilize the cre
335. l be tagged to the relevant unit holder Scheme Cross Reference Numbers for Fund Information Related Imports For fund information related imports the scheme cross reference number can be set as any of the following e Fund ID e Fund Identification Number e Fund Ticker Symbol Specifying Generation of System Reference Numbers It is required in the FC IS system that the reference numbers be mentioned along with the unit holder new account details and the transaction details If this option is specified the system will generate reference numbers wherever the reference number field in the import file is empty Specifying Checking of Duplicates during Imports You can choose this indicate that all the records that have duplicate Scheme Cross Reference Number values should be rejected when the transaction or unit holder import file up loads are performed If this option is not chosen the following processes would occur e The system ignores the duplicates in the case of unit holder uploads and creates unit holders in the system e For transaction uploads the system goes ahead and creates the transaction on behalf of the first Unit Holder ID occurrence found in the system Specifying Generation of Authorized Data during Import This option if chosen signifies which imported information sets would generate authorized records fund rules transactions unit holder accounts income distribution setup standing instructions
336. l not allow amendment of load details e Invoke the Load Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the load records that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of loads that are authorized e Specify any or all other search parameters for retrieving the records e Click Search button All loads with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the load that you want to amend The Load Maintenance Detail screen is displayed in Amendment mode e Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the load e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes 8 1 11 7 Authorizing Amended Loads After a load is authorized in the Load Authorization screen you can make changes to any of the details of the load provided the authorized load has not already been designated as applicable for a fund or load group If the load has already been mapped to a fund or a load group in the Fund Load Setup screen or the Group Load Mapping screen you cannot amend the load Provided amendment is possible for the load you can modify the slab details any derived or basis loads If there are no derived loads or basis loads created for the load you can set up these during amendment 5 21 ORACLE 8 1 11 8 8 1 12 8 1 13 When you amend an authorized load provided editing is possible the changes y
337. lation only if specifically requested for 4 5 Entity Additional Information Mapping After you have defined the additional information heads with their valid values in the Additional Information Maintenance screen you must map them to be applicable during the maintenance of entities To do so use the Entity Additional Information Mapping screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDENMAP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details Entity Additional Information Mapping i New 43 Enter Query Entity Type Entity Type Description AMC Distributor Id Distributor Label Code Label Description 4 5 1 Mapping Information Head to Entity In the Entity Additional Information Mapping screen e Choose the entity for which the information head must be mapped in the Entity field e Choose the AMC for which the mapping is applicable in the AMC ID field e All the defined additional information heads are displayed in the Label Details section with the Label Code and Description representing each information head 10 ORACLE 4 6 4 6 1 e After you have mapped all the desired information heads in this manner click the Save button to save your changes Setting up Fee Categories and Sub categories At the time of installation of O
338. lations e Finware Posting e Address Details Refer to the section Fields in the Single Entity Maintenance Screen in this chapter for details on each of these attributes Setting up Distributors The details that must be captured for a distributor are the same as those you capture for an AMC If your installation is a distributor installation you can view the record of the default distributor in this screen You can edit the profile You cannot however create a new distributor record in this screen The distributor installation feature is only available if your installation has specifically requested for it Maintaining Bank Details You can enter the record of a bank into the system by creating it as an entity You can set up a bank in the Single Entity Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by clicking the Detail option under the Entity menu in the Browser To set up a bank select the Bank option from the drop down list in the Entity Type field and then proceed to enter the details for the bank Maintaining Bank Branch Entity You can enter the record of a branch of a bank into the system by creating it as an entity You can set up a bank branch in the Single Entity Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by clicking the Detail option under the Entity menu in the Browser To set up a bank branch select the Bank Branch option from the drop down list in the Entity Type field in the Common Information sec
339. le Display The system defaults the US Indicia as Yes or No FATCA Classification Display The system displays the FATCA classification type FATCA Compliant Display The system defaults whether the linked entity is FATCA Complaint View Click on View to view the details of FATCA Maintenance of a linked entity Note During UT Transaction capture for US Indicia Available Funds if the FATCA Status of the unit holder or linked entity of a unit holder is Pending then the system displays a warning message as Maintain FATCA Classification for UH Linked entity Recalcitrant then the system displays warning message as Unit Holder or Linked entities mapped to the Unit Holder is FATCA is recalcitrant During LEP Transaction capture for US Indicia Available Funds if the FATCA Status of the unit holder or linked entity of a unit holder is Pending then the system displays a warning message as Maintain FATCA Classification for UH Linked entity Recalcitrant then the system displays warning message as Unit Holder or Linked entities mapped to the Unit Holder is FATCA is recalcitrant If the US Indicia is available for one of the customer during the CIF merge then the cus tomer account to which this account is being merged will also be US Indicia Viewing Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance You can view modify delete and authorize Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance detai
340. letion Specify any or all of the details and click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to delete The Auto Replication Preference Maintenance screen is displayed a ORACLE e Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database 3 28 2 5 Authorizing Auto Replication Preference 3 28 2 6 3 28 2 7 3 28 2 8 An unauthorized auto replication preference must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a record e Invoke the Auto Replication Preference Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option e Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All the records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Auto Replication Preference Maintenance screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes a record details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the record during the Save operation are displayed If any o
341. ls in the Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Summary screen You can invoke this mM ORACLE 7 7 1 7 7 2 screen by typing UTSFATMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Summary Authorized z Open Reference Number H FATCA Entity Type Entity ID FF Entity Category Type FATCA Compliant X Advanced Search Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Reference Number FATCA Entity Type Entity ID Entity Name Entity Category Type FATCA You can perform the following actions using this screen Viewing Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Details You can view previously entered details of Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Detail in the Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Summary screen as follows e Specify any or all of the following details in the Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Summary screen The status of the record in the Authorization Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records that involve the specified Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Detail are retrieved The status of the record in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records that involve the specified Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Detail are retrieved Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance De
342. lves payment by one entity to another Any entity that makes the payment is known as the From entity and any entity that receives such payment is known as the To entity Accordingly there are two basic types of loads from which all other loads derive e Fees Any payment for transaction charges that investors make to the AMC are fees e Incentives An AMC sometimes makes a special preference in terms of charges for initial investors and for those investors that have transacted with the AMC over a considerable period of time These preferences are known as incentives For instance an AMC may stipulate that for the first 10 investors that invest in a newly floated fund a differential favorable price would be applied This is an incentive The recipient or the To entity of an incentive could be a unit holder a broker or another entity A broker may also be required to pay a fee to the AMC for services rendered such as commission processing and payment reinvestment processing and so on If the unit holder is not any of the involved parties then that load is a commission that is the From or To entities are not unit holders Parameters that form Basis for Applying Load Fees incentives and commissions may be based on many different parameters or combinations of these parameters depending upon the requirements of the AMC While transacting the AMC may attach loads to any transaction be it a fee i
343. ly the same as that for normal transactions Copying Attributes If you want to create an indexation having the same attributes of an existing indexation you can copy the attributes of an existing indexation to a new indexation To copy the attributes e Retrieve the indexation whose attributes the new indexation should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy in the Actions list e Indicate the indexation number for the new indexation You can however change the details if required Applying Indexation When you have specified the indexation values for a period you must also configure the system to apply indexation for the computation of capital gains tax for an investor by taking the following steps oe ORACLE 3 27 3 27 0 1 e You must indicate the application of indexation for capital gains tax in the unit holder s account profile e Setup a load for the application of capital gains tax in the Load Maintenance e You must associate this load with the appropriate fund in the Fund Load Setup in the fund rules You must set up the following attributes for this association The applicability of indexation for the load The slab basis gross or net amount The basis of application as capital gains indexation The frequency of application as po
344. m the database in the Summary screen e Specify any or all of the following details in the KYC Maintenance Summary screen The status of the record in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records that involve are retrieved The status of the KYC records in the open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved Country Type Investor Category Document Type e Click Search button to view the records All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve the individual KYC record from the Detail screen by doing a query in the following manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value Example 3 105 ORACLE You can search the record for Investor Category by using the combination of and alphanumeric value that is Search by N The system will fetch all the records whose Investor Category starts with the alphabet N Ex NR 3 31 2 2 Editing KYC Parameters You can modify the KYC details that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as
345. management fees the same will required to be disclosed to the investors In the future the FSA would like to enforce all platforms to receive fees from investors for services provided The actual fee charging will be driven by business rules by mapping appropriate load ref type 4 21 ORACLE 4 10 1 Maintaining RDR Parameters You need to segregate into pre RDR and post RDR holdings while paying the commission You need to classify the transactions for the purpose of commission payments the front end load and trail commission management fees will be mapped as loads with appropriate ref types You can maintain RDR Parameters using RDR Parameter Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDRDRPWM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button RDR Parameter Maintenance E execute query RDR Applicable RDR Date RDR Warming RDR Hierarchy A 10f1 30 Country Country Name Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized You can specify the following details RDR Applicable Optional Select if RDR is applicable or not from the adjoining drop down list Following are the options available e Yes e No RDR Date Date Format Optional Specify RDR date RDR Warning Optional Select if RDR warning is applicable or not from the adjoining option list Following are the o
346. mary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion 3 Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen 4 Click Search All records with the specified fields are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you want to delete in the list of displayed records The Agency Branch A O Detail screen is displayed 6 Select Delete Operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is physically deleted from the system database oa ORACLE 3 27 2 5 3 27 2 6 3 27 2 7 3 27 2 8 Authorizing an AGY Bank Branch Record An unauthorized AGY Bank A C Mapping record must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a record 1 Invoke the AGY Bank A C Mapping Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the unauthorized option Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen 4 Click Search All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you wish to authorize The AGY Bank A C Mapping Detail screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from the Action List When a checker authorizes a record deta
347. matically prompt the User at login time to change the password System General Reference Number 1 Character Maximum Boolean Mandatory Enter the option of using a System General Reference Number If yes then the Reference Number for all the transactions will also be generated by the system If not the Reference Number must be specified at the time of entering the transaction Error Level Numeric Mandatory Enter the Error Messages Level e Enter 1 if you want the system to display an Error Message and not log it e Enter 2 if you want the system not to display an Error Message but to log it e Enter 3 if you want the system to display an Error Message and Log it o ORACLE 4 2 1 4 e If any other level is indicated the system will display Error Messages and Log it Online Display The online status of the branch at the time of viewing this record is displayed here Default Time Zone Optional Select the default time zone from the values available All time zones you have maintained through the Time Zone Maintenance screen are displayed in the option list Auto Clear Provisional Balance 1 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Indicate whether 100 outflow transactions include provisionally allotted units You can specify any of the following options e Option not allowed Provisionally allotted units should not be considered while processing 100 outflow transactions e Allowed Default checked Provisionally allot
348. mend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value For example you can search the record for Template ID by using the combination of and alphanumeric value as follows at ORACLE Search by T The system will fetch all the records whose Template ID starts from Alphabet A For example TMPL Search by 7 The system will fetch all the records whose Template ID ends by numeric value 7 For example TMP7 Search by 17 The system will fetch all the records whose Template ID contains the numeric value 17 For example TMP17 3 28 2 2 Editing Template Parameters You can modify the details of the template that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Auto Replication Preference Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields to retrieve the record that is to be modified Click Search button All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The
349. mmary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of entities that are authorized Specify any or all of the search parameters in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to amend The Interest Rate Maintenance screen is displayed in Amendment mode Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the entity Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes 3 34 1 7 Authorizing Amended Interest Rate Details Any amended interest rate details must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is subsequently the same as that for normal transactions 3 34 1 8 Copying Attributes If you want to create an interest rate definition having the same attributes of an existing interest rate you can copy the attributes of an existing interest rate to a new rate To copy the attributes Retrieve the interest rate record whose attributes the new interest rate should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter Click on Copy in the Actions list Indicate the parameters for the new interest ra
350. n by typing UTDENTMN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button To set up a bulk client select the Bulk Client option from the option list in the Entity Type field in the General Information section and then proceed to enter the details for the bulk client You must specify all information such as the common information basic information and contact details for any bulk client that you set up You must also capture the following additional details specifically for a bulk client Single Entity Maintenance Detail X New Enter Query General Information Entity ID Entity Name Entity Type Entity Type Description Entity Category Investor Category name Entity Category Type Individual Restrict Cross Branching No Nationality n bacon Country of Birth ene cae Country Of Domicile winy OTE sin b Country Desc Country of Incorporation 5 Country Of Incorporation Desc Basic Information Base Currency US Indicia Available No Tax Category Currency Name FATCA Status Tax Circle Bank Agent Code FATCA Classification TaxID Bank Agent Name Description Tax Certificate Effective E Authorized Signatory Employee Identification o Daie MICR Code Number EIN Tax Certificate Expiry Date Global Intermediary Identification Number GIIN Sunday _ Wednesday Saturday C Monday Thursday Tuesday Friday Others Section Customer Interface
351. n only be done from Fund Manager Module and Agency branch Module The process of authorization is subsequently the same as that for normal transactions Copying Attributes If you want to create a new KYC record having the same attributes of an existing record you can copy the attributes of an existing KYC record to a new KYC record To copy the attributes e Retrieve the record whose attributes the new Income Distribution should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy from the Action list e Indicate the ID for the new Income Distribution Setup You can however change the details of the new Income Distribution Setup if required a ORACLE 3 32 3 32 1 KYC Ref Type Restrictions According to FICA Financial Intelligence Compliance Act redemption payment transactions should not be processed until the required KYC documents have been received from the investor However you can configure the system to exclude certain reference types of transactions from the restrictions on redemption payouts even though the unit holder is FICA non compliant Use the KYC Ref Type Restrictions Detail screen to exclude ref types from redemption payout restrictions You can invoke this screen by typing UTDKYCRE in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the
352. n the Record Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The Entity ID The Entity Type Fund ID Policy Number Product ID e Click Search button to view the records All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen You can also retrieve the individual Income Distribution Setup detail from the Detail screen by doing a query in the following manner e Press F7 e Input the Entity ID e Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value Example aao ORACLE You can search the record for Entity ID by using the combination of and alphanumeric value as follows e Search by A System will fetch all the records whose Entity ID starts from Alphabet A Ex AGC17 AGVO6 AGC74 etc e Search by 7 System will fetch all the records whose Entity ID ends by numeric value 7 Ex AGC17 GSD267 AGC77 etc e Search by 17 System will fetch all the records whose Entity ID contains the numeric value 17 Ex GSD217 GSD172 AGC17 etc 3 5 2 2 Editing Income Distribution Setup Parameters You can modify the details of Income Distribution Setup parameters that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently au
353. nauthorized option from the drop down list e Specify any or all of the details of the fund type in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All fund types with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the fund type that you wish to authorize The Fund Type Maintenance screen displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes a fund type details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the transaction during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the fund type Amending Fund Types After a fund type is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to a fund type after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation e Invoke the Fund Type Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the fund type that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of fund types that are authorized e Specify any or all of the details of the fund type in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All fund types with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the fund type that you want to amend The Fund Type Maintenance screen
354. navigate between the pages using arrow buttons or specify the Page Number Closing Active Screen When you close the active screen the system prompts you that any information that you have specified in the active Detail screen will be lost if you close the screen To close the active screen click the Close button found at the right top portion of the screen The system will close the active screen at ORACLE 2 1 2 9 2 1 2 10 2 1 2 11 2 1 2 12 Getting Help To get help on the active screen click the Help button found at the right top portion of the screen The system will display help on the active screen Amending Authorized Records When you authorize a record it becomes effective in the system If after authorization you need to change the details in a record you can amend it The Amend operation is available only on authorized records You can access the amend operation through the Summary screen of the desired business function menu item It is important to remember that before a record is authorized you can make any changes to it by editing it After authorization you cannot edit the record but you can make any further changes to it by amending it When you amend a record and save the changes you have made it is saved as an unauthorized record You must subsequently authorize the record to make it effective To amend an authorized record in the Summary screen After a record is authorized it can b
355. ncentive or a commission which may be computed and applied on the basis of any of the following parameters Date For instance for any transaction request that is accepted on a certain date or a certain period bounded by any two dates an incentive may be applied on the amount of the transaction as follows Consider a slab as follows Slab From Date To Date Return Value 0 10000 15 10 2000 15 12 2000 5 Here the slab value may be reckoned as an amount or a number of units This means that for all transactions requested after 15 10 2000 and before 15 12 2000 for a volume that lies within the slab the percentage of the load incentive applied is 5 In such a case for a transaction coming in on 15 10 2000 if the transaction amount is 5000 Rand l ORACLE then the investor would be given an incentive amounting to an additional 250 Rand 5 100 5000 worth of units in the fund In the same case if the load were a fee then the investor would be given only 4750 Rand 5000 5 100 5000 worth of units in the fund Generally this is an early bird incentive in case of an IPO or subscription transaction period A load can also be applied based on a certain number of days months or years that the unit holder remains in the fund For instance Load PeriodReturn Value L4545 days5 L4M4 months4 L1Y1 year3 Let us suppose that a certain unit holder has entered into transactions with th
356. nd records of associations that are authorized e Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records e Click Search button All the records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the source currency pair that you want to amend The Source Currency Pair Maintenance screen is displayed in Amendment mode e Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the association e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing Amended Source Currency Pair Details An amended source currency pair must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is the same as the process of normal authorization Copying Attributes of Source Currency Pairs If you want to maintain a source currency pair having the same attributes of an existing source currency pair rate you can copy the attributes of an existing source currency pair to a new source currency pair To copy the attributes e Retrieve the source currency pair record whose attributes the new currency pair should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy in the Actions list e Indicate the new Source ID You can however change the details if required oN ORACLE
357. ndment mode Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the record e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing Amended Income Distribution Setup Details An amended Income Distribution Setup record must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The authorization of amended records can only be done from Fund Manager Module and Agency branch Module The process of authorization is subsequently the same as that for normal transactions Copying Attributes If you want to create a new Income Distribution Setup having the same attributes of an existing Setup you can copy the attributes of an existing Income Distribution Setup to a new Income Distribution Setup To copy the attributes oe ORACLE 3 6 3 6 1 3 6 1 1 e Retrieve the record whose attributes the new Income Distribution should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy from the Action list e Indicate the ID for the new Income Distribution Setup You can however change the details of the new Income Distribution Setup if required Setting up Payment Details for Entities You can define the payment details for entities which would be used for commission payments using the FCIS Entity Payment Maintenance Detail screen You can invoke the
358. ned in case of fund of funds For fund of funds the investors usually need to give a notice period which signifies the number of days in advance that the investor must notify the fund in order to receive the payment Side Pockets A side pocket is a special type of account used in hedge funds to separate illiquid assets from other more liquid investments Once an investment enters a side pocket account only the present participants in the hedge fund will be entitled to a share of it Future investors will not receive a share of the proceeds in the event the asset s returns get realized Investors who leave the hedge fund will still receive a share of the side pocket s value when it gets realized Investments that get locked into a side pocket cannot be redeemed until a realization event happens and the side pocket gets converted back into a tradable series The dealing and valuation frequencies and the net asset value of the side pockets will be different from that of the main fund Refer the following chapters for more details on the maintenances required for hedge funds and the calculation of performance fees e Maintaining Reference Information e Setting up Fund Rules ea ORACLE 2 3 3 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 3 6 e Other Fund Activities e Fund Rule Upload Formats Authorization Functions in Fund Manager Each of the reference data and fund related maintenances must be authorized within the system for them to be effective in pro
359. nee 8 18 8 1 12 Maintaining Fees Applicable on Periodic BaSiS 1 cccccccceeeeeetenestteees 8 22 BTI TAn FOCS eiee E E E E E AAN N 8 22 8 1 14 Maintaining Payment Groups esssseeeeeseeeeinnnneernnnseerrnnrenrrrnnneernnnneeenn 8 23 8 1 15 Ongoing Management Fe S cccccccccieeecceettneeeeeetnnneeeeeetnaeeeeeetneeeeeneeae 8 27 8 1 16 Periodic Logd SCOCN ecccccceceeeceeceentneeeeeeennieeeeeesnaeeeeeesneeeessenaeeteeenaaaes 8 27 8 1 17 Fields in Periodic Load Maintenance Screen ccccccccccccecsessteeeeeenaes 8 29 8 1 18 Periodic Load Maintenance Summary SCIOCN c cccceiee eee tee eeeeaee 8 37 8 1 19 Computation of Trailing FOCS ccccccccccseeeeetetcneeeeeettneeeeeeetneeeeenetiaeeeeentae 8 41 8 1 20 Methodologies of Trailer Commission Computation c cccccccceeeeees 8 42 8 1 21 Processing Trailer COMMISSION cccccceeceectetteeeeetnteeeeeeetnneneeeeettaeeeeentae 8 43 8 2 Maintaining Target Based Fee ccc ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeanes 8 45 8 2 1 Fields in Target Based Fee SCre n cccccccccceceeceesteeeeeeentneeeeeetnaeeeeneeae 8 45 8 3 Target Based Fee Summary Screen 00 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeaaeeeeeeeeaeees 8 46 8 4 Sharing of Entity COMMISSION 0 0 taen eea REEE AREER E 8 50 8 5 Maintaining Campaign eccceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaeeeeeeeaeeees 8 51 9 10 11 8 5 1 Fields in
360. ng arrow button Auto Replication Preference Maintenance Detail New 753 Enter Query Template ID Auto Replication Code Description Applicable For Description Select the fields for Auto Replication Preference Maintenance 1of1 Field Name Field Description Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized In this screen you must maintain the following details to maintain the template e A unique ID for the template e The level at which the automatic replication of changes made through Information Change is required either CIF level or Identification Type level Fields in Auto Replication Preference Maintenance Template ID Alphanumeric 6 Characters Maximum Mandatory Specify a unique identification for the automatic replication template being maintained Auto Replication Code This field indicates the type of entity for which the automatic replication template preferences are being maintained The entity types for which the automatic replication feature is available are pre configured for your installation The Unit Holder Information Change and Broker Info Spe ORACLE 3 28 2 Change options are displayed in this field and cannot be changed The appropriate description is displayed in the Description field Applicable For Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the level at which the automatic replication of changes made through Information Change
361. ng day for both funds The switch from leg is allocated at the prevalent price on transaction date and the switch to leg with the current price Ageing entries for the switch from leg are booked as of transaction date and those for the switch to leg as of the allocation date e The Specific Fund Price date is arrived at after applying the Prior or After holiday rule as specified in the fund rules Specific price dates for a fund if applicable are updated only on fund working days oe ORACLE e Periodic load processing is done for all funds only on the value date for periodic load processing which is arrived at after periodic fee computation and must be a fund working date e Trading net settlement processing as well as trading summary calculation is done only for funds working on the current date e Fund bank account transfer processing is done only for funds working on the current date e Dividend processing dividend reinvestment processing and the generation of dividend records are done only for funds working on the current date For those funds working on the current date the first dividend record will be generated For other dividends if the dividend record generation date arrived at is a fund holiday the Prior or After fund holiday rule is applied to arrive at a valid fund working day from the fund calendar If this date is the same as the system date the dividend record for t
362. ng details in the corresponding fields e The status of the record in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved e The status of the record in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all records are retrieved e Time Zone e Click Search button to view the records All the records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve the individual record detail from the detail screen by querying in the following manner Press F7 Input the Time Zone Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operations by selecting the operation from the Action list You can also search a record by using a combination of and alphanumeric value Example You can search the record for Time Zone by using the combination of and alphanumeric value as follows e Search by 1 The system will fetch all the records whose Time Zone starts from Alphabet Il For example IST and so forth e Search by 7 The system will fetch all the records whose Time Zone ends by numeric value 7 For example AGC17 GSD267 AGC 77 and so forth sa ORACLE Search by 17 The system will fetch all the records whose Time Zone contains the numeric value 17 For example GSD217 GSD172 AGC17 and so forth 9 1 4 Editing Time Zone Maintenance You
363. ng minimize button The minimized screens reside in the provided taskbar These minimized screens can be maximized either from the taskbar or from the windows menu option 33235A01 FMGKERDIST FMGKERDIST Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing v 12 0 ENG 04 23 20 Windows Internet Explorer le mie Home Interactions Tasks Preferences Change Module Options Help Sign Off gt Menu Alc System Component amp Alc System GL Setup amp AGY Bank A c Mapping AMC Agent SLA AccountOfficer IFA AdHoc Price Admin Tax Agency Branch A O Agent Price Basis Asset Management NAV Auth Rep Auto Replicate Pref AutoSwitch SetUp Back Data Propagation Bank Reconciliation Batch Allocation Auto Completion Batch Txn Updation amp Broker Comm Payment CMA Generate Switch transaction E Cheque Processing Commission Payment Status Change Confirm Redemption Corporate Actions Fund Corporate Actions Fund Online Check Data Extraction EOD Execution EOD Maintenance Entity Commission GO Generation Guaranteed Funds InteresCoupon Pmt Internal Interfaces amp Intra Day Check Lol Adjust Proc MINI EOD Execution Mock Dividend NAV Correction Online Interface Execution Pre End of Day Check Process Dividend Process Status Process Swift Msg Purge Data Raise Broker Commission Refresh Rule Send Receive Messages 10 1 ORACLE 10 3 1
364. ng the option list for the Fee Category Code The following information is displayed on clicking e The code and description for each label in the Fee Category Code and Fee Description fields e The investor category that the fee category is applicable for in the Investor Type field a6 ORACLE 4 6 1 1 4 7 The selected Fee Category Code and Fee Description are shown in the header portion of the screen Any maintained values for fee sub category are listed in the lower grid portion of the screen The information maintained for each fee sub category is as follows e The identification for the fee sub category in the Sub category field e The text or label representing the fee sub category value in the Description field Adding a new fee sub category to the list The Add link is available to enable any additions to the list To add a fee sub category click the Add link A new row is inserted at the bottom of the list Indicating Fee Sub Category Values For each fee sub category you add in this manner you must specify the following information as mandatory e A unique identifier for the fee sub category in the Sub category field e The text or label representing the fee sub category in the Description field Click Ok button The Fee Sub Category Value Maintenance screen is closed and you are returned to the main Fee Category Code Maintenance screen Here click the Save button to save your changes Maintainin
365. ng this User Manual it is important to understand the typographical conventions used in it 1 5 1 General Conventions Convention Type of Information Italic type Functional foreign terms Validations for fields on a screen References to related Headings Users Manuals For emphasis Numbered Step by step procedures Bullet 1 5 2 Keyboard Conventions pene Type of Information Keys All keys of the keyboard are represented in capital letters For example lt CTRL gt Shortcut All short cut keys are contained in brackets For example lt ALT SHIFT gt keys 1 6 Glossary of Icons This User Manual may refer to all or some of the following icons Icons Function Ea Exit H Add Row E Delete Row z Option List 1 7 Abbreviations and Acronyms The following acronyms and abbreviations are adhered to in this User Manual Abbreviation Meaning Acronym ADMIN User Administrator AGY The Agency Branch component of the system tg ORACLE AMC Asset Management Company BOD Beginning of Day CDSC Contingent Deferred Sales Charge CGT Capital Gains Tax CIF Customer Information File EOD End of Day EPU Earnings per unit FCC FLEXCUBE Corporate FC IS FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing FMG The Fund Manager component of the system FPADMIN FLEXCUBE Administrator ID Identification
366. nk account maintained in this currency If any of these conditions is true the country currency association record cannot be changed through an amendment The Country Currency Maintenance Summary screen can be used for the following operations on country currency mappings Retrieval for viewing Editing unauthorized mappings Deleting unauthorized mappings Authorizing mappings Amending authorized mappings only under the circumstances mentioned above You can invoke the Country Currency Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSCONCU in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Country Currency Maintenance Summary Authorized Open Currency Code a Country Code Advanced Search Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Currency Code Country Code 6 3 3 1 Retrieving Country Currency Association To retrieve a previously entered currency record Invoke the Country Currency Maintenance Summary screen and specify the following The authorization status of the country currency association record in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the country currency association records in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved oy ORACLE The Currency Code Country Code Click Searc
367. nk entry may be accepted as a title by the system 7 ORACLE Investor Type 1 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter the default Investor Type whether Individual or Corporate during unit holder data entry Marital Status 1 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter Single or Married as the Marital Status to default during unit holder data entry Resident Status 1 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter Resident or Non Resident as the Resident Status to default during unit holder data entry Sex 1 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter Male or Female as the Sex to default during unit holder Data Entry Mode of Payment 1 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter Cash Check or Transfer as the Payment Mode to default during Transaction data entry Redemption Mode 1 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter Amount or Units as the Redemption Mode to default during transaction acceptance Account Type 1 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter Current Savings or Fixed as the Payment Mode to default during Transaction data entry Language 1 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter English or Non English as the default language in which the system should display messages Password Valid For in days Numeric Mandatory Enter the minimum number of days after which the Users will have to change the Password At the end of this retention period the system will auto
368. nner e Press F7 e Input the Entity Type and Entity ID e Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value Editing an Entity Payment Record You can modify the details of a currency that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows 1 Invoke the Entity Payment Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the authorization status of the records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list 3 Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records 42 ORACLE 3 6 2 3 3 6 2 4 3 6 2 5 Click Search All unauthorized exchange rate records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The Entity Payment Detail screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Entity Payment Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Entity Payment Summary screen Viewing an Entity Payment Record To view the exchange r
369. not be able to modify the ID Roundoff Truncate AlphaNumeric Mandatory Indicate whether the decimal portion of the amount should be rounded off or truncated Round Off Truncate Rule AlphaNumeric Mandatory Indicate the rule which the system should use to round off or truncate the decimal portion of the amount Tax Computation Currency Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the currency in which the tax must be computed for the selected tax ID By default it is reckoned to be the currency of the selected country You will be allowed to specify the currency only for Unit Holders Tax Payment Currency Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the currency in which the tax must be paid for the selected tax ID By default it is reckoned to be the fund base currency You will be allowed to specify the currency only for Unit Holders Tax Payment Currency Name Display The system displays specified tax payment currency name based on the details maintained at Currency Maintenance level ISIN Code 12 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the ISIN Code of the fund for which you are setting up the tax slabs from the options provided This is applicable only for Unit Holder type of entity If you specify the ISIN Code of a fund the ID of the fund is displayed in the Fund ID field Fund Base Currency Alphanumeric Optional Enter the currency in which you would like the fund to be denominated Fund ID Alphanumeric Optional S
370. ns of this chapter e Click on Copy in the Actions list e Indicate the ID for the new exchange list You can however change the details of the exchange list if required Setting up Indexation Values Investors may opt for indexation to be applicable for the computation of income or capital gains on earnings from investments on which capital gains tax can be applied You must maintain the indexation values to be applicable for specific periods which can then be applied for the computation of capital gains income a9 ORACLE 3 26 1 3 26 2 You maintain indexation values to be applicable within a specific period bounded by a from and a to date You can use the Indexation Maintenance Detail screen to maintain indexation values You can invoke this screen by typing UTDINDEX in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to maintain the indexation indexation Maintenance Detail New 7 amp 3 Enter Query Indexation Maintenance From Date To Date Indexation Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized You must specify the indexation value to be applicable between two given dates Any transactions allocated between those two dates which result in application of capital gains tax with indexation will use these values
371. nt Maintenance Entity Entity Comm Share Entity IDS Entity Media Maintenance Entity Notepad In each screen you will only be allowed to perform those operations that are allowed in your user profile If you do not perform any activity for more than ten minutes the system will automatically log you out after displaying a message 2 4 Agency Branch The Agency Branch is the entity that actually interacts with the investors or unit holders in an AMC scenario In Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing the following operations are handled by the web enabled interface of the Agency Branch e The servicing and maintenance of unit holder accounts and daily unit holder operations e The servicing and maintenance of brokers e The entry maintenance and processing of transactions e The setting up of standing instructions for unit holders e The maintenance of the clearing status of payment instruments used in transaction processing e Other functions that include maintenance of deals for unit holders income distribution options letters of intent non tax limits and so on ae ORACLE 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 4 3 e Maintenance of static data such as system parameters defaults for the agency branch or the AMC additional information heads for unit holders fee categories for unit holders and mapping of information heads for entities Servicing Investors The service and maintenance of unit holder accounts involve
372. nt or the payout account is reckoned for a transaction refer to the section Printing Checks and Pay in Slips in the Dividend Maintenance chapter of FC IS system For each agency branch in FLEXCUBE you can maintain the appropriate collection center accounts as well as payout accounts to be used You can assign a default collection center and a default payout account You can also maintain other collection center accounts and correspondent payout accounts to service investors whose zip code is different from any codes serviced by the local default accounts Maintaining Collection Center Accounts In the AGY Bank A C Mapping Detail screen you can maintain collection center accounts for a combination of e Agency branch module ID e Inflow transaction type either subscription or IPO e Payment mode or sub payment mode e Fund ID a4 ORACLE This would mean that you could maintain collection centers for each agency branch to receive payments through any mode from unit holders for subscriptions or IPO transactions into each fund Use the AGY Bank A C Mapping Detail screen to designate the collection centers and payout accounts You can invoke this screen by typing UTDAGYBN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details AGY Bank A C Mapp
373. nt slip on saving the new account After the new account is authorized the unit holder number for the account is generated The request for opening an account could be made by any means through telephone fax etc Closing Unit Holder Account The unit holder fills out an account closure application along with the redemption slips to redeem the units held in various funds and hands them over to the agent The agent checks the details and enters them into the system The system marks the account as pending closure If the number of units in all the funds for a unit holder becomes zero then the system closes the corresponding unit holder account automatically An account once closed can be re opened Making Changes to Unit Holder Account The unit holder fills out a change request application and hands it over to the Agent The agent checks the details and inputs it into the system The agent will then hand over the acknowledgment slip to the unit holder Transactions Operations Making Transaction Requests If the transaction request is being made directly over the counter the unit holder fills out a transaction application and hands it over to the teller Alternatively the transaction requests can be made by any means such as by telephone through fax and so on The unit holder can pay by cash transfer check credit card or demand draft The teller checks the completeness of the form and inputs the transaction detail
374. nteed FUNS cccceeeeeeteeeeeeeenees 3 141 3 40 1 GF Policy Restrict Mapping Summary Screen cece eee eeee estes 3 143 Maintaining System Parameters ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 4 1 4 1 Introduction cen te ied ce heen en A S eine 4 1 4 2 Maintaining System Default Information 0 ccc eecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaas 4 2 4 2 1 Fields in Defaults Maintenance Screen ui ccecceccnteeeeeeetnteeeeeeetneeeenenae 4 2 4 3 Maintaining System ParameterS cccceceeceeeeeeeeee eee e tennessee enaeeeeeetaeeeeeetiaeeeenes 4 8 4 3 1 System Parameter Codes Maintenance Screen c ccccceeeeeetetteeeeteee 4 9 4 3 2 System Params Value Maintenance Screen cccccccceetteeeeeeetnteeeeetees 4 9 4 4 Maintaining Additional Information Heads 000 eccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeteeaeeees 4 11 4 4 1 Adding New Information H ad cccccccecsecceeecseeeeseenseeeesesaaeeeeteeeneeees 4 12 4 4 2 List of Values SCreen isco dates nh ede ee EO NEA 4 13 4 5 Entity Additional Information Mapping ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeseneanes 4 15 4 5 1 Mapping Information Head to Entity eccccccccccsseeeeeeeneeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeaeeees 4 15 4 6 Setting up Fee Categories and Sub categories cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeettteeeeeees 4 16 4 6 1 Fee Category Code Maintenance SCreen ccccccccesseeeeteettteeeeeteensaneees 4 16 4 7 Mainta
375. ntity Notepad oe ORACLE 3 1 3 2 3 Maintaining Reference Information Introduction Before you begin to use the Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing system FCIS you must ensure that all data that will eventually be used by the system to help you operate funds has been set up in the system You must prepare the system to recognize this data and process it the way you want it to Therefore you must ensure that the following activities are done e Setting up System Parameters e Setting up Reference Information including entities e Setting up Currencies and capturing Exchange Rates e Setting up Funds e Setting up miscellaneous maintenance functions Only after these maintenance activities are completed can you actually set up your unit holders and accept transactions for the funds The maintenance activities that fall under each of the categories mentioned above are available as menu items in the Maintenance Menu Item of the Fund Manager component This chapter deals with the first category the maintenance of reference information Setting up Reference Information Information that is static and will need to be set up only the first time and subsequently altered very little or not at all constitutes reference information This includes e Entities that the AMC would transact with such as agents agency branches banks bank branches registrars trustees bulk clients check vendors underwriters and custodians
376. ntity in the system for the selected currency Direct Debit Allowed Optional You can use this field to indicate whether direct debits may be raised in respect of the bank account you are defining for the entity Check the box to indicate that direct debits are allowed leave it unchecked to indicate that they are not IBAN 36 Characters Only Alphanumeric Optional Specify the IBAN International Bank Account Number of the account holder Bank Charged Indicate one of the following from the drop down list e Beneficiary e Remitter e Share Beneficiary Acct No Specify the account number of the beneficiary Beneficiary Code Specify the code of the beneficiary Beneficiary BIC Code Specify the BIC code of the beneficiary Beneficiary Info Specify the information about the beneficiary Intermediary Acct No Specify the account number of the intermediary Intermediary Code Specify the code of the intermediary Intermediary BIC Code Specify the BIC Code of the intermediary Intermediary Info Specify the information about the intermediary Further Credit Acct No Specify the further credit account number Reference2 Specify the second reference oe ORACLE 3 4 1 3 Maintaining Alternate Language Details for Entities The system allows you to capture entity details in an alternate language of your desire These fields are captured for information purposes only and no processing would be done on them Click Alt Lang
377. o Replication Preference Maintenance Summary screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTSAUTRE in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Auto Replication Preference Maintenance Summary Authorized Open Auto Replication Code B Template ID Applicable For Advanced Search Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Auto Replication Code Template ID Applicable For 3 28 2 1 Retrieving Template You can retrieve a previously entered template in the Summary screen as follows e Specify any or all of the following details in the Auto Replication Preference Summary screen The status of the record in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records that involve the specified unit holder are retrieved The status of the Template record in the open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The Template ID The Auto Replication Code Applicable For e Click Search button to view the records All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve the individual Template ID details from the Detail screen by doing a query in the following manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete A
378. o save your changes The Campaign Maintenance screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Campaign Summary screen Note While amending the campaign details the campaign end date should not be less than or equal to the Application date 8 5 2 3 Deleting Campaign Details You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered Invoke the Campaign Summary screen from the Browser Specify any or all of the following details in the screen The status of the transaction in the Authorized field If you choose the blank space then both the authorized and the unauthorized status records will be retrieved for the specified criteria The status of the records in the Open field If you choose the blank space then all the records are retrieved The campaign code in the Campaign Code field If you choose the blank space then all the records are retrieved The start date of the campaign in the Campaign Start Date field If you choose the blank space then all the records are retrieved The end date of the campaign in the Campaign End Date field If you choose the blank space then all the records are retrieved Click Search button to view the records All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify
379. oach instead of considering the value of holdings on each day leading up to the processing date the balances as on every quarter are considered for calculating the average on the processing date Average Holdings approach when the From entity is the unit holder In this approach the holdings held by each unit holder associated with the broker for whom the fee is being calculated are summed up for each day till the day of processing is reached and the average value is taken on that date pal ORACLE 8 1 20 Methodologies of Trailer Commission Computation The maintenance required for various methods of computation for trailer commission is indicated below Methodology Trailer commission Accrual frequency payment frequency Daily trailer commis Daily trailer commission Daily or greater Monthly sion based on AUM Daily AUM TC rate than daily should Quarter and Trailer Commission 365 be less than pay y TC rate ment frequency Half yearly Yearly Daily trailer commission Daily trailer commission Daily or greater Monthly based on AUM Man Daily AUM Manage than daily should Quarterl agement fee TC rate ment fee rate TC rate be less than pay y 365 ment frequency Half yearly Yearly Monthly trailer commis Monthly trailer commis Monthly or greater Monthly sion based on AUM on sion AUM on last day than Monthly Guarden last day of month of month TC
380. ode in which the entity prefers to receive the paid portion of the income earned either in the form of a check or an account transfer Payment Type Alphanumeric Mandatory From the list indicate whether the check payment instrument must be addressed to the entity self or a third party Third Party Details Section You will be allowed to maintain the third party details if you have selected Third Party for Payment Type Third Party Reference Alphanumeric Mandatory for Third Party payment Specify the name or reference of the third party for which the check instrument must be made out Address Alphanumeric Mandatory for Third Party payment Specify the address of the third party for which the check instrument must be made out ORACLE City Alphanumeric Mandatory for Third Party payment Select the city of residence of the third party for which the check instrument must be made out Zip Code 9 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory for Third Party payment Specify the zip code of the city of residence of the third party for which the check instrument must be made out US State Non US State Alphanumeric Mandatory for Third Party payment Select the state of residence of the third party for which the check instrument must be made out Transfer Details Section Select Bank Account Mandatory for Self payment type Select the bank account to which the transfer payment of
381. odify in the list of displayed records The Rate Maintenance Detail screen is displayed e Select Unlock Operation from the Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information e Click Save to save your changes The High Water Mark Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Rate Maintenance Summary screen 3 35 3 3 Deleting a Rate Maintenance Record You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered e Invoke the Rate Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion e Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Query All records with the specified fields are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to delete in the list of displayed records The Rate Maintenance Detail screen is displayed e Select Delete Operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is physically deleted from the system database 3 35 3 4 Authorizing a Rate Maintenance Record An unauthorized Rate Maintenance record must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a record e Invoke the Rate Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choo
382. of Incorporation Basic Information Base Currency Currency Name Bank Agent Code Bank Agent Name Authorized Signatory MICR Code Entity Category Type individual Entity Name Entity Type Description Investor Category name Restrict Cross Branching within Agent Nationality Desc Country Of Birth Desc Country Desc Country Of Incorporation Desc US Indicia Available FATCA Status FATCA Classification Description Employee identification Number EIN Tax Category Tax Circle Tax ID Tax Certificate Effective Date Tax Certificate Expiry Date Global Intermediary Identification Number GIIN C Sunday C Wednesday Saturday Monday C Thursday C Tuesday C Friday Others Section Customer Interface Key Customer Cross Branching Allowed Yes FLEXCUBE S No Module Agent Type Installation Nature of Business Module Agent Desc Effective Date for Capital Gains Online Interface No SignedOf No Finware Posting Switching Logic UnitHolder Generation Logic REE b k Details At Lang Details CPF Account Types Def Broker Detalls Additional Info Contact Information of Input by DateTime Mod No Authorized by Open DateTime Authorized Address Type Correspondence Address e Contact Person e Telephone Numbers 1 and 2 e Fax Number e EMail e SWIFT Address Address Lines 1 2 Each line is 80 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Address Line 1 is M
383. of the entity that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorization Status field You can only modify records of entities that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the details of the entity in the corresponding fields on the screen to retrieve the entity that is to be modified Click Search button All unauthorized entities with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the entity that you want to modify The Single Entity Maintenance screen is displayed Sap ORACLE e Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information e Click Save to save the changes The Single Entity Maintenance screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Single Entity Summary screen 3 21 1 3 Viewing Entity To view an entity that you have previously entered e Invoke the Single Entity Summary Screen from the Browser e Select the status of the entity that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all entities that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option e Specify any or all of the details of the entity in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All entities with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion
384. off Records To retrieve previously maintained records of currency cut off times e Invoke the Exchange Rate Summary screen and specify the following The authorization status of the currency cutoff time records in the Authorization Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the currency cutoff time records in the Record Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The Currency Name e After you have specified the required details click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen oes ORACLE Note You can also retrieve an individual currency cutoff record from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value You can search the record for Currency Code by using the combination of and alphanumeric value Search by Z System will fetch all the records whose Currency Code starts from Alphabet Z For example ZAR 6 6 4 2 Editing Currency Cutoff Time You can modify the cutoff time for a currency that you have already entered into the system provided it has not
385. oks to investors who wish to avail the check writing facility Such checkbooks are typically printed by external agencies called check vendors You can also maintain records for check vendors as entities in the system For check vendors you can maintain basic details such as contact information signatories and base currency You can set up a check vendor in the Single Entity Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by clicking the Detail option under the Entity menu in the Browser To set up a check vendor select the Check Vendor option list in the Entity Type field and then proceed to enter the details for the vendor You must specify all information such as the common information basic information and contact details for all check vendors that you set up Note You must associate a check vendor that you create a record for to the fund for which in vestors avail the check writing facility You can indicate the association in the Fund Entity screen Setting up Underwriters Underwriters are entities to which the AMC would pay trailing commission and ongoing management fees for underwriting any of the funds floated by the AMC You can also maintain records for underwriters as entities in the system For underwriters you can maintain basic details such as contact information signatories and base currency You can set up an underwriter in the Single Entity Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by clicking the Detail
386. on The valid value lists that you set up will be displayed in the option lists in the user interface in whatever operation a system parameter value is required to be picked up For instance when bank account types are maintained as a system parameter a value list containing the different account types is maintained as part of the System Parameter maintenance In the system in any screen that requires an account type as input information the value list will be displayed to the user to select the required account type You must define the various components required for validating Prudential Investment Guidelines Foreign Exchange Compliance under the parameter code INVESTMENTCOMP This is a necessary maintenance required if you have selected Prudential Investment Guidelines as part of the Fund Product categories The procedure for specifying the investment component code is the same for any other Parameter value to be maintained iii ORACLE 4 3 1 System Parameter Codes Maintenance Screen To view the system parameters codes and add to valid value lists for the same use the System Parameter Setup Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDPARAM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details Parameter Setup Detail i New 5 Enter Query
387. on head you cannot make it unrestricted again To define a set of valid values click the Valid Values button After you have defined the applicable valid values for the information head in the List of Values screen click the Save button in the Additional Information Maintenance screen to save your changes You can also specify the following information for an additional information head A ORACLE 4 4 2 Linking an additional information head to a system parameter You can use the Link to Param field to indicate whether the additional information head that is being maintained is linked to a system parameter that has been maintained for the installation Check this box to indicate such a linkage If a linkage is indicated you must also enter the code of the specific system parameter to which the additional information head is linked The values maintained for the linked parameter are also applicable for the additional information head When you click on the Valid Values button you can select the system parameter to which the additional information head must be linked You cannot maintain a restrictive list for an additional information head that is linked to a system parameter In the system when the additional information field that is linked to a parameter code is displayed for data entry a list of values button is provided for selection of the values defined for the linked parameter code Specifying the Param Code to which t
388. onfirm New Password field This new password entered will be verified encrypted and stored For security reasons you should change your password at regular intervals At the end of this interval the Change Password screen will appear automatically as soon as you login If you exceed the number of specified invalid logon attempts your user profile is disabled and must be created again Performing Record Maintenance Operations Detail and Summary screens There are generally two types of screens in the agency branch system Each business function is therefore operable in either or both of the following screens The Detail screen To perform any of the following operations use the Detail option e Enter the New Record e Query the existing record e Delete the existing Record e Unlock the existing Record e Copy the existing Record The Summary screen To perform any of the following operations on a previously entered business function record use the Summary option e View Authorized and Unauthorized Records e Advance query e Reset e Refresh Once you specify the search criteria for retrieving the records the system will display the appropriate records If there are more than 15 records you can specify the number of records a ORACLE 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 1 2 4 that has to be listed in the screen You can also navigate between the pages using the arrow buttons or specify the Page Number Note As a user y
389. onfirmation process arrives at the payment date check date based on payment lag This date should be a working date for the currency Dividend payments in respect of unit holders are in each unit holder s preferred currency The payment date for a unit holder should be a working date for the currency of payment Therefore a single dividend payment may still be made on different dates for different unit holders The payment date for a broker should be a working date for the broker payment currency Batch Functions Menu Allocation Menu allocation is done only for funds working on the application date Redemption Confirmation Redemption Confirmation is done only for funds working on the application date Dividend Payments The payment date must be a working day for the fund Dividend Reinvestments Value date for dividend reinvestment must be a working day in the system calendar If the reinvestment fund has a holiday on the reinvestment transaction value date the transaction date is set to the next fund working day Pre End of Day Checks The pre end of day checks are only performed for the funds working on the application date End of Day Activities e Broker reinvestment transactions are only processed for those funds working on the application date e Allocations for transactions of all types for all funds working on the application date are performed e Switch transactions are only allocated if the current date is a worki
390. options are e Component Based eS ORACLE e Declared NAV Holiday Rule for NAV Alphanumeric Optional In this field you can indicate whether the previous day s NAV Prior or the following day s NAV After is to be considered for market value calculation if there is an intermediate holiday during the trailer commission period Trailer Commission Transaction Pickup Basis Alphanumeric Optional In this field you can indicate the basis upon which the AUM for the trailer commission would be arrived at The options available are e Price date All transactions with price date in trailing commission period and which have a non zero holding in the trailer commission period are considered The commission would accrue as of the price date The AUM is computed as Total units as of price date NAV as of price date e Transaction date All transactions with transaction date in trailing commission period and which have a non zero holding in the trailer commission period are considered The commission would accrue as of the transaction date The AUM is computed as Total units as of transaction date NAV as of transaction date e Allocation date All transactions with allocation date in trailing commission period and which have a non zero holding in the trailer commission period are considered The commission would accrue as of the allocation date The AUM is computed as Total units as of allocation date NAV as of allocation d
391. or Servicing you can maintain static parameter data such as additional information heads fee categories for investors and codes for additional parameters You can also map these maintained parameters to be applicable for certain entities such as unit holders and brokers The additional parameters enable you to capture information relating to entities such as unit holders and brokers that are not otherwise captured in the system This chapter describes the definition and maintenance of these parameters in the system It also includes the definition and maintenance of basic system default data Default data is information that will be used as defaulted in any maintenance operation such as setting up investor accounts setting up entities setting up brokers and so on All the menu options pertaining to the maintenance of system parameters and default information can be accessed through the System Parameters menu item in the Maintenance menu category of the Agency Branch main menu The following screens can be accessed through this menu item e Defaults Setup Use this option to access the Defaults Maintenance screen where you can set up the system default information e Parameters Setup Use this option to access the System Parameter Codes Maintenance screen where you can view defined codes for parameters that will be used in the maintenance of entities as well as other data in the system and add any applicable valid values e Entity Mapping
392. or the Minors Bank Numeric Mandatory Enter the code of the default Bank for the system Check Validity Period Numeric Mandatory Enter the number of days for which a Check is valid by default during transactions Low Date Date Mandatory Enter the default Low date value for the system High Date Date Mandatory Enter the default High Date Value for the system High Amount Currency Mandatory Enter the default high amount value High Units Numeric Mandatory Enter the default high unit value Round Off Amount Currency Mandatory Enter the default value for round off amount VAT Percent 20 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Displays the default value of Value Added Tax VAT Percentage Amend Period Numeric Mandatory Enter the default Amendment period for the Fund Rule Transactions ta ORACLE Default Level 2 Characters Maximum Numeric Display This displays the hierarchy default number in the fund For example if the existing fund has a parent fund then the default level will be 2 High Counter Numeric Mandatory Enter the default high counter value Check UH Duplicates 1 Character Maximum Boolean Mandatory Select Yes or No to check for unit holder Duplicates Source ID Alphanumeric Mandatory From the list select the default exchange rate source for the AMC Country Code 15 Characters Maximum Alphanumeric Optional Displays the code given to the country where the cli
393. ords are retrieved The status of the currency records in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The Country Code EUSD Options CRRT Risk Level 2 After you have specified the required details click Search All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen You can also retrieve an individual Country Preference Maintenance from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner e 1 Press F7 e 2 Input the Country Code e 3 Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value For example you can search the record for country code by using the combination of and alphanumeric value Search by Z System will fetch all the records whose country code starts from Alphabet Z Editing Country Preference Details You can modify the details of a country preference that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows 1 Invoke the Country Preference Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the authorization status of the currency records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records of currencies
394. ords for paying agents as entities in the system For paying agents you can maintain basic details such as contact information signatories and base currency You can set up a paying agent in the Single Entity Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by clicking the Detail option under the Entity menu in the Browser To set up a paying agent select the Paying Agent option from the drop down list in the Entity Type field in the Common Information section and then proceed to enter the details You must specify all information such as the common information basic information and contact details for all paying agents that you set up 348 ORACLE 3 21 3 21 1 Setting up ISA Fund Managers You can maintain records for ISA Managers as entities in the system For ISA Fund Managers you can maintain details such as ISA Reference Number Minimum ISA Transfer in and Minimum ISA Transfer Out You can set up an ISA Manager in the Single Entity Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by clicking the Detail option under the Entity menu in the Browser To set up an ISA Fund Manager select the ISA Fund Manager option entity 2 from the drop down listin the Entity Type field in the Common Information section and then proceed to enter the details You must specify all information such as the common information basic information and contact details for all ISA Managers that you set up Single Entity Maintenance Summary Screen
395. orized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a record 1 Invoke the Policy Guaranteed Fund Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the unauthorized option Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen 4 Click Search All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Policy Guaranteed Fund Detail screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from the Action List When a checker authorizes a transaction details of validation if any that were overridden by the maker of the transaction during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the transaction Amending a Policy Guaranteed Fund Record After a Policy Guaranteed Fund record is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from the Action List To make changes to a record after authorization 1 Invoke the Policy Guaranteed Fund Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization You can only amend authorized records Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen 4 Click Search All records with the specified details that are
396. oth the loads applied as shown in the example above are based on periods and also on the original subscription transaction s that have generated the units being redeemed in a subsequent redemption transaction These loads have no other basis than these two factors Since they are based on the period for which the unit holder has continued with the fund they are known as aging loads Loading based on aging policy In the example given above the units value considered for the redemption transaction T3 could also be dependent on the aging policy designated for the fund If the aging policy is designated to be FIFO first in first out the aging would apply as follows Out of the 3000 units being redeemed 1000 units would be aged to 180 days as corresponding to the first subscription transaction T1 Therefore the load for the redemption of these 1000 units would be calculated as follows 3 100 1000 30 The remaining 2000 units would be aged to 90 days as corresponding to the first subscription transaction T2 Therefore the load for the redemption of these 2000 units would be calculated as follows 4 100 2000 80 Therefore the total loading for T3 with an ageing policy of FIFO would be 30 80 110 Amount For each amount slab the AMC could charge a fee This would be an amount based load Units Similarly as with amount based loads the AMC could charge a fee for each slab of units Date and Amount The fee charged
397. ou can perform any of the following operations before the record is authorized e Edit the specified options in the setup At this stage you can alter any of the details other than the fund and the unit holder ID e Delete the setup After authorization you can make changes to the options through an amendment operation To perform any of these operations Edit Delete Authorize or Amend use the Income Distribution Setup Summary screen aag ORACLE 3 5 2 1 Invoke the Income Distribution Setup Summary screen by typing UTSBRIDS in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Income Distribution Setup Summary Authorized Open Entity ID Entity Type H Fund ID Product ID zi Policy Number Advanced Search Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Entity ID Entity Type Fund ID Product ID Policy Number Payment Percentage Reinvest 4 m Retrieving Income Distribution Setup Record You can retrieve a previously entered record in the Summary screen as follows e Specify any or all of the following details in the Income Distribution Setup Summary screen The status of the record in the Authorization Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records that involve are retrieved The status of the Income Distribution Setup record i
398. ou can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy in the Actions list e Indicate the currency code for the new currency You can however change the details of the currency if required Associating Country with its Currency The countries maintained in the system must be associated with their respective currencies This association is used in the Fund Rules setup for a fund where the base currency of the fund may be defaulted to the currency associated with the country of domicile of the fund oF ORACLE 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 To set up the country currency association use the Country Currency Maintenance Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDCONCU in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to maintain a new country currency association Country Currency Maintenance Detail New 453 Enter Query Country Currency Maintenance Country Code Currency Code Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Checks Before you associate a country with its currency it is desirable to ensure that the following information is already setup in the system e The countries that must be associated with their curr
399. ou can perform any of the operations in a Summary screen provided the op eration has been allowed for your user profile or role profile A user can perform any of the following operations for the purpose of record maintenance in any screen provided the operation has been allowed for the user profile Entering New Records The Detail screens in the system are opened in the Disable mode You can enable all the fields to enter the values in the fields To enable the fields click New To enter a new record in a Detail screen follow the steps given below 1 Click New Specify the record details as desired in the fields on the screen 2 Click the Save button provided 3 You must specify all mandatory details before you click the Save button If you do not the system prompts you to specify the same when you choose the Save button 4 When the Save operation is successfully completed a message Record Saved along with any ID generated for the record is displayed Editing Records If you specify incorrect or incomplete information while creating a new record an edit facility is provided to correct these situations You can edit amend to make changes before authorization is performed To edit amend a record click Unlock To edit a record in the Detail screens follow the steps given below 1 Retrieve the maintenance record that you want to edit by querying the record by pressing F7 and F8 2 Cli
400. ou make will be saved as unauthorized changes in the database You must subsequently authorize the record of the load again so that the changes are effected as authorized in the database An amended load must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is the same as that of normal authorization process Copying Attributes If you want to create a load having the same attributes of an existing load you can copy the attributes of an existing load to a new load To copy the attributes e Retrieve the load whose attributes the new load should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy in the Actions list e Indicate the new Load ID You can however change the details of the load if required Maintaining Fees Applicable on Periodic Basis Some fees or incentives are periodic in nature that is they may not be processed each time a transaction is requested or allocated but they are paid on a periodic basis For instance trailing commission paid to brokers is typically applicable over a period irrespective of whether any transactions have been entered Similarly a management fee charged by an AMC can be applicable on a monthly basis or a any other frequency irrespective of whether any transactions have occurred or not Trailing Fees A tr
401. ounty Code Entity Category Entity Type Investor Status Effective Date FundID TaxID 3 22 4 1 Retrieving Withholding Tax Details Record You can retrieve a previously entered entity in the Summary screen as follows e Invoke FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Summary screen and specify the following Fa ORACLE 3 22 4 2 The status of the entity in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the entities are retrieved The status of the entity in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the entities are retrieved Country Code Entity Category Entity Type Investor Status Effective Date Fund ID TaxiD Dividend Component ID Product ID After you have specified the required details click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve the individual Withholding Tax record from the detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input any Withholding Tax setup parameter Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value Editing Withholding Tax Setup Record You can modify the details of a withholding tax setup record that you
402. oup level The load computation method Nature of Load for management fee loads can either be Simple Slab or Weighted Average From and To Entity Types Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the two entities that are to be payees or recipients of the trailing fee The From entities could be any of the following e Unit Holder e Funds e AMC e Distributor The To entities could be any of the following e Broker a ORACLE e AMC e Distributor e Unit Holder e Agent e Product Administrator e Agency Branch e Account Officer e IFA From and To Entity Type Description Display only The system displays description for the entity types maintained as From and To Entity IDs respectively based on the details maintained at Entity Maintenance level Nature of Load Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the method of computation to be used for the trailing fee represented by the selected load This could be any of the following options e Average Holdings e Quarterly Average Holdings e Latest Balance e Average of Opening and Closing Balance e Average Holdings Across Funds e Pro rata of holdings across funds Nature of Load Description Alphanumeric Optional Specify description for the method you need to use for the computation of trailing fee represented by the selected load Action for Load Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the event at which the fee would be applied and computed The possible options are
403. ow complete It will begin again according to the frequency defined for the unit holder import interface Note Sequences 1 and 2 are performed by the execution of interface definition you have set up for the unit holder import Sequence 4 is performed by the execution of the interface defi nition you have set up for the non unit holder information import Sequence 6 is performed by the execution of the interface definition you have set up for the export of rejected re cords at ORACLE 5 7 The flow of sequences is illustrated in the following diagram Import of unit holder new accounts and information change records from bulk client Processing of imported unit holder information Creation of new and changed unit holder accounts in system database l Eror Raising of Event BulkUH TERMINATION OF BULK IMPORT PROCESS ERRORS LOGGED IN INTERFACE ERROR LOG TABLE Import of non unit holder information records from bulk clients Processing of imported non unit holder information Creation of new and amended transactions standing instructions and load override income distribution and fund price records in system database Raising of Event FAILEDRECS Export of rejected records and reporting of errors Errors during Import or Processing of Client Information If any error occurs during the import of unit holder information or the processing of the same then the BulkUH event is not raised by the system
404. ower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve an individual currency detail from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value Example You can search the record for currency code by using the combination of and alphanumeric value that is Search by Z The system will fetch all the records whose currency code starts from Alphabet Z For example ZAR os ORACLE 6 2 2 2 Editing Currency Details You can modify the details of a currency that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Currency Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the currency records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorization Status field You can only modify records of currencies that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters of the currency for retrieving the records Click Search button All unauthorized currencies with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the currency
405. pe Entity ID After you have specified the required details click Search button All the records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve an individual record detail from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input the Calendar Type Entity ID and Year Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value For example you can search the record for Entity ID by using the combination of and alphanumeric value as follows Search by D System will fetch all the records whose Entity ID starts from Alphabet M For example Direct Search by 7 System will fetch all the records whose entity ID Type ends by numeric value 7 For example AGENT7 Search by 17 System will fetch all the records whose Entity ID contains the numeric value 17 For example AGEN17 Editing Holiday Maintenance Record You can modify the details of a holiday that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Holiday Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the holiday maintenance record that you want to retrieve for modification in
406. portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to amend The Target Based Fee screen is displayed Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the record Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes 8 3 0 6 Closing Target Based Fee Details After a target based brokerage is authorized it can be closed using the Close operation from Action list To close a record Invoke the Target Based Fee Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the transaction that you wish to close Click Search button to view the records All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to close The Target Based Fee screen is displayed Click the Close operation from the Action list to close the record 8 3 0 7 Reopening Target Based Fee Details After a target based brokerage is closed it can be reopened using the Reopen operation from Action list To reopen a record after closure Invoke the Target Based Fee Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the transaction that you wish to reopen Click Search button to view the records All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to reopen The Target Based Fee screen is displayed Click the Reopen
407. ptions available e Yes e No RDR Hierarchy Optional wee ORACLE Select if RDR hierarchy is applicable or not from the adjoining option list Following are the options available e Yes e No Country Alphanumeric 8 Characters Optional Specify the country code This adjoining option list displays all valid country code maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Country Name Display The system displays the name of the country for the selected country code The system will determine the payment of commission by the classification of transactions such as IPO subscriptions subscription switch and transfer In where transaction date is less than RDR Effective date and advisor is UK domiciled broker as Legacy Direct Business Post RDR for UK domiciled advisor the system will track the transactions such as IPO subscriptions subscription switch transfer In and Trail Commission reinvestment as new business Based on the value of Transaction Category field at the transaction level the system will classify the transactions as either Legacy Direct Business Advised Business or Execution Only Business For Non UK domiciled adviser the system will default the Transaction category to Legacy Direct Business The defaulting of Transaction Category field will happen on clicking the Enrich Transaction button If you change the transaction category for non UK domic
408. r of AUM TC rate 4 payment frequency Yearly 8 42 ORACLE 8 1 21 In the Periodic Load Details screen the setup for each of these methods would be as shown below AFS Trailer commission Computation Accrual payment al Processing methodology method frequency frequency Daily Trailer Commission Average Daily Bal Daily Monthly based on AUM and TC rate ance Daily Trailer Commission Average Daily Bal Daily Monthly based on AUM Management ance with manage fee and TC Rate ment fee Monthly Trailer Commission Latest Balance Monthly Monthly based on AUM on last day of month Monthly Trailer Commission Average Daily Bal Monthly Monthly based on Average AUM for ance the month Monthly Trailer Commission Average of Firstand Monthly Monthly based on Opening and Clos Last Day AUM ing AUM for the month Quarterly Trailer Commission Latest Balance Quarterly Quarterly based on AUM on last day of quarter Quarterly Trailer Commission Average Daily Bal Quarterly Quarterly based on Average AUM for ance the quarter Quarterly Trailer Commission Average of Firstand Quarterly Quarterly based on Opening and Clos Last Day AUM ing AUM for the quarter Processing Trailer Commission Processing accrual of trailer commission The accrual of trailer commission for a fund or group of funds can be executed as a job which you can trigger in the Trailing Commis
409. racle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing the implementers set up codes for fee categories that will be deemed applicable for specific investor categories They also set up a list of fee sub categories that would be considered valid for each fee category The implementers set up these codes and values based on the requirements at each installation You as a user will be able to add to a list of fee sub categories for a fee category code However you cannot set up any new fee categories Fee Category Code Maintenance Screen To view a list of defined fee category codes or add any new fee sub categories use the Fee Category Setup Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDFEECA in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details Fee Category Set Up Detail New 43 Enter Query Fee Category Code Maintenance Language Description Language Code Fee Category Description Fee Category Fee Sub Category Value Maintenance 1of1 Fee Sub Category Description Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized When you open the screen choose the language for which you want to view the defined fee category codes in the Language field All defined fee categories for the selected language can be viewed on clicki
410. rameters such as countries identification corporation and occupation types account types investor categories fee categories and so on e Currency information such as the different currencies exchange rate sources and pair currencies On a daily basis you can also capture the prevalent exchange rates e Tax processing information that would be applicable to investor categories country tax laws cash dividends brokers and funds floated by the AMC e The different fees incentives or loads that would apply to transactions of investors in the funds of the AMC This includes fees such as contingent deferred sales charge CDSC trailing commissions and ongoing management fees e The holiday calendar for the AMC Maintaining Funds and Products In Fund Manager you can maintain the different funds that your AMC would offer to investors for investment If your AMC offers investment in umbrella funds or fund families you can maintain these in the system You can also maintain the different products for retirement plans or endowment policies and so on Fund Hierarchies Your AMC could offer investors opportunities to invest not just in a single fund but into umbrella funds or fund families You can maintain these hierarchies in the system Fund Rules For each individual fund you can maintain exhaustive guidelines for processing investment These guidelines are organized into different sets of rules which you can maintain for eac
411. rate 12 should be less than y payment frequency Half yearly Yearly Monthly trailer commis Monthly trailer commis Monthly or greater Monthly sion based on Average sion Average AUM for than Monthly Quarterl AUM for the month the month TC rate 12 should be less than y Average AUM for month payment frequency Half yearly Sum Daily AUM for the Yearly month Actual number of days in month Monthly trailer commis Monthly trailer commis Monthly or greater Monthly sion based on Opening sion Average of than Monthly Quarterl and Closing AUM for Opening and Closing should be less than y the month balance of AUM TC payment frequency Half yearly rate 12 Yearly Quarterly trailer com Quarterly trailer commis Quarterly or greater Quarterly mission based on AUM sion AUM on last day than Quarterly Half vearl on last day of quarter of quarter TC rate 4 should be less than ySany payment frequency Yearly Quarterly trailer com Quarterly trailer commis Quarterly or greater Quarterly mission based on sion Average AUM for than Quarterly Half vearl Average AUM for the the quarter TC Rate 4 should be less than el quarter payment frequency Yearly Quarterly Trailer Com Quarterly trailer commis Quarterly or greater Quarterly mission based on sion Average of open than Quarterly Half vearl Opening and Closing ing and Closing balance should be less than yeary AUM for the quarte
412. rch button All the records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view The Currency Cutoff screen Detail is displayed in view mode 6 6 4 4 Deleting Currency Cutoff Time Record You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a currency cutoff time record 6 26 ORACLE 6 6 4 5 6 6 4 6 6 6 4 7 e Invoke the Currency Cutoff Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the currency cutoff record that you want to retrieve for deletion e Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records e Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the currency cutoff record that you want to delete The Currency Cutoff Detail screen is displayed e Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database Authorizing Currency Cutoff Records An unauthorized currency cutoff record must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a currency cutoff record e Invoke the Currency Cutoff Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the currency cutoff records that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list
413. rds Click Search button All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The Country Currency Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Country Currency Maintenance screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Country Currency Maintenance Summary screen 6 3 3 3 Viewing Country Currency Association Details To view the country currency associations that you have previously entered Invoke the Country Currency Maintenance Summary Screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the records that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records B 10 ORACLE Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view The Country Currency Maintenance screen Detail is displayed in view mode 6 3 3 4 Deleting Country Currency Association Details You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a country cu
414. re reflected in the Indexation Summary screen 3 26 2 3 Viewing Exchange List Record To view an indexation list record that you have previously entered Invoke the Indexation Summary Screen from the Browser Select the status of the indexations that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorized field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify the other parameters based on which you want to retrieve the records Optional Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view The Indexation Maintenance screen is displayed in view mode 3 26 2 4 Authorizing Indexations An unauthorized indexation must be authorized in the system for it to come into effect To authorize Invoke the Indexation Summary screen from the Browser a2 ORACLE 3 26 2 5 3 26 2 6 3 26 2 7 3 26 3 e Select the status of the records that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list e Specify the parameters based on which you want to retrieve the records Optional e Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you
415. reated in the FC IS system For this option choose CIF from the drop down list in this field e Foreach CASA Customer Access System Account account in a CIF a corresponding unit holder may be created in the FC IS system For this option choose Account from the drop down list in this field The FC IS system will create corresponding unit holder accounts when the customer information is imported from FCC according to option you exercise in this field Note If you select either FCR or FCC as the Bulk Client Type then you must specify the Cus tomer Interface Key as mandatory information Bulk Client Type Alphanumeric Optional Select the type of client from which information is to be imported using the bulk interface This could be any of the following e FCC Oracle FLEXCUBE Corporate e FCR Oracle FLEXCUBE Retail Online Interface Optional This facility is also available for imports of customer information from FCC It allows you to control the uploading of customer information from FCC into the data stores in FC IS e To indicate to the system that the back end data stores in FC IS will be uploaded with the customer information i e the interface would be online check this box e To indicate that the uploading will take place on a batch or tanked basis without an online interface leave this box unchecked Print Rejected Imports Report 1 Character Maximum Boolean Mandatory Select Yes if a report con
416. records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the currency record that you want to delete The Currency Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database 6 2 2 5 Authorizing Currencies An unauthorized currency must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a currency Invoke the Currency Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser oo ORACLE 6 2 2 6 6 2 2 7 6 2 2 8 6 3 e Select the status of the currency record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list e Specify any or all of the search parameters of the currency in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the currency that you wish to authorize The Currency Maintenance screen displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes a currency details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the currency code during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the currency Amending Curr
417. reen e Double click the entity that you wish to authorize The Single Entity Maintenance screen displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes an entity details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the transaction during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the entity Fal ORACLE 3 21 1 6 3 21 1 7 3 22 Amending Entities After an entity is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to an entity after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation e Invoke the Single Entity Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the entity that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of entities that are authorized e Specify any or all of the details of the entity in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All entities with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the entity that you want to amend The Single Entity Maintenance screen is displayed in Amendment mode e Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the entity e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing Amended Entities An amended entity must be authorized for the am
418. reinvestment details for the reinvestment portion in the Reinvestment Details section e For entities other than brokers specifying the payment details for commission payments in the Payment Details section e Save your changes Fields in Income Distribution Setup Screen Client Information Section In this section select the code of the broker for whom you are creating an income distribution setup record Entity Type Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the type of entity for which you are setting up Income Distribution options You can select any of the following entity types as applicable e Accounting and Valuation Agent e Agent e Agency Branch e AMC e Broker e Bulk Client e Check Vendor e Clearing Agent e Custodian e Distributor e IFA e Registrar e Trustee e Underwriter For entities other than brokers the IDS options that you set up in this screen are applicable for commission payments only and only the Payment distribution mode can be set Entity ID Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the ID of the entity for whom you are creating the income distribution options in this screen The name of the entity that you select is displayed alongside the field Entity Name Display Only Based on your selection for Entity ID the system displays the corresponding Entity Name 20 ORACLE 3 5 1 2 Description Display Only The system displays description of the specified entity here based on the
419. rence Check Duplicates Number Fund Scheme Cross Reference Number Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized For income distribution setup import you must maintain e Whether authorized income distribution setup records are to be generated in the system me ORACLE e Scheme Cross Reference Number e Fund Scheme Cross Reference Number e Whether checking for duplicates must be done 5 9 1 8 Default Information for Redemption Check Imports You can invoke the FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Redemption Check screen by typing UTDBLKRC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Redemption Check Detail New 453 Enter Query Bulk Clients Details Bulk Account Client Code Distributor ID Bulk Client Name Distributor Client Defaults Check Duplicates No Scheme Cross Reference Number Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized For redemption check imports you must maintain e Whether checking for duplicates must be done e Scheme Cross Reference Number ou ORACLE 5 9 1 9 Default Information for Standing Instructions Imports You can invoke the FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Standing Instruction screen by typing UTDBLKS in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button D FCIS
420. rence record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter Multiple Languages Maintenance FCIS provides the facility to maintain multiple languages in the system You may select different languages at the time of installation However you may select additional languages 3 101 ORACLE at a later stage Existing Information entered in the default language gets copied to all the languages selected The Multiple Language Support Maintenance screen allows you to select languages in which information is stored in the system apart from the default English language A list of factory shipped languages is provided You may select the language codes that the system should support You can capture information such as the currency name fund name etc in the languages chosen in this screen The Multiple Language Support Maintenance screen can be used for the following operations on multiple languages e Retrieval for viewing e Selecting additional language codes e Editing an unauthorized language selection e Authorizing language codes selected e Amending authorized language selections You can invoke the Language Support Detail screen by typing UTDLNGSU in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button The following screen is invoked Language Support Detail 9 Enter Query Multiple L
421. rency is defaulted once you select the Source Default Fluctuation Allowed 5 Characters Maximum Numeric with a Maximum of 2 Decimals Mandatory Specify the default percentage by which the exchange rates can be overridden or within which they can be allowed to fluctuate Quotation Units for Reference Currency Numeric Mandatory Specify the units of quotation that must be used for direct rates for the reference currency Pair Currency Details Section Checks Before you set up the pair currencies for a source it is desirable to ensure that the following information is already setup in the system e The source for which the currency pair setup must be maintained has already been set up in the Source Maintenance e The currencies have already been maintained in the Currency Maintenance Pair Currency Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the currency that must be set up as a pair currency for the source from the drop down list An In Currency can be designated as a Pair Currency for a particular reference currency only if the validity period transition period for the currency has not commenced At that point when the validity period commences no exchange rates can be maintained for this currency The Pair Currency is already set up for the source you have to only select the pair currency for which exchange rate needs to be maintained anka ORACLE 6 4 4 Quotation Mode Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the mode of quotat
422. rest Rate Maintenance Detail screen by typing UTDINRMN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details FCIS Interest Rate Maintenance Detail New 7 amp 3 Enter Query Effective Date Interest Rate Transaction Currency Currency Name Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Effective Date DD MM YYYY Numeric Mandatory Specify the date the system should consider for calculating the rate of interest Transaction Currency Mandatory Select the currency of transaction from the option list Interest Rate Numeric Mandatory Specify the Interest Rate for the currency you have selected Interest Rate Summary Screen After you have maintained Interest Rates you must authorize it to be effective in the system Before the Interest Rates are authorized you can edit it as many times as necessary Here in this screen you can view the summary of all the transactions on different dates currencies and interest rates Hence this screen helps you keep track of the interest rates one ORACLE You can invoke the FCIS Interest Rate Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSINRMN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Summary
423. retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to view in the list of displayed records The High Water Mark Detail screen is displayed in View mode 3 36 3 2 Modifying a High Water Mark record You can modify the details of a High Water Mark record that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows e Invoke the High Water Mark Summary screen from the Browser 312g ORACLE e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the unauthorized option e Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields to retrieve the record that is to be modified e Click Query All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to modify in the list of displayed records The High Water Mark Detail screen is displayed e Select Unlock Operation from the Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information e Click Save to save your changes The High Water Mark Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the High Water Mark Summary screen 3 36 3 3 Deleting a High Water Mark record You can delete only unauthorized records in the system
424. ributes If you want to create an AGY Bank A C Mapping record having the same attributes of an existing AGY Bank A C Mapping record you can copy the attributes of an existing AGY Bank A C Mapping record to a AGY Bank A C Mapping record To copy the attributes 1 Retrieve the AGY Bank A C Mapping record whose attributes the new AGY Bank A C Mapping record should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter oa ORACLE 3 28 3 28 1 2 Click on Copy in the Actions list Replicating Changes Made Modifications made to a unit holder account under a CIF through an Information Change operation might require to be replicated to all unit holder accounts under the CIF Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing provides the facility of configuring the system so that automatic replication could be achieved You can maintain a template that contains the fields in the Unit Holder New Account Maintenance for which you require replication of any modifications that are made through an Information Change The templates can be maintained at two levels CIF level and Identification Type level To maintain the templates use the Auto Replication Preference Maintenance Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDAUTRE in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoini
425. rieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option e Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All the records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Income Distribution Setup screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes a record details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the record during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the record Amending Income Distribution Setup After an Income Distribution Setup is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to an income distribution setup after authorization e Invoke the Income Distribution Setup Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend only authorized records e Specify any or all of the details of the Income Distribution Setup in the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to amend The Income Distribution Setup Detail screen is displayed in Ame
426. rization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you wish to authorize The KYC Maintenance screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes a record details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the record during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the record Amending KYC Details After the KYC details are authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to the KYC details after authorization e Invoke the KYC Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend only authorized records e Specify any or all of the search parameters of the KYC Maintenance screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to amend The KYC Maintenance Detail screen is displayed in Amendment mode Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the record e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing Amended KYC Details An amended KYC record must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The authorization of amended records ca
427. rized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the record in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all records are retrieved Policy Number Disable Click Search to view the records All the records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen site ORACLE 3 40 1 2 3 40 1 3 2 Youcan also retrieve the individual record detail from the detail screen by querying in the following manner e 1 Press F7 e 2 Input the Policy Number Disabled e 3 Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operations by selecting the operation from the Action list You can also search a record by using a combination of and alphanumeric value Example You can search the record for Policy Number by using the combination of and alphanumeric value as follows 1 Search by P System will fetch all the records whose Policy Number starts from Alphabet P For example POLS117 PLY118 PLC110 etc 2 Search by 7 System will fetch all the records whose Policy Number ends by numeric value 7 For example POL117 GSD267 AGC77 etc 3 Search by 17 System will fetch all the records whose Policy Number contains the numeric value 17 For example POL117 GSD172 AGC17 etc Editing a Policy Guaranteed Fund Record You can modify the details of a Policy Gu
428. rking day in any or all of the calendars On opening this screen by default the system holiday calendar for the current year which was set up at the time of installation with the designated holiday dates checked off against their respective boxes in each month You can use the Previous and Next links to navigate between years Select the day in the calendar and check the box alongside the date to add it to the list of Holidays Select the day from the list of holidays and uncheck the box alongside it to remove it from the list of Holidays Click Ok button to save your changes The changes must be authorized by another user to be effective in the system To maintain an AMC holiday calendar specify AMC in the Calendar Type field and select the AMC for which the calendar is being maintained in the AMC field Similarly to maintain a fund holiday calendar specify Fund in the Calendar Type field and select the fund for which the calendar is being maintained in the Fund ID field and the ISIN Code for the fund in the Fund ISIN field To maintain a currency holiday calendar select the Currency option in the Calendar Type field and select the currency for which the calendar is being maintained in the Currency Code field ao ORACLE 3 23 0 1 Guidelines for Holiday Calendars e The main system calendar must be maintained as mandatory reference information before the AMC and fund calendars can be maintained
429. rrency as a matter of course For such currencies the validity period must be captured as well as the fixed conversion rate against the Euro Once a currency is designated to be an In Currency it cannot later be designated to be an Out Currency e Euro Currency Select this option to maintain the Euro Currency in this screen This is typically an initial setup that will not be changed later on Once the Euro Currency is maintained by choosing this option it is disabled and no other currency can be designated as Euro Currency Validity From and To Dates Date Mandatory Specify the date range that represents the validity period for this In Currency During this validity period the currency will be used as a physical currency but the conversion rates will apply At the end of this period this currency will cease to exist and will be subsumed by the Euro Currency These dates may be altered on editing the record The Validity From Date must not be earlier than application date of the system The Validity To Date is defaulted to a date 3 years later than the specified Validity From date This can be altered but it must always be later than the Validity From Date and must not be earlier than the application date of the system Conversion Rate 6 Characters Maximum Numeric Floating Decimal Mandatory Specify the fixed conversion rate that will apply for this currency against the Euro currency This will be used in processing transactions t
430. rrency record Invoke the Country Currency Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the country currency record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the search parameters Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the country currency association that you want to delete The Country Currency Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database 6 3 3 5 Authorizing Country Currency Associations 6 3 3 6 An unauthorized country currency association must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a country currency association Invoke the Country Currency Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the country currency association that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the country currency association that you wish to authorize The Country Currency Maintenance screen is displayed Select
431. rt jobs have been executed the system creates an event FAILEDRECS for the execution and inserts it into the event log All records that have failed the imports are also identified and stored in the database for the purpose of exporting The system is now ready to perform the export using the completion of the two imports as a trigger for the execution of the ex port Refer the Interfaces User Manual in FC IS system for a fuller discussion of the Job Maintenance screen Processing Imported Bulk Information After you have set up the Scheduler Services to automatically perform the upload of bulk client information the import and processing of data will proceed according to the defined frequencies The import of each file containing bulk client information is given a unique Process ID The export of rejected records corresponding to the import is likewise is given a unique Process ID Therefore the Process ID is unique for each file that is imported or exported The job that you have set up for the automatic execution of the imports will trigger processes that e Perform all system and business validations for the data that is being imported e Update the system database with the imported data ae ORACLE 5 6 1 Note The validations for the imported data are performed in the same manner as they are ap plicable when you set up the default information for the bulk client in the Bulk Client De faults Maintenan
432. ry screen as follows Invoke the Rate Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorized field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Query All records with the specified fields are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view in the list of displayed records The Rate Maintenance screen is displayed in View mode ia ORACLE 3 35 3 2 Modifying a Rate Maintenance Record You can modify the details of a Rate Maintenance record that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows e Invoke the Rate Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the unauthorized option e Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields to retrieve the record that is to be modified e Click Query All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to m
433. s box is not checked Tables Referred Section Display Only After you have saved your criteria specification in the Query Builder and closed the same the SQL statement corresponding to the desired criteria appears in the Criteria box and the tables that have been referred in the execution of the criteria are clicked in this Box Criteria can be based on any one of the eight parameters given under the Tables Referred section They can be any of the following Ageing LOI Group Benefits Fund Price Header Unit Holder Additional Info Unit Holder Fund Units Unit Holder Fund Amount and Investor Load Maintenance Summary Screen After you have set up a load you must have another user authorize it so that it would be effective in the system Before the load is authorized you can edit it as many times as necessary You can also delete a load before it is authorized After authorization you can only make changes to a load or any components such as derived or basis loads through an amendment The Load Maintenance Summary screen can be used for the following operations on loads e Retrieval for viewing Bele ORACLE e Editing unauthorized loads e Deleting unauthorized loads e Authorizing loads e Amending authorized loads You can invoke the Load Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSLOADM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Lo
434. s deleted physically from the system database Ores ORACLE 6 5 3 5 6 5 3 6 6 6 Authorizing Exchange Rate Records An unauthorized exchange rate record must be authorized in the system for it to come into effect To authorize an exchange rate e Invoke the Exchange Rate Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the exchange rate record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list e Specify any or all of the search parameters of the exchange rate record in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the exchange rate that you wish to authorize The Exchange Rate Maintenance screen displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes an exchange rate details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the exchange rate during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the exchange rate maintenance Copying Attributes of Exchange Rates If you want to maintain an exchange rate having the same attributes of an existing exchange rate you can copy the attributes of an existing exchange rate to a new exchange rate To copy the attributes e Retrieve the
435. s field and the Income To field for the specified investor category Income To Numeric Mandatory Specify the maximum income for which this tax slab definition is applicable for the specified investor category This slab will apply to incomes that range between the values you specify in this field and the Income From field for the specified investor category Tax Percent 5 Characters Maximum Numeric including two decimal places Mandatory Enter the Tax Percent that is applicable to the given Investor category in the specified slab This percentage may be equal to or below one hundred percent but not greater Number of Decimals for Tax 1 Character Maximum Numeric Mandatory Indicate the rounding precision or the number of decimals to be applied on the withholding tax amount pertaining to the slab The decimal portion of the amount will be rounded off or truncated to the number of decimal places you specify here Computation of Withholding Tax Withholding tax is computed for funds for cash dividend corporate action types only This is applicable for normal UT investments Dividend tax can be computed based on the source oe ORACLE product and With Holding Tax maintained for the product For stock dividends the TDS Basis maintained in Corporate Actions profile is Tax exempt and the tax is not computed For each tax component the computation currency and payment currency may be specified as two different currencies so
436. s into the system If a fee is to be collected from the unit holder at the time of accepting the application form the system prompts for this IPO Subscription Subscription Transactions The system validates the details that were entered against the fund rules The fund manager allocates the IPO subscription subscription based on the NAV declared for the fund for that day After the allocation the agency branch can print the confirmation rejection note 216 ORACLE 2 4 6 3 2 4 6 4 If the fund is scrip based the certificate related information is also captured either from the fund or the unit holder based on the fund rule definition IPO Subscription Redemption Accept IPO Subscription Redemption request Enter IPO Subscription Redemption details Edit Yes Edit Dage _s Edit Delete Reject j No Authorize Reject Enter and authorize payment detals if needed Authorize Yes Amend the transaction and authorize the amendment vo Allot Confirm units Send To Registrar Redemption Transactions The fund manager allocates the redemption based on the NAV or any other formula that is computed for the fund for that day or the last fund price declaration day If the redemption allocation is partial on a given date the unit holder will receive multiple confirmation notes for the transaction After the allocation the agency branch can print the confirmation reject
437. s of inter dependent components e Fund Manager e Agency Branch The Fund Manager component automates all the fund related administrative functions within the AMC The Agency Branch component facilitates the maintenance of investor accounts and processing of investor transactions Fund Manager The Fund Manager is the entity that handles all administrative functions within the AMC This involves the following operations and activities 1 The set up and maintenance of reference and static data concerning all entities currencies exchange rate sources and exchange rates 2 The setup and maintenance of all funds floated by the AMC 3 Authorization of all data related to static information unit holder accounts information change requests amended transactions closure of accounts and bulk clients information The Fund Manager component therefore acts as an administrative core that seamlessly integrates with the rest of the system in an offline hand off mode or an online mode Maintaining Reference Information In Fund Manager you maintain basic reference information that would be used for processing in the system This includes 26 ORACLE 2 3 2 e Entities that the AMC would transact with such as agents agency branches banks bank branches registrars trustees bulk clients check vendors underwriters and custodians You can also maintain different AMC s as entities e The different values for static system pa
438. s of the fund type in the Authorization Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the fund types are retrieved The status of the fund type in the Record Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the fund types are retrieved The Fund Type After you have specified the required details click Search button All Fund Types with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen You can also retrieve the individual fund type detail from the detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input the Fund Type Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value For example you can search the record for Fund Type or Fund Type description by using the combination of and alphanumeric value as follows Search by M The system will fetch all the records whose Fund Type description starts from Alphabet M For example Mutual Fund Search by 7 The system will fetch all the records whose Fund Type ends by numeric value 7 For example 217 267 77 and so forth Search by 17 The system will fetch all the records whose Fund Type contains the numeric value 17 For example 3217 2172 and so forth ORACLE 3 3 2 2 Editing Fund Type You can modify the det
439. s the following operations and activities e Creating and maintaining new unit holder accounts e Setting up deals standing instructions letters of intent options income distribution options and non tax limits for unit holder accounts e Making changes to the information in authorized unit holder accounts e Closing unit holder accounts e Capturing details of authorized representatives for unit holders For a fuller understanding of how unit holder servicing is facilitated in the system refer the Managing Investor Accounts Entry Maintenance and Processing of Transactions Applications for any transactions that the investors want to enter into using their accounts in the AMC are accepted and processed in the Agency Branch The transactions are entered into the system and they can be tracked at all stages in the processing cycle The following transaction types can be processed in the system e IPO subscription transactions e Subscription transactions e Redemption transactions e Switch transactions involving switching of units from one fund to another for a unit holder e Transfer transactions involving transferring of units from one unit holder to another within a fund e Blocking of units lien processing e Unblocking of units lifting of lien e Consolidation of units e Splitting of units e Reissue of units e Enrichment of payment details for a transaction For a fuller understanding of how the entry and pro
440. saction No Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized For imports of new subscription redemption transfer and conversion transactions and amended transactions if indicated for the bulk client you must maintain Whether authorized transaction records are to be generated in the system Whether it must be designated by default that payouts must be made to the unit holder bank account only Whether a system generated reference number is indicated Scheme Cross Reference Number Fund Scheme Cross Reference Number Whether checking for duplicates must be done Default date format Communication mode Sub payment mode Letter of Intent LOI applicable Whether translation is required Whether amended transactions must be uploaded Note If you wish to disallow upload of amended transactions for a particular client select the No option in the Allow Amendment field when you are setting up the default information for the bulk client During bulk upload of transactions from a bulk client amended orders are not imported if disallowed in the Bulk Clients Defaults Maintenance for the bulk client but errors are logged in respect of them 2 ORACLE 5 9 1 11 Default Information for Transaction Load Override Imports For load override imports you must maintain whether authorized load override records must be generated in the system You can invoke the FCIS Bulk Clients Defaults Transaction
441. se the unauthorized option e Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Query All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Rate Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from the Action List When a checker authorizes a record details of validation if any that were overridden by the maker of the record during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the record SI gt ORACLE 3 35 3 5 Amending a Rate Maintenance Record 3 36 After a Rate Maintenance record is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from the Action List To make changes to a record after authorization Invoke the Rate Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization You can only amend authorized records e Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Query All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Rate Maintenance screen is displayed in amendment mode Select Unlock operation from the Action List to amen
442. sion Accrual Processing screen 8 43 ORACLE You can invoke this screen by typing UTDTCAC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Trailing Commission Accrual Processing New 453 Enter Query FundiProductGroup Fund Product Group ID Description Specify the ID of the fund or fund group for which the trailing commission is to be accrued Processing payment of trailer commission The payment of accrued trailer commission for a fund or group of funds can be executed as a job which you can trigger in the Trailing Commission Payment Processing screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDTCPP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Trailing Commission Payment Processing New 753 Enter Query Fund ProductGroup Fund Product Group ID Fund Product Group Description Specify the ID of the fund or fund group for which accrued trailing commission is to be paid os ORACLE 8 2 8 2 1 Maintaining Target Based Fee On achieving target sales for a given period an agent broker is paid an additional fee brokerage The broker agent is eligible to receive a commission on total sales done by him in a given period You can maintain target based brokerage at AMC Fund Broker level using the Target Based Fee screen You can invoke this screen by typing
443. sisting of a list of rejected imports along with the reason for rejection must be printed by the system If not select No By default this field contains a Yes value a ORACLE 5 9 1 Print Successful Imports Report 1 Character Maximum Boolean Mandatory Select Yes if a report consisting of a list of successful imports along with the other details must be printed by the system If not select No By default this field contains a Yes value Bulk Clients Defaults Maintenance You can use this screen to map the default values for all information that must be applicable during bulk information import for a particular bulk client for a particular AMC or Distributor For any import from any bulk client the information specified in the hand off file will be accepted and imported as part of the imported record even if a specification exists in this screen for the same field or column name Any information that is not specified in the hand off file will be picked up from the specifications you make in this screen You can maintain default information for bulk imports relating to e Fund rules e Fund price e Check book requests e Income distribution setup e Redemption checks e Standing instructions e Transactions e Load override for transactions e Unit holder accounts e Uploads for Unit Holder deals e Broker details You can invoke this screen by clicking the Detail option under the Bulk Client Defaul
444. st High Water Mark Hurdle Rate END_PRC End Price Price at period end SUB_PRC Subscription Price RED PRC Redemption Price GAV Latest Gross Asset Value GAV_SUB Gross Asset Value On Subscription Date GAV_RED Gross Asset Value On Redemption Date LOT_HWM_RED Lot level High Water Mark at time of redemption LOT_HWM_SUB Lot level High Water Mark at time of subscription LOT_HWMHR_RED Lot level High Water Mark Hurdle at time of redemption LOT_HWMHR_SUB Lot level High Water Mark Hurdle at time of subscription TXN_UNITS Transaction Units PF_RATE Performance Fee Rate defined at Fund Investor Category level 3 131 ORACLE Derived Factory Shipped Element Id Element Description APFPS_IN Accrued Performance fee per share calculated during inflow transac tions CLFAC_IN Contingent Liquidation Factor calculated during inflow transactions RED_AMT Redemption Amt SUB_AMT subscription Amt RED_UNITS Redemption units SUB_UNITS subscription units PF_VAL PF Value CL_VAL Contingent liquidation Value calculated during inflow Will be used as an expression element id to calculate the total CL value This represent the additional performance fee investor needs to pay to the fund manager in case of Early redemption Period End if Sub Price lt HWM hurdle during subscription and during redemption GAV gt red end price 3 37 2 Operat
445. st allocation For more information on how the indexation value is applied in the computation of capital gains tax refer the chapter The Allocation Process of FC IS system Maintaining Collection Centers and Payout Accounts The agency branch maintains accounts in banks that serve as collection centers for receipt of payment for inflow transactions from unit holders Also it maintains payout accounts to which payment for outflow transactions would be directed from where unit holders could cash their payment instruments Maintenance of collection center accounts and payout accounts is necessary as the default local accounts would not be able to service all unit holders who subscribe to the funds of the AMC From each collection center bank and payout bank the agency branch receives a list of zip codes serviced by the banks The system uses the maintained accounts and the zip code information while printing payment instruments for outflow transactions or pay in slips for inflow transactions to direct them to collection or payout banks that service the unit holders zip code For instance if your AMC s local branch is in London you would maintain a default collection center and payout account with a London based bank However to service investors of your AMC in Dover you would need to maintain a collection center and payout account with a bank based in Dover on a correspondent basis For details on how the collection center accou
446. st in Summary Screen You can retrieve a previously entered entity in the Summary screen as follows e Invoke the Switch Privilege Setup Summary screen and specify the following The status of the privilege setup in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the record in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved From Share Class ID e After you have specified the required details click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve an individual record from the Detail screen by doing query in the fol lowing manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value For example you can search the record for From Share Class Type ID by using the combination of and alphanumeric value as follows e Search by A The system will fetch all the records whose Share Class ID starts from Alphabet A For example AA e Search by 7 The system will fetch all the records whose Share Class ID Type ends by numeric value 7 For example S7 oS ORACLE Search by 1
447. st save your changes The system closes the screen and returns you to the main Load Definition screen where you must save the load record again Note When you create a load for the first time in this screen it is advisable that you set up any criteria based loads derived loads or basis loads simultaneously After a load is authorized no changes are possible to the load details i e you cannot subsequently set up derived basis or criteria based loads if it has been already mapped to a fund or a group Fields in Load Maintenance Screen Basic Information Section Load ID 5 Characters Maximum Numeric Mandatory Specify a unique alphanumeric identifier for the load Do not specify the ID of an existing load here e ORACLE Consider as Lower Boundary Optional Select yes to indicate that a slab basis value either amount or units or period or date that is a boundary value separating slabs must be considered as the lower boundary of a slab Cumulative Loads Optional Select yes to indicate that the load is cumulative in nature If you check this box it will be applied based on the static options set up for processing cumulative loads for the AMC This type of a load is applicable for funds for which the Rights of Accumulation ROA facility is applicable Load Type 1 Character Maximum Alphabetic Mandatory Indicate whether the load is to be applied and processed as a fee or an incentive by choosing th
448. status of the load maintenance records that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all load maintenance records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the other search parameters Click Search button All load maintenance records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the load that you want to view The Load Maintenance Detail screen is displayed in view mode 8 1 11 4 Deleting Loads You can delete only unauthorized loads in the system To delete a load Invoke the Load Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the load that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the other search parameters for retrieving the records Click Search button All loads with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the load that you want to delete The Load Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database B20 ORACLE 8 1 11 5 Authorizing Loads When a load is authorized any derived or basis loads that have been created for the load are also authorized in the database simultaneously After a lo
449. status of the switch privilege list that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorized field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify the Share Class ID optional in the corresponding field Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view The Switch Privilege Setup List Maintenance screen is opened in view mode 3 25 2 4 Deleting a Switch Privilege Setup You can delete only unauthorized switch privilege setup in the system To delete a switch privileges setup list Invoke the Switch Privilege List Setup Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify Share Class ID Optional in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to delete The Switch Privilege List Setup Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database ote ORACLE 3 25 2 5 3 25 2 6 3 25 2 7 3 25 2 8 Authorizing Switch Privilege Setup Lists An unauthorized
450. switch privilege setup must be authorized in the system for it to come into effect To authorize e Invoke the Switch Privilege Setup Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the records that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list e Specify the Share Class ID optional in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Switch Privilege Setup Maintenance screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes an entity details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the transaction during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the entity Amending Switch Privilege Setup Lists After a switch privilege setup is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to a switch privilege setup after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation e Invoke the Switch Privilege Setup Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of entities that are authorized e
451. system makes available all the param codes in German Later if the language for User1 is changed to French the param codes will be available in French Setting up Value Lists for Static Data For the purpose of setting up value lists for static information such as the following proceed in the manner described in the section Adding a list of values found earlier in this chapter e Bank account types e Countries e Corporation types e Identification types e Occupation types e Dividend component types e Investor category types Maintaining Additional Information Heads The Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing system gives you the facility of defining heads under which you can capture any additional information pertaining to any entities that you set up in the system especially unit holders and brokers You can also set up a list of acceptable valid values for each information head To define these additional information heads and their valid values use the Additional Information Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDADINF in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button am ORACLE 4 4 1 Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details Additional information Maintenance X New Enter Query Language Code Description Add Info Details 1of1 E Label Code
452. t the document is mandatory e Additional This indicates that the document is optional Select the appropriate option Minimum Document Reqd Document Category Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the document category from the adjoining option list as ORACLE 7 5 7 5 1 Document Category Description Display The system displays the document category description based on the selected document category Minimum Number Reqd Numeric Mandatory Specify the minimum number of the standard documents that is required Viewing FATCA Document Maintenance You can view FATCA Maintenance details in the FATCA Document Maintenance Summary screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTSFATDT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button FATCA Maintainance Summary r terres Athorzed Open Reteronce Number gt FATCA Entity Type Entity iD gt Entity Category Type FATCA Classification vt FATCA Compliant at Expery date m Chaung Oate s Records p r page 15 t of 1 Athorwed Open Reference Number FATCA Entity Type Emity 10 Emay Category Type FATCA Classiicaton g You can perform the following actions using this screen Viewing FATCA Document Maintenance Details You can view previously entered details of FATCA Maintenance in the FATCA Maintenance Summary screen as follows e Specify any or all of the following details in the
453. tail Click Search button to view the records All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value Deleting Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Details You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered mla ORACLE Invoke the Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the details and click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to delete The Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database 7 7 3 Modifying FATCA Maintenance Details You can modify only unauthorized records in the system To modify a record that you have previously entered Invoke the Entity FATCA Classification Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for modification Specify any or all of the details and click Search button All records with the specified
454. te You can however change the details if required Slaa ORACLE 3 35 3 35 1 3 35 2 Maintaining Rate Details for Hedge Funds You can maintain the interest rate details for hedge funds in Rate Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDRATES in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Rate Maintenance New amp Enter Query Rate Maintenance Rate Code Effective Date Currency Code Rate Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in Rate Maintenance Screen Rate Code Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the rate code applicable for hedge fund or select the rate code from the option list provided All rate codes maintained for the system parameter RATECODE get displayed in the option list Currency Code Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify currency code related to the hedge fund or select the same from the option list provided All valid currency codes maintained in the system get displayed in the option list Effective Date Date Mandatory Specify the date on which the selected rate code becomes effective in the system You can select the date by clicking the Calendar icon provided Rate Numeric Mandatory Specify the interest rate to be applied for hedge funds The rate specified here becomes effective on the Effective Date indicated previously Operations on
455. ted units should be considered while processing 100 outflow transactions by default e Allowed Default unchecked Provisionally allotted units will not be considered while processing 100 outflow transactions by default However you can check this option while performing transactions Auto Clear Reinvestments 1 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Indicate whether 100 outflow transactions include freeze held and reinvestment units You can specify any of the following options e Option not allowed Freeze held reinvestment units should not be considered while processing 100 outflow transactions e Allowed Default checked Freeze held reinvestment units should be considered while processing 100 outflow transactions by default e Allowed Default unchecked Freeze held reinvestment units will not be considered while processing 100 outflow transactions by default However you can check this option while performing transactions Other Defaults Section In this section define the other default information applicable for the AMC in any maintenance operation in the system Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Database 15 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Enter the name of database that contains all the objects tables stored procedures etc used by the system This will be displayed at the footer of all the screens at run time This field cannot be edited after it has been entered for the
456. tem will create corresponding unit holder accounts when the customer information is imported from FCC according to option you exercise in this field Note If you select either FCR or FCC as the Bulk Client Type then you must specify the Cus tomer Interface Key as mandatory information Effective Date for Capital Gains Calculations Date Format Mandatory Specify the date on which capital gains calculations must begin for the AMC This feature is only available if your installation has specifically requested for it It is mandatory for you to specify the effective date if EUSD average cost is to be computed Restrict Cross Branching with Agent Select Yes Cross Branching is allowed at this branch By enabling this the agency branch will be allowed to view details perform transactions pertaining to the unit holders created by the other agency branches in the system If this field is not clicked the agency branch will be able to view details and transact for the unit holders created by him only 219 ORACLE 3 4 1 1 Capturing Correspondence Address Details As part of correspondence details you can capture correspondence address alternate address and SWIFT address Click Corresp Address tab to maintain the correspondence details Single Entity Maintenance Detail New i8 Enter Query General Information Entity ID Entity Type Entity Category Nationality Country of Birth Country Of Domicile Country
457. tem will fetch all the records whose Load Description starts from Alphabet C For example Common Load Search Load ID by 5 The system will fetch all Load ID which end by 5 For example 5415 8 1 11 2 Editing Load Maintenance Details You can modify the details of a load that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Load Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the load records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records of loads that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters Click Search button All unauthorized loads with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the load that you want to modify The Load Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Load Maintenance Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Load Maintenance Summary screen 8 1 11 3 Viewing Load Maintenance Details To view the load maintenance details that you have previously entered Invoke the Load Maintenance Summary Screen from the Browser Select the
458. ter the record of an accounting and valuation agent into the system by creating it as an entity in the Single Entity Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by clicking the Detail option under the Entity menu in the Browser To set up an accounting and valuation agent select the Account and Valuation Agent option from the drop down list in the Entity Type field in the Common Information section and then proceed to enter the details for the agent You must specify all information such as the common information basic information and contact details for all agents that you set up You must also capture the following additional details specifically for accounting and valuation agents Setting up Participating Employers You can maintain records for participating employers as entities in the system For participating employers you can maintain basic details such as contact information signatories and base currency You can set up a participating employer in the Single Entity Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by clicking the Detail option under the Entity menu in the Browser To set up a participating employer select the Participating Employer in the Entity Type field and then proceed to enter the details You must specify all information such as the common information basic information bank details and contact details for all participating employers that you set up Setting up Paying Agents You can maintain rec
459. that you want to modify The Currency Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save the changes The Currency Maintenance screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Currency Maintenance Summary screen 6 2 2 3 Viewing Currency Details To view the currency details that you have previously entered Invoke the Currency Maintenance Summary Screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the currency records that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all currencies that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the search parameters Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view The Currency Maintenance screen Detail is displayed in view mode 6 2 2 4 Deleting Currency Details You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a currency record Invoke the Currency Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the currency record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the search parameters of the currency record in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All
460. the AMC uses for broad basing its operations Each Agent that will be operating for the AMC is given a unique profile in the system The term Agents as used in the system is distinct from Brokers This distinction can be depicted as follows e Level 1 Fund Manager representing the AMC e Level 2 Agents who act for the AMC e Level 3 Agency branches which act for the agents e Level 4 Brokers that interact with investors directly and mobilize investments from them ot ORACLE 3 8 3 9 You can set up an Agent in the Single Entity Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by clicking the Detail option under the Entity menu item in the Maintenance menu category of the Browser menu To set up an agent in the Single Entity Maintenance screen select the Agent option from the drop down list in the Entity Type field in the Common Information section and then proceed to enter the details for the agent The attributes specific to maintaining agents are e Restrict Cross Banking Within Agent e Agent Type e Signed Off Refer to the section Fields in the Single Entity Maintenance Screen in this chapter for details Setting up Agency Branches Agency branches in the system perform the role of accepting new unit holder related information and transactions from unit holders in various funds Only such agency branches as are set up using this screen can have Oracle FLEXCUBE installations You can set up an Agen
461. the Reversal at Source option you can choose either the transaction date or the price date option Reversal Date Basis Description Display Only The system displays description for the specified reversal date basis based on the details maintained in the system In cases where the accrual frequency is Daily and the Reversal at Source option is applicable and a transaction is reversed if the transaction date is earlier than the last accrued date for trailer commission the system recalculates the daily trailer commission from the transaction date to the last accrued date Also in cases where the accrual frequency and payment frequency are different and the Reverse at Source option is applicable and a transaction is reversed with the transaction date being earlier than the last paid date the holdings of such a transaction would have already been considered in the previous trailer commission computation In respect of such a transaction the system logs the following details indicating that the transaction payment has already been done e Fund ID and AMC ID e Distributor hierarchy details e Trailer commission last paid date e Original trailer commission amount accrued e Original transaction number e New transaction number e Original transaction value e Current value zero in case of reversals Others Section Price Basis Alphanumeric Mandatory Here you can indicate the price basis for periodic load computation The
462. the Summary screens you can retrieve any record to perform any operation as follows 1 Invoke the Summary screen from the Browser and specify the details in the corresponding fields 2 Click Search button to view the records All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve the individual transaction detail from the detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input the Identification Number Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value For example You can search the record for Identification Number by using the combination of and alphanumeric value as follows e Search by A System will fetch all the records whose Identification Number starts from Alphabet A For Example AGC17 AGVO6 AGC74 and so forth e Search by 7 System will fetch all the records whose Identification Number ends by numeric value 7 For Example AGC17 GSD267 AGC77 and so forth e Search by 17 System will fetch all the records whose Identification Number contains the numeric value 17 For Example GSD217 GSD172 AGC17 and so forth If there are more than 15 records you can specify the number of records that has to be listed in the screen You can also
463. the details of a AGY Bank A C Mapping record that you have already entered into the system provided it has not subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows 1 Invoke the AGY Bank A C Mapping Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the unauthorized option 3 Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields to retrieve the record that is to be modified 4 Click Search All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen oe ORACLE 3 27 2 3 3 27 2 4 5 Double click the record that you want to modify in the list of displayed records The AGY Bank A C Mapping Detail screen is displayed 6 Select Unlock Operation from the Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information 7 Click Save to save your changes The AGY Bank A C Mapping Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the AGY Bank A C Mapping Summary screen Viewing an AGY Bank Branch Record To view a record that you have previously input you must retrieve the same in the AGY Bank A C Mapping Summary screen as follows 1 Invoke the AGY Bank A C Mapping Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for viewing in t
464. the details of the withholding tax setup in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to amend The FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Maintenance screen is displayed in Amendment mode e Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the tax setup e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing Amended Withholding Tax Setup Parameters An amended record must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is subsequently the same as that for normal transactions Copying Attributes If you want to create a withholding tax setup having the same attributes of an existing record you can copy the attributes of an existing tax setup to a new tax setup To copy the attributes e Retrieve the entity whose attributes the new entity should inherit You can retrieve the record through the Summary screen or through the F7 F8 operation which is explained in the previous sections of this chapter e Click on Copy in the Actions list e Indicate the ID for the new Entity You can however change the details of the entity if required Maintaining Holidays You must define the weekly holidays and yearly holidays in the holiday calendar for each year Different AMCs
465. the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to amend The Campaign Maintenance screen is displayed in the amendment mode Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the record e Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Note While amending the campaign details the campaign end date should not be less than or equal to the Application date Admin Tax Maintenance Admin Tax calculated by an external system will be sent to FCIS System as an external file This can be interfaced and imported into FCIS system Admin Tax calculated by an external system can be imported into FLEXCUBE The amount is accrued and proportionately distributed among the credit unions with respect to the business made till date If Calculation method is set to Daily then the admin tax is computed and processed daily taking outstanding balance till date into consideration On the other hand if the calculation method is set to Average the admin tax is computed monthly taking average balance into consideration Note This feature is only available if your installation has requested for it Fa ORACLE 8 6 0 1 You can invoke the Admin Tax Maintenance Detail screen by typing UTDADTA in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Admin Tax Maintenanace Detail i New 7 Enter Query
466. the screen Double click the record that you want to delete The Switch Privilege List Setup Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database 3 25 4 5 Authorizing Exchange Lists An unauthorized exchange list setup must be authorized in the system for it to come into effect To authorize Invoke the Exchange List Summary screen from the Browser di ORACLE 3 25 4 6 3 25 4 7 3 25 4 8 3 26 e Select the status of the records that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list e Specify the Share Class ID optional in the corresponding field on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Exchange List Maintenance screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes an entity details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the transaction during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the exchange list Amending Exchange Lists After an exchange list setup is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock
467. the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the unauthorized option e Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Time Zone Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Authorize operation from the Action List When a checker authorizes a record details of validation if any that were overridden by the maker of the record during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the record Amending Time Zone Maintenance After a Time Zone Maintenance is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from the Action List To make changes to a record after authorization e Invoke the Time Zone Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization You can only amend authorized records e Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Time Zone Maintenance Detail screen is
468. there are a set of values Wed Thu Fri Sat from Sunday to Saturday Fund would map any day s as applicable While capturing SI you would be able to select any day from the set available at Fund level Fortnightly 1 22 You can select any 2 dates from 1 to 31 There 228 would be 5 such sets of dates at fund level While capturing SI you can select any of the sets 3 27 available at Fund level 4 29 5 20 Monthly Any date of month User would choose any date s from 1 to 31 While capturing SI user would select any of the date from the allowed dates at fund level Quarterly Any date of month You can choose any date s from 1 to 31 While capturing SI you can select any of the date from the allowed dates at fund level If the first SI is to generate on 18t Jan the next generation would happen on 18 April Note Only one of the weekly frequencies is applicable to a fund i e either date based or week based You are allowed to capture minimum amount maximum amount and minimum balance of SI for each frequency and transaction type Example for SIP of weekly frequency the minimum amount is Rs 500 and maximum amount is Rs 1000 The SI setup validates the SI for the amount captured at the frequency level The System should automatically cancels SIP SWP STP after 3 parameterized value continuous failures Also minimum balance in amount is captured for every frequency At the time of setting up SWP and STP the system
469. thorize a record e Amend a record ose ORACLE 3 40 1 For details on Mock Processing for Guaranteed Funds refer to the chapter End of Day Activities in FC IS system GF Policy Restrict Mapping Summary Screen You can invoke the GF Policy Restrict Mapping Summary screen by typing UTSGFPLR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button GF Policy Restrict Mapping Authorized Open Policy Number a Disable a Advanced Search Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Status Policy Number Disable m You can perform the following operations in the Policy Guaranteed Summary screen e Retrieving a Record in the Policy Guaranteed Summary screen e Editing a Policy Guaranteed Fund Record e Viewing a Policy Guaranteed Fund Record e Deleting a Policy Guaranteed Fund Record e Authorizing a Policy Guaranteed Fund Record e Amending a Policy Guaranteed Fund Record e Authorizing an Amended Policy Guaranteed Fund Record e Copying the Attributes 3 40 1 1 Retrieving a Record in the Policy Guaranteed Summary screen You can retrieve a previously entered record in the Summary Screen as follows 1 Inthe Browser select GF Restrict Mapping menu and click on Summary specify any or all of the following details in the corresponding fields The status of the record in the Autho
470. thorized You can perform this operation as follows e Invoke the Income Distribution Setup Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorization Status field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option e Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields to retrieve the record that is to be modified e Click Search button All unauthorized records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to modify The Income Distribution Setup Detail screen is displayed e Select Unlock Operation from Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information e Click Save to save your changes The Income Distribution Setup Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Income Distribution Setup Summary screen 3 5 2 3 Viewing Income Distribution Setup Record To view a record that you have previously entered you must retrieve the same in the Income Distribution Setup Summary screen as follows e Invoke the Summary Screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorization Status field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option e Specify an
471. thorized option Specify any or all of the search parameters in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All entities with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the entity that you want to view The Frequency Preferences Maintenance screen is displayed in view mode 3 33 2 4 Deleting Frequency Preference Record You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a frequency preference record Invoke the Frequency Preferences Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the search parameters of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to delete The Frequency Preferences Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database oe ORACLE 3 33 2 5 Authorizing Frequency Preferences An unauthorized frequency preference must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a frequency preference Invoke the Frequency Preferences Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to
472. ting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value For Example You can search the record for From Share Class ID by using the combination of and alphanumeric value as follows e Search by A The system will fetch all the records whose Share Class ID starts from Alphabet A For example AA e Search by 7 The system will fetch all the records whose Share Class ID Type ends by numeric value 7 For example S7 e Search by 17 The system will fetch all the records whose Share Class ID contains the numeric value 17 For example 17 aid ORACLE 3 25 4 2 Editing Exchange List You can modify the exchange list that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Exchange List Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorization Status field You can only modify records that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify the From Share Class Type ID optional in the corresponding field Click Search button All unauthorized exchange lists with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to modify The Exchange List Maintenance screen is displayed Sel
473. ting up Paying Agents 0 0 0 eee eceteee ee eenne eee eeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeseetiaeeeeeenenaees 3 48 Setting up ISA Fund Managers 0 0 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaas 3 49 3 21 1 Single Entity Maintenance Summary SCLECN Lou cece ttt eteetteneetees 3 49 Setting Up Withholding TAX renren reaa aE E EE E EERE EAEE 3 52 SLL T CROCK Sa iraa iaa a a i eee nese eS ee alia 3 54 3 22 2 Fields in FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Screen o ccisneeeeienseeinnneeeennnenna 3 54 3 22 3 Computation of Withholding TAX ssissrisiirinniinressisireisissonerinrner ieis erinina iird 3 56 3 22 4 Withholding Tax Setup Summary SCLOON Lu eeccciteeneeeeeteetteeeetenenneees 3 57 Maintaining Holidays ocena na are ae eileen Ra eee es 3 60 3 23 1 Holiday Maintenance Summary SCLECN 0 cece cette eee teeteeteeteenneeees 3 66 Mode of Payment 2222 ccccieedir eee aai AA AAT endive 3 69 3 24 1 Fields in Mode of Payment Details SCrCN ccccccceseeeteenteetettenennetees 3 70 3 24 2 Mode of Payment Detail Summary SCreen cccecccct cette ee tetenteteeteeeatees 3 71 Static Maintenance for Switch Transactions c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeaaees 3 71 3 25 1 Switch Privilege List SetU eirese E ORE AE 3 71 3 25 2 Switch Privilege List Setup Summary Screen cc cece eee eeente tees 3 72 3 25 3 Period Definition for Allowing Automatic Switch cccccccceeeeeteeeettteeeeeees 3 76 3 25 4 Exchange
474. tion and then proceed to enter the details for the bank branch You must specify all information such as the common information basic information and contact details for all bank branches that you set up You must also capture the following additional details specifically for bank branches Setting up Registrars You can enter the record of a registrar into the system by creating it as an entity You can set up a registrar in the Single Entity Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by clicking the Detail option under the Entity menu in the Browser To set up a registrar select the Registrar option from the drop down list in the Entity Type field and then proceed to enter the details for the registrar a0 ORACLE 3 14 3 15 3 16 Setting up Trustees You can enter the record of a trustee into the system by creating it as an entity You can set up a trustee in the Single Entity Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by clicking the Detail option under the Entity menu in the Browser To set up a trustee select the Trustee option from the drop down list in the Entity Type field and then proceed to enter the details for the trustee You must specify all information such as the common information basic information and contact details for all trustees that you set up You must also capture the following additional details specifically for trustees Setting up Check Vendors The AMC may issue checkbo
475. tion from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database 3 29 2 6 Authorizing Country Preference Details An unauthorized currency must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a currency 1 Invoke the Country Preference Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser eit ORACLE 3 29 2 7 3 29 2 8 3 29 2 9 3 30 2 Select the status of the currency record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the unauthorized option from the drop down list 3 Specify any or all of the search parameters of the currency in the corresponding fields on the screen 4 Click Search All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the currency that you wish to authorize The Country Preference Maintenance screen displayed Select Authorize operation from Action When the checker authorizes a preference details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the currency code during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the currency Amending Country Preference Details After a country preference is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to a currency after authorization you m
476. tional Give a brief description on FATCA classification FATCA Classification Reason Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the reason for FATCA classification from the adjoining option list Description Alphanumeric Optional Give a brief description on the FATCA classification reason FATCA Reportable Optional FATCA Reportable gets defaulted from the FATCA document maintenance for the entity selected You can change the value from Yes to No but vice versa is not allowed System defaults FATCA Reportable as No FATCA With holdable Optional FATCA With holdable gets defaulted from the FATCA document maintenance for the entity selected You can change the value from Yes to No but vice versa is not allowed System defaults FATCA With holdable as No FATCA Documents Document Category Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the document category from the adjoining option list Document Type Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the type of the document from the adjoining option list 1 ORACLE Mandatory Alphanumeric Mandatory You need to indicate whether the document is mandatory or optional The drop down list displays the following options e Standard This indicates that the document is mandatory e Additional This indicates that the document is optional Select the appropriate option Document ID Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the document identification Issue Date Date Format Mandatory
477. tional Enter the name of the contact person at the entity s offices 320 ORACLE Address Lines 1 2 Alphanumeric Optional Enter the default postal address that is to be used for correspondence with the entity being set up in the system City Alphanumeric Optional Enter the city where the entity is located State Alphanumeric Optional Enter the State where the City is located Address Lines 1 2 Alphanumeric Optional Enter the alternate postal address that is to be used for correspondence with the entity being set up in the system City Alphanumeric Optional Enter the city where the entity is located State Alphanumeric Optional Enter the State where the City is located eel ORACLE 3 4 1 4 Specifying CPF Account Types Single Entity Maintenance Detail New Enter Query Basic Information Base Currency Currency Name Bank Agent Code Bank Agent Name Authorized Signatory MICR Code FATCA Status FATCA Classification Description Employee Identification Number EIN Global Intermediary Identification Number GIIN Sunday C Monday C Tuesday Others Customer Interface Key FLEXCUBE S Installation Module Agent Desc Effective Date for Capital Gains Section Cross Branching Allowed Yes Module Agent Type Nature of Business Switching Logic Unit Holder Generation Logic US Indicia Available C Wednesday C Thursday Friday
478. tive FATCAWHTEFFDT 10 Date FATCA WHT Percentage FATCAWHTPERCENTAGE 3 Document for individuals MASTERDOCIND Max Document for corporate MASTERDOCCORP Max Category of the docu MASTERDOCCAT 3 2 ments Max of holding for Cor FATCAMINPCNTHLDG Max porate UH for the defined directors The international dialling INTDIALCODE country code 7 2 ORACLE 7 4 Maintaining FATCA Documents You can maintain the list of FATCA Document details in the FATCA Document Maintenance Detail screen To invoke this screen type UTDFATDT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button FATCA Document Maintenance Detail FATCA Entity Type Unit Holder hd Entity Category Type Individual FATCA Classification FATCA Classification Description FATCA Document List 1of1 E Document Category Document Category Description Document Type Document Type Description Mandatory lat gt Standard Minimum Document Reqd 1of1 Document Category Document Category Description Minimum Number Reqd at Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authonzed You can capture the following in this screen FATCA Entity Type Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the FATCA entity type from the adjoining option list Entity Category Type Select the entity category type from the adjoining drop down list The options available are e Individual e
479. to investor accounts and investor transactions from an external source or client into its database The volume of information that is imported in such cases is usually very large The external source or client in such cases is called a bulk client The information is usually handed off in flat files ASCII text or any other text format The import of this information means updation of the AMC database with the information that is found in the hand off files so that the AMC database may reflect the import information All necessary validations for the successful updating the database with the imported information are performed during the import The Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing FCIS system enables the AMC to import information in bulk from an external client relating to any of the following e Unit holder information setting up of new accounts and changing unit holder information on existing accounts e Transactions for unit holders only new subscription redemption transfer and conversion transactions and amended transactions if indicated for the bulk client e Policy transactions for unit holders e Income distribution setup for unit holders e Standing instructions for unit holders e Overrides of loads on transactions for unit holders e Fund prices for transactions e Unit Holder Deal uploads e Broker details e Check Book requests e Fund Rules e Redemption Checks The import can be performed using the generi
480. ton High Water Mark Maintenance New 453 Enter Query Fund ID Fund Name Effective Date High Water Mark HWM Input by DateTime Authorized by DateTime Mod No Open Authorized Fields in High Water Mark Maintenance Screen Fund ID Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the fund Id for which you wish to maintain high water mark or select the fund Id from the option list provided Fund Name The name of the selected fund gets displayed here Effective Date Date Mandatory Specify the date on which the high water mark value becomes effective for the fund You can also select the date by clicking the Calendar icon provided High Water Mark Numeric Mandatory Specify the high water mark value for the selected fund beyond which if the fund value increases the performance fee gets collected You need to capture this value only for the first valuation period for the fund For subsequent periods the system will automatically populate the highest net asset value previously achieved by the fund Operations on High Water Mark You can perform the following operations on a high water mark record e New an unauthorized record will be created If you have rights for auto Authorization the record will be authorized e Modify an unauthorized record can be modified by the maker edit rights required Pier ORACLE e Delete an unauthorized record can be deleted by the maker You can not delete the una
481. transactions e Receive the entire earnings dividend or commission as payment either entirely through checks or account transfer 3 24 ORACLE e Not receive the earnings by way of payment but invest the earnings back into the funds of the AMC This is known as reinvestment Also the reinvestment could be made into a designated unit holder account too e Receive a portion of the earnings by way of payment and reinvest the remaining portion The pattern chosen by the entity to use earnings is known as the Income Distribution Setup pattern or the IDS pattern for the entity You can capture this pattern for any entity in the Oracle FLEXCUBE Investor Servicing system in the Income Distribution Setup Detail screen You can invoke this screen by typing UTDBRIDS in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon to enter the details income Distribution Setup Detail New 73 Enter Query Client Information Entity Type Entity Name Entity ID Description Details FundID Payment Currency Distribution Mode j Reinvestment Percentage Payment Percentage ISIN Code Rule Applicable for All Fund Name Funds Currency Name E Reinvestment Details Routing Details Payment Mode v Payment Type Seif Third Party Details Third Party Reference
482. tration of an investment from one platform to another will not be by default classified as an advised event and trail commission can continued to be paid In case the re registration is based on advised activity then trail commission cannot be paid It will be required to capture whether re registration is based on advice or not Post RDR in case there is a change in agent the reason for the same will determine the eligibility for payment of commission In case the change of agent is due to agent s decision like old agent selling his business the new agent will inherit the terms of holdings and receive trail commission If the change of agent is due decision by investor no trial commission is payable to the new agent Trail commission can be paid to the investor and reinvested At present from the management fee charged by the AMC a portion is paid to advisor as trail commission portion paid to platform providers and the balance is retained for fund management The RDR regulations ban payment of trail commission on new retail advised business In order to comply with the regulations the AMC may introduce a new fund class for all the existing funds with lower management fees The AMC may also retain the existing funds and modify the fee structure Post RDR AMCs may reduce the management fees or retain the old structure and pay rebate to either or both platform providers and investors In case platform providers are continued to be paid from the
483. ts menu in the Browser Click new icon to enter the details Maintaining Default Information for Bulk Client Imports In the Bulk Client Defaults Maintenance screen you can maintain default information for bulk imports from a bulk client to be applicable for a distributor institution The specifications you make in any of the fields here for each upload type are accepted as the default values for the corresponding field or column name for all bulk imports where the hand off files from the bulk client do not contain the corresponding information Accordingly you must select the ID of the bulk client for whom the default information is applicable in the Bulk Account Client Code field and the AMC distributor entity in the AMC Distributor ID field For some of the upload types the default information consists of fields from the corresponding maintenance in the system therefore the default information is very similar to a maintenance template or blueprint For instance when you define the defaults for fund rules import you specify all the fund rules in the Bulk Clients Defaults screen This is just like filling in the fund rules in the system for a new fund validations for all fields are similar to those made in the Fund Rules screens when a new fund is entered The default information for each upload type is listed in this chapter for field level information you must refer the chapters in the user manual where the corresponding
484. u must set up the interfaces in the system that will actually drive the import according to the frequency at which it is required to run Note Initially on the first instance that the interfaces are to be set up the implementers at the installation will do so Subsequently the administrator at the installation would perform any change to the interface You need to set up the following interfaces One interface to drive the import of all unit holder account related information This interface will facilitate the uploading of new unit holder accounts as well as those for which an information change must occur One interface for the import of the following information New and amended transactions Unit holder income distribution setup Standing instructions Load overrides for transactions Fund prices for transactions One interface for the export of all records that fail to be imported that is those that are rejected by the import process for any reason Through the Interface Definition Summary screen in the Maintenance menu category of the Fund Manager component authorize the interfaces you have created Uploads for Unit Holder deals Broker details i ORACLE 5 5 5 5 1 e Check Book requests e Fund Rules for transactions e Redemption Checks You can set up all the interfaces through the Interface Maintenance screen that is invoked by clicking the Interface Maintenance menu item in the Maintenance menu
485. ued amount that can be paid out to the entity ORACLE 3 6 2 If the amount accrued for the payment period is less than the minimum amount specified the system carries forward this amount to the next payment cycle Mode Of Payment Mandatory Select the mode of payment Check or Transfer Mode of Payment Description Display Only The system displays description of the selected mode of payment Include Trailer Fee Optional Enable this option if you wish to indicate that trailing commission in respect of the entity must be paid out using the payment details you have specified Hold Back Payment Optional Indicate if commission payment to the entity is to be held and not paid If this option is enabled all commission accrued is carried forward to the next cycle Payment Currency Specify the payment currency The adjoining option list displays all valid payment currencies maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Payment Currency Description Display Upon selection of the payment currency the system displays the description of the specified payment currency FCIS Entity Payment Maintenance Summary Screen You can invoke the Fund Entity Payment Maintenance Summary screen by typing UTSENTPY in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Enter a unique Identification for the fund type that is being set up This should not be a
486. uld be effective in the system You can edit the transaction any number of times before the target based fee is authorized You can also delete a target based fee before it is authorized After authorization you can only make changes to the transaction The Target Based Fee Summary screen can be used for the following operations e Retrieving target based fee for viewing e Editing unauthorized target based fee e Deleting unauthorized target based fee e Authorizing setups e Amending authorized setups e Close target based fee e Reopen target based fee igi ORACLE You can invoke the Target Based Fee Summary screen by typing UTSTGBFE in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Target Based Fee Summary Authorized Open Reference Number H Fund ID AMC ID H Load ID Processs Date E Broker ID Processed Advanced Search Reset Records per page 15 v LE Authorized Open Reference Number FundiD AMCID LoadiD Processs Date BrokeriD Processe 8 3 0 1 Retrieving Viewing Target Based Fee Details To retrieve a previously entered exchange rate record e Invoke the Target Based Fee Summary screen and specify the following The authorization status of the exchange rate record in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the exchange rate
487. ults in an error the checker must reject the entity Amending KYC Ref Type Restrictions Record After the interest rate details are authorized they can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to the interest rate details after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation 1 Invoke the Interest Rate Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of entities that are authorized 3 Specify any or all of the search parameters in the corresponding fields on the screen aul ORACLE 3 32 2 7 3 32 2 8 3 33 4 Click Search All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the record that you want to amend The Interest Rate Maintenance screen is displayed in Amendment mode 6 Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the entity 7 Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing KYC Ref Type Restrictions Record Any amended interest rate details must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is subsequently the same as that for normal transactions Copying the Attributes If you want to create a KYC Ref Type Restriction having the same attributes of
488. umeric Mandatory The Entity ID is a unique Identification for an entity in the system Any detail regarding an entity is obtained by using the entity ID for reference The ID you specify here must be unique and not already in use for any other entity in the system Entity Name 60 Character Maximum Alphanumeric Mandatory Specify the name or description of the entity being set up in the system Entity Category Type Alphanumeric Optional Specify whether the entity being maintained belongs to the Individual or Corporate categories This specification is optional if specified you must also select the appropriate category in the Entity Category field Entity Category Alphanumeric Conditional From the drop down list select the category to which the entity belongs Nationality Alphanumeric Optional Select the nationality from the adjoining option list Country of Birth Alphanumeric Optional Select the country of birth from the adjoining option list Country of Domicile Alphanumeric Optional Select the country of domicile from the adjoining option list Country of Incorporation Alphanumeric Optional Select the Incorporation country from the adjoining option list Country Code for all Telephone Numbers Optional Specify the country code for the telephone number Category Name Display Only The system displays investor s category name here based on the details maintained in the system oe ORACLE Base Currency
489. unts for each agency branch to direct payments to unit holders through any mode for outflow transactions from each fund For each payout account you need to specify the following information in the AGY Bank Branch Details screen e The code of the payout bank and branch e The type of account maintained in the payout bank or branch e The currency of the account e The number of the account and the owner of the account e The limit placed on the payment amount directed to the bank for a transaction If this limit is exceeded a demand draft payment would have to be made e Whether the account is the default payout account for the agency branch transaction type payment mode and fund ID combination You must maintain at least one default payout account e The correspondent bank accounts to which payment would be directed if the zip code of the unit holder receiving the payment is not serviced by the payout bank To maintain correspondent bank details click on the Details button The Correspondent Bank Details Section screen is opened where you can specify the details You maintain the same details as for a payout account with a limit amount Fields in AGY Bank A C Mapping Details Screen Module ID Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the module agency branch for which you are designating the collection center or payout account in this screen Transaction Type Alphanumeric Mandatory Select the type of outflow transaction for whi
490. ured for all entities other than Bank Branches and are optional for all entities except AMCs and Distributors For Banks you can capture the details of Correspondent Banks as part of the bank details Commission payments for an entity are made to the default settlement account designated in the Income Distribution Setup IDS record maintained for the entity If no IDS have been maintained the default bank account designated in the entity details record is considered as the default settlement account You can capture the following details for each entity bank account e Bank and branch in which the account resides e Account number e Account name and the owner of the account e Account currency e Whether direct debits are allowed for the account e Whether the account is the default account for the entity i ORACLE Click Bank Details tab to capture the bank details in the Bank Details section in the Single Entity Maintenance screen Single Entity Maintenance Detail New Enter Query MICR Code Others Section Cross Branching Allowed Module Agent Type Nature of Business Switching Logic Unit Holder Generation Logic Bank Details Account Name Account Currency Bank Account Type Account Number Reference1 Beneficiary Details Beneficiary Beneficiary Acct No Beneficiary Info Intermediary Details Intermediary Intermediary Acct No Intermediary Info Input by Authorized by Sunday
491. ust invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation 1 Invoke the Country Preference Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the currency record that you wish to retrieve for amendment You can only amend records of currencies that are authorized 3 Specify any or all of the search parameters of the currency in the corresponding fields on the screen 4 Click Search All currency records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen 5 Double click the currency that you want to amend The Country Preference Maintenance screen is displayed in Amendment mode 6 Click the Unlock operation from the Action list to amend the currency 7 Amend the necessary information Click the Save button to save the changes Authorizing Country Preference Details An amended country preference record must be authorized for the amendment to be made effective in the system The process of authorization is the same as the process of normal authorization Copying the attributes If you want to create a new country preference record having the same attributes of an existing country preference record you can copy the attributes of an existing country preference record to a new country preference record To copy the attributes 1 Retrieve the country preference record whose attributes the new preference should inherit You can retrieve the country prefe
492. uthorized record created by amendment delete rights required e Authorize an unauthorized record can be authorized by anyone other than the maker authorize rights required e Amendment you can amend an HWM record however the amendment will not be allowed if fund price is maintained for the day later than or equal to HWM effective date 3 36 3 High Water Mark Summary screen You can invoke the High Water Mark Summary screen by typing UTSHWM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button High Water Mark Summary Authorized Open Fund ID a Effective Date High Water Mark HWM a Advanced Search Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Fund ID Effective Date High Water Mark HWM You can perform the following operations in this screen 3 36 3 1 Viewing a High Water Mark record To view a record that you have previously input you must retrieve the same in the High Water Mark Summary screen as follows e Invoke the High Water Mark Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for viewing in the Authorized field You can also view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option e Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Query All records with the specified fields are
493. utton and choose the relevant branch in the AMC Branch field 2a ORACLE 2 4 11 3 Main Menu Screen You can specify the operations from the main menu items in your user profile If you do not perform any activity for more than the time maintained as the session timeout the system will automatically log you out after displaying a message Home Interactions Tasks Preferences Change Module Options Help Sign Off gt Menu e Alc System Component Alc System GL Setup AGY Bank A c Mapping AMC Agent SLA AccountOfficer IFA E AdHoc Price S Admin Tax Agency Branch A O Agent Price Basis Asset Management NAV Auth Rep Auto Replicate Pref AutoSwitch SetUp Back Data Propagation amp Bank Reconciliation Batch Branch Sign OfffOn Broker Journal m Broker Maintenance Broker Migration Broker Payment Currency preference Broker Type Bulk Client Defaults CIF Addr Fund Map amp CIF Address Campaign Maintenance Cheque Book Request Cheque Printing Cheque Status Cheque Tracking Cheque Writing Status Corporate Actions Country Currency Country Preference Currency Cutoff Currency Maintenance Distributor SI amp Dividend Component Dividend Equilization Dividend Reversal EFT Setup Early Redemption amp Element Maintenance Entity Entity Comm Share amp Entity IDS Entity Media Maintenance amp E
494. valid fund type already existing in the system The following operations can be performed in the Fund Entity Payment Maintenance Summary screen e Retrieving an Entity Payment Record e Editing an Entity Payment Record e Viewing an Entity Payment Record e Delete an Entity Payment Record e Authorizing an Entity Payment Record e Amending an Entity Payment Record e Authorizing an amended Entity Payment Record sal ORACLE 3 6 2 1 3 6 2 2 e Copying the Attributes FCIS Entity Payment Maintenance Summary Authorized Open Entity ID E Entity Type Advanced Search Records per page 15 v 1 of 1 Authorized Open Entity ID Entity Type Retrieving an Entity Payment Record To retrieve a previously entered exchange rate record e Invoke the Entity Payment Summary screen and specify the following The authorization status of the exchange rate record in the Authorized field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the exchange rate records in the Open field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The Entity ID Entity Type e After you have specified the required details click Search All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen You can also retrieve an individual exchange rate detail from the Detail screen by doing query in the following ma
495. validates this amount against the amount by multiplying the balance and the latest NAV The STP validation is applicable in the fund from which STP is done FCIS also allows you to capture the minimum number of SI at frequency level SI setup is allowed until the criteria for minimum number of SI is met The start date and end date of the SI is generated depending on the SI rules For example UH can invest in monthly frequency SI dates are 2nd or 10th of a month Seia ORACLE 3 33 1 3 33 1 1 UH can invest in quarterly frequency SI dates are 3 or 15 of a month Minimum number of installments for monthly frequency is 6 and for quarterly frequency is 2 Assuming that a unit holder decides to invest in monthly SIP and selects 10 as the SIP date The application is submitted on gth Jan and UH gives 6 instructions The SI setup is allowed because criteria for 6 SI s are met Also the start date and end date is defaulted to 10 Jan and 10 Jun respectively In case SWP STP results in lesser amount being confirmed back by RTA a case where no further balance is available the SWP STP is automatically canceled The Frequency Preferences Detail screen can be used to define setup of dates days that can be used for mapping in Fund rules and Standing Instructions You can invoke this screen by typing UTDFRQPR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button S
496. view all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records Click Search button All the records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you want to view The Source Currency Pair Maintenance screen Detail is displayed in view mode 6 4 4 4 Deleting Source Currency Pair Details You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a source currency pair record Invoke the Source Currency Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the source currency pair record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the search parameters for retrieving the records Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the source currency pair that you want to delete The Source Currency Pair Maintenance Detail screen is displayed Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database 9 16 ORACLE 6 4 4 5 6 4 4 6 6 4 4 7 6 4 5 Authorizing Source Currency Pair Details An unauthorized source currency pair association must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To
497. w all records that are either unauthorized or authorized only by choosing the Unauthorized Authorized option e Specify any or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All the records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the entity that you want to view The FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Maintenance screen is opened in view mode 3 22 4 4 Deleting Withholding Tax Setup Record You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a withholding tax setup record e Invoke the FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion e Specify any or all of the details of the Withholding Tax Setup in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to delete The FCIS Withholding Tax Setup Maintenance Detail screen is displayed e Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database 3 22 4 5 Authorizing Withholding Tax Setup An unauthorized withholding tax setup must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a record e Invok
498. y or all of the details of the record in the corresponding fields on the screen e Click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen e Double click the record that you want to view in the list of displayed records The Income Distribution Setup Detail screen is displayed in View mode 3 5 2 4 Deleting Income Distribution Setup Record You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered e Invoke the Income Distribution Setup Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion e Specify any or all of the details and click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen oat ORACLE 3 5 2 5 3 5 2 6 3 5 2 7 3 5 2 8 e Double click the record that you want to delete The Income Distribution Setup Detail screen is displayed e Select Delete operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is deleted physically from the system database Authorizing Income Distribution Setup An unauthorized Income Distribution Setup must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a record e Invoke the Income Distribution Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to ret
499. y typing UTSEXCRM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Exchange Rate Maintenance Summary tes Authorized X Open X Source ID ai FX Value Date e Exchange Rate for Report a FX Deal Date e Serial Number z Pair Currency a Advanced Search Records per page 15 v LE 4 a Authorized Open Status SourcelD FXValue Date Exchange Rate for Repot FXDealDate SerialNumber m lt m 6 5 3 1 Retrieving Exchange Rate Record To retrieve a previously entered exchange rate record e Invoke the Exchange Rate Maintenance Summary screen and specify the following The authorization status of the exchange rate record in the Authorization Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The status of the exchange rate records in the Record Status field If you choose the Blank Space option then all the records are retrieved The Source ID Exchange Rate for Report FX Value Date FX Deal Date e After you have specified the required details click Search button All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Note You can also retrieve an individual exchange rate detail from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen Press F8
500. yed Select Unlock Operation from the Action list to modify the record Modify the necessary information Click Save to save your changes The Element Maintenance Detail screen is closed and the changes made are reflected in the Element Maintenance Summary screen 3 37 3 3 Deleting an Element Maintenance record You can delete only unauthorized records in the system To delete a record that you have previously entered Invoke the Element Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for deletion Specify any or all of the details in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Query All records with the specified fields are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen siaa ORACLE e Double click the record that you want to delete in the list of displayed records The Element Maintenance Detail screen is displayed e Select Delete Operation from the Action list The system prompts you to confirm the deletion and the record is physically deleted from the system database 3 37 3 4 Authorizing an Element Maintenance record 3 38 An unauthorized Element Maintenance must be authorized in the system for it to be processed To authorize a record e Invoke the Element Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser e Select the status of the record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the unauthorized option e Specify any or all
501. yment Record An unauthorized exchange rate record must be authorized in the system for it to come into effect To authorize an exchange rate 1 2 Invoke the Entity Payment Summary screen from the Browser Select the status of the exchange rate record that you want to retrieve for authorization Typically choose the unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the search parameters in the corresponding fields on the screen Click Search All records with the specified details that are pending authorization are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen Double click the record that you wish to authorize The Entity Payment screen displayed Select Authorize operation from Action Sa ORACLE 3 6 2 6 3 6 2 7 3 6 2 8 3 7 When the checker authorizes an exchange rate details of validations if any that were overridden by the maker of the exchange rate during the Save operation are displayed If any of these overrides results in an error the checker must reject the maintenance Amending an Entity Payment Record After an entity payment record is authorized it can be modified using the Unlock operation from Action list To make changes to an exchange rate after authorization you must invoke the Unlock operation which is termed as Amend Operation 1 Invoke the Entity Payment Summary screen from the Browser 2 Select the status of the record that you wish to retriev
502. you have specified the required details All records with the specified details are retrieved and displayed in the lower portion of the screen ae ORACLE Note You can also retrieve an individual Load ID from the Detail screen by doing query in the following manner Press F7 Input any parameter in the screen Press F8 You can perform Edit Delete Amend Authorize Reverse Confirm operation by selecting from the Action list You can also search the record by using combination of and alphanumeric value Example You can search the record for Load ID by using the combination of and alphanumeric value Search Fund ID by F The system will fetch all the records whose Fund ID starts from Alphabet F Example Fund1 Search Fund by 7 The system will fetch all the records whose Fund ID ends with 7 Example FUND7 8 1 18 2 Editing Periodic Load Maintenance Details You can modify the details of a periodic load that you have already entered into the system provided it has not been subsequently authorized You can perform this operation as follows Invoke the Periodic Load Maintenance Summary screen from the Browser Select the authorization status of the periodic load records that you want to retrieve for modification in the Authorized field You can only modify records of loads that are unauthorized Accordingly choose the Unauthorized option from the drop down list Specify any or all of the s
503. you offer to investors You can maintain products with different attributes to attract specific investors The attributes could be funding retirement features premium and annuity features loans withdrawals and so on Fund Prices You can also maintain the NAV and the transaction base prices for each fund for each transaction type for each business day Other Fund Activities You can also maintain bank accounts used by the fund in each currency in which the fund transacts Refer the following chapters in Fund Manager User Manual for a full discussion of all maintenance functions in Fund Manager e Maintaining Reference Information e Setting up Loads e Maintaining Currencies and Capturing Exchange Rates e Other Maintenance Functions in the Maintenance Module e Setting up Funds zs ORACLE 2 3 2 1 Hedge Funds Hedge funds are special type of investment funds that use leveraging and other investment strategies to hedge the exposure of a portfolio against the movements in the equity market They can take both short and long positions use arbitrage trade options and bonds and invest in any opportunity where they can make impressive gains at reduced risk Hedge funds are handled by hedge fund managers They charge the investors a fee called performance fee which is a percentage of the gains received by the investor As investors enter and exit hedge funds at different points in time the performance gains received by them

Reference Information User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents